WO2024091878A1 - System and method for a multi-primary wide gamut color system - Google Patents
System and method for a multi-primary wide gamut color system Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2024091878A1 WO2024091878A1 PCT/US2023/077539 US2023077539W WO2024091878A1 WO 2024091878 A1 WO2024091878 A1 WO 2024091878A1 US 2023077539 W US2023077539 W US 2023077539W WO 2024091878 A1 WO2024091878 A1 WO 2024091878A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- data
- operable
- yxy
- color
- image data
- Prior art date
Links
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 title abstract description 156
- 239000003086 colorant Substances 0.000 claims abstract description 60
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 claims description 91
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 claims description 57
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 claims description 39
- 230000015654 memory Effects 0.000 claims description 38
- 238000012886 linear function Methods 0.000 claims description 32
- 238000003384 imaging method Methods 0.000 claims description 27
- 238000004422 calculation algorithm Methods 0.000 claims description 23
- 238000005286 illumination Methods 0.000 claims description 11
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 claims description 9
- 230000003190 augmentative effect Effects 0.000 claims description 8
- 238000004566 IR spectroscopy Methods 0.000 claims description 7
- 239000003814 drug Substances 0.000 claims description 4
- 229940079593 drug Drugs 0.000 claims description 3
- 238000005070 sampling Methods 0.000 description 78
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 63
- 230000032258 transport Effects 0.000 description 51
- 238000013507 mapping Methods 0.000 description 49
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 description 47
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 description 38
- 230000009977 dual effect Effects 0.000 description 33
- 241000023320 Luma <angiosperm> Species 0.000 description 31
- OSWPMRLSEDHDFF-UHFFFAOYSA-N methyl salicylate Chemical compound COC(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1O OSWPMRLSEDHDFF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 31
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 23
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 23
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 22
- 102100035765 Angiotensin-converting enzyme 2 Human genes 0.000 description 20
- 108090000975 Angiotensin-converting enzyme 2 Proteins 0.000 description 20
- 101100325959 Arabidopsis thaliana BHLH77 gene Proteins 0.000 description 20
- 101100378100 Mus musculus Ace3 gene Proteins 0.000 description 20
- 238000013528 artificial neural network Methods 0.000 description 19
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 19
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 18
- 239000011159 matrix material Substances 0.000 description 18
- 238000004737 colorimetric analysis Methods 0.000 description 15
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 15
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 14
- 238000009877 rendering Methods 0.000 description 14
- 239000002096 quantum dot Substances 0.000 description 12
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 11
- 238000010801 machine learning Methods 0.000 description 11
- 230000003595 spectral effect Effects 0.000 description 11
- 238000007906 compression Methods 0.000 description 10
- 230000006835 compression Effects 0.000 description 10
- 238000005457 optimization Methods 0.000 description 10
- 238000003860 storage Methods 0.000 description 10
- 238000004364 calculation method Methods 0.000 description 9
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 9
- 230000035945 sensitivity Effects 0.000 description 9
- 238000006467 substitution reaction Methods 0.000 description 9
- 239000003826 tablet Substances 0.000 description 9
- 230000000007 visual effect Effects 0.000 description 9
- 238000012937 correction Methods 0.000 description 8
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 description 8
- 238000001228 spectrum Methods 0.000 description 8
- 210000001519 tissue Anatomy 0.000 description 8
- 230000006978 adaptation Effects 0.000 description 7
- 238000002059 diagnostic imaging Methods 0.000 description 7
- 210000003128 head Anatomy 0.000 description 7
- 230000033001 locomotion Effects 0.000 description 7
- 229920001621 AMOLED Polymers 0.000 description 6
- 239000000994 contrast dye Substances 0.000 description 6
- 239000002872 contrast media Substances 0.000 description 6
- 238000013135 deep learning Methods 0.000 description 6
- 238000011161 development Methods 0.000 description 6
- 230000018109 developmental process Effects 0.000 description 6
- 238000009826 distribution Methods 0.000 description 6
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 6
- 230000004438 eyesight Effects 0.000 description 6
- 239000011888 foil Substances 0.000 description 6
- 230000036541 health Effects 0.000 description 6
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 6
- 230000007170 pathology Effects 0.000 description 6
- 238000011160 research Methods 0.000 description 6
- 239000000243 solution Substances 0.000 description 6
- 239000003381 stabilizer Substances 0.000 description 6
- OAICVXFJPJFONN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Phosphorus Chemical compound [P] OAICVXFJPJFONN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 238000013473 artificial intelligence Methods 0.000 description 5
- 230000000670 limiting effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 239000004973 liquid crystal related substance Substances 0.000 description 5
- 238000002432 robotic surgery Methods 0.000 description 5
- 230000035807 sensation Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000004458 analytical method Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000003491 array Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000000701 chemical imaging Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000002591 computed tomography Methods 0.000 description 4
- 239000000835 fiber Substances 0.000 description 4
- 238000001914 filtration Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000007667 floating Methods 0.000 description 4
- 239000012530 fluid Substances 0.000 description 4
- 238000003058 natural language processing Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000012706 support-vector machine Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000012800 visualization Methods 0.000 description 4
- 241000579895 Chlorostilbon Species 0.000 description 3
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000001413 cellular effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000000295 complement effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000010276 construction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 239000010976 emerald Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229910052876 emerald Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 230000002068 genetic effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000010410 layer Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000007726 management method Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000005259 measurement Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000007935 neutral effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000002829 reductive effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000004065 semiconductor Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000011664 signaling Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000009466 transformation Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000001429 visible spectrum Methods 0.000 description 3
- 241000282412 Homo Species 0.000 description 2
- 241001637516 Polygonia c-album Species 0.000 description 2
- 206010052428 Wound Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000027418 Wounds and injury Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000003044 adaptive effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- TZCXTZWJZNENPQ-UHFFFAOYSA-L barium sulfate Chemical compound [Ba+2].[O-]S([O-])(=O)=O TZCXTZWJZNENPQ-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 2
- 230000017531 blood circulation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000013144 data compression Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000007418 data mining Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000002950 deficient Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000003111 delayed effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000010432 diamond Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910003460 diamond Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000000975 dye Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000002592 echocardiography Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000007850 fluorescent dye Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000009432 framing Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000002347 injection Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000007924 injection Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000003902 lesion Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000002595 magnetic resonance imaging Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 2
- 201000001441 melanoma Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 230000005693 optoelectronics Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000036961 partial effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000002245 particle Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000008447 perception Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000002093 peripheral effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000013139 quantization Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000003362 replicative effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 210000001525 retina Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 230000002207 retinal effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000012552 review Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229920006395 saturated elastomer Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 230000006403 short-term memory Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000004611 spectroscopical analysis Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000009987 spinning Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000003068 static effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000001360 synchronised effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000012360 testing method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000013519 translation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000002604 ultrasonography Methods 0.000 description 2
- PXFBZOLANLWPMH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 16-Epiaffinine Natural products C1C(C2=CC=CC=C2N2)=C2C(=O)CC2C(=CC)CN(C)C1C2CO PXFBZOLANLWPMH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- RBTBFTRPCNLSDE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3,7-bis(dimethylamino)phenothiazin-5-ium Chemical compound C1=CC(N(C)C)=CC2=[S+]C3=CC(N(C)C)=CC=C3N=C21 RBTBFTRPCNLSDE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000010146 3D printing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 101150104118 ANS1 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101100510736 Actinidia chinensis var. chinensis LDOX gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102100030988 Angiotensin-converting enzyme Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 208000035143 Bacterial infection Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 102100029649 Beta-arrestin-1 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 208000004434 Calcinosis Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 229910052688 Gadolinium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 101000728629 Homo sapiens Beta-arrestin-1 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102100024383 Integrator complex subunit 10 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 101710149805 Integrator complex subunit 10 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102100024370 Integrator complex subunit 11 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 101710149806 Integrator complex subunit 11 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- HBBGRARXTFLTSG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Lithium ion Chemical compound [Li+] HBBGRARXTFLTSG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 241000699670 Mus sp. Species 0.000 description 1
- 206010028980 Neoplasm Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 108010008294 Panalog Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108090000882 Peptidyl-Dipeptidase A Proteins 0.000 description 1
- XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silicon Chemical compound [Si] XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FAPWRFPIFSIZLT-UHFFFAOYSA-M Sodium chloride Chemical compound [Na+].[Cl-] FAPWRFPIFSIZLT-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- ATJFFYVFTNAWJD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Tin Chemical compound [Sn] ATJFFYVFTNAWJD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052770 Uranium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 230000004308 accommodation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000000654 additive Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000000996 additive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 208000022362 bacterial infectious disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 229910052788 barium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- DSAJWYNOEDNPEQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N barium atom Chemical compound [Ba] DSAJWYNOEDNPEQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- -1 barium sulfate) Chemical compound 0.000 description 1
- 230000002457 bidirectional effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000009534 blood test Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000004556 brain Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 210000000481 breast Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 201000011510 cancer Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 229910052799 carbon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910002091 carbon monoxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 230000000747 cardiac effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000010267 cellular communication Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000036755 cellular response Effects 0.000 description 1
- AIXMJTYHQHQJLU-UHFFFAOYSA-N chembl210858 Chemical compound O1C(CC(=O)OC)CC(C=2C=CC(O)=CC=2)=N1 AIXMJTYHQHQJLU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052804 chromium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000004040 coloring Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000013170 computed tomography imaging Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000012141 concentrate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 208000030381 cutaneous melanoma Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 238000013523 data management Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000003066 decision tree Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000004053 dental implant Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000009795 derivation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000002405 diagnostic procedure Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000004069 differentiation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000008451 emotion Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000001839 endoscopy Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000011156 evaluation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000000605 extraction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000005187 foaming Methods 0.000 description 1
- UIWYJDYFSGRHKR-UHFFFAOYSA-N gadolinium atom Chemical compound [Gd] UIWYJDYFSGRHKR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000007274 generation of a signal involved in cell-cell signaling Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000011521 glass Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000021384 green leafy vegetables Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000007943 implant Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000006872 improvement Effects 0.000 description 1
- MOFVSTNWEDAEEK-UHFFFAOYSA-M indocyanine green Chemical compound [Na+].[O-]S(=O)(=O)CCCCN1C2=CC=C3C=CC=CC3=C2C(C)(C)C1=CC=CC=CC=CC1=[N+](CCCCS([O-])(=O)=O)C2=CC=C(C=CC=C3)C3=C2C1(C)C MOFVSTNWEDAEEK-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 229960004657 indocyanine green Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000004968 inflammatory condition Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000011835 investigation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910052740 iodine Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- PNDPGZBMCMUPRI-UHFFFAOYSA-N iodine Chemical compound II PNDPGZBMCMUPRI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000002357 laparoscopic surgery Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000012417 linear regression Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000002632 lipids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229910001416 lithium ion Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000007477 logistic regression Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000004072 lung Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 239000003550 marker Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229960000907 methylthioninium chloride Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000000386 microscopy Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000002156 mixing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000010295 mobile communication Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000012544 monitoring process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000006855 networking Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000000056 organ Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 238000006213 oxygenation reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000004806 packaging method and process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000010422 painting Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000002600 positron emission tomography Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001902 propagating effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000011002 quantification Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000005855 radiation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002285 radioactive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000007637 random forest analysis Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000002310 reflectometry Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002787 reinforcement Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005316 response function Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000717 retained effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000003583 retinal pigment epithelium Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 238000013341 scale-up Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000011218 segmentation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012163 sequencing technique Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910052710 silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000010703 silicon Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000004088 simulation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000002356 single layer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000011780 sodium chloride Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000006641 stabilisation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000011105 stabilization Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000001356 surgical procedure Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000012549 training Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001131 transforming effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000002834 transmittance Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000007723 transport mechanism Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000009966 trimming Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000001392 ultraviolet--visible--near infrared spectroscopy Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910052724 xenon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- FHNFHKCVQCLJFQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N xenon atom Chemical compound [Xe] FHNFHKCVQCLJFQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G3/00—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
- G09G3/20—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
- G09G3/2003—Display of colours
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B27/00—Optical systems or apparatus not provided for by any of the groups G02B1/00 - G02B26/00, G02B30/00
- G02B27/01—Head-up displays
- G02B27/017—Head mounted
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B5/00—Optical elements other than lenses
- G02B5/20—Filters
- G02B5/201—Filters in the form of arrays
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G2320/00—Control of display operating conditions
- G09G2320/02—Improving the quality of display appearance
- G09G2320/0242—Compensation of deficiencies in the appearance of colours
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G2320/00—Control of display operating conditions
- G09G2320/06—Adjustment of display parameters
- G09G2320/0666—Adjustment of display parameters for control of colour parameters, e.g. colour temperature
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G2340/00—Aspects of display data processing
- G09G2340/06—Colour space transformation
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G2380/00—Specific applications
- G09G2380/08—Biomedical applications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G5/00—Control arrangements or circuits for visual indicators common to cathode-ray tube indicators and other visual indicators
- G09G5/02—Control arrangements or circuits for visual indicators common to cathode-ray tube indicators and other visual indicators characterised by the way in which colour is displayed
Definitions
- the present invention relates to color systems, and more specifically to a wide gamut color system with an increased number of primary colors.
- U.S. Patent No. 10,2.2.2,2.63 for RGB value calculation device by inventor Yasuyuki Shigezane, filed February 6, 2017 and issued March 5, 2019, is directed to a microcomputer that equally divides the circumference of an RGB circle into 6xn (n is an integer of 1 or more) parts, and calculates an RGB value of each divided color. (2.55, 0, 0) is stored as a reference RGB value of a reference color in a ROM in the microcomputer.
- the microcomputer converts the reference RGB value depending on an angular difference of the RGB circle between a designated color whose RGB value is to be found and the reference color, and assumes the converted RGB value as an RGB value of the designated color.
- U.S. Patent No. 9,373,305 for Semiconductor device, image processing system and program by inventor Hiorfumi Kawaguchi, filed May 29, 2015 and issued June 21, 2016, is directed to an image process device including a display panel operable to provide an input interface for receiving an input of an adjustmen t value of at least a part of color attribu tes of each vertex of n axes (n is an integer equal to or greater than 3) serving as adjustment axes in an RGB color space, and an adjustment data generation unit operable to calculate the degree of influence indicative of a following index of each of the n-axis vertices, for each of the n axes, on a basis of distance between each of the n-axis vertices and a target point which is an arbitrary lattice point in the RGB color space, and operable to calculate adj usted coordinates of the target point in the RGB color space.
- U.S. Publication No. 20130278993 for Color-mixing bi-primary color systems for displays by inventors Heikenfeld, et al., filed September 1, 2011 and published October 24, 2013, is directed to a display pixel.
- the pixel includes first and second substrates arranged to define a channel.
- a fluid is located within the channel and includes a first colorant and a second colorant.
- the first colorant has a first charge and a color.
- the second colorant has a second charge that is opposite in polarity to the first charge and a color that is complimentary to the color of the first colorant.
- a first electrode, with a voltage source is operably coupled to the fluid and configured to moving one or both of the first and second colorants within the fluid and alter at least one spectral property of the pixel.
- U.S. Patent No. 8,599,226 for Device and method of data conversion for wide gamut displays by inventors Ben-Chorin, et al., filed February 13, 2012 and issued December 3, 2013, is directed to a method and system for converting color image data from a, for example, three-dimensional color space format to a format usable by an n-primary display, wherein n is greater than or equal to 3.
- the system may define a two-dimensional sub-space having a plurality of two-dimensional positions, each position representing a set of n primary color values and a third, scaleable coordinate value for generating an n-primary display input signal.
- the system may- receive a three-dimensional color space input signal including out-of range pixel data not reproducible by a three-primary additive display, and may convert the data to side gamut color image pixel data suitable for driving the wide gamut color display.
- U.S. Patent No. 8,081,835 for Multiprimary color sub-pixel rendering with metameric filtering by inventors Elliott, et al., filed July 13, 2010 and issued December 20, 2011, is directed to systems and methods of rendering image data to multiprimary displays that adjusts image data across metamers as herein disclosed.
- the metamer filtering may be based upon input image content and may optimize sub-pixel values to improve image rendering accuracy or perception. The optimizations may be made according to many possible desired effects.
- One embodiment comprises a display system comprising: a display, said display capable of selecting from a set of image data values, said set comprising at least one metamer; an input image data unit; a spatial frequency detection unit, said spatial frequency detection unit extracting a spatial frequency characteristic from said input image data; and a selection unit, said unit selecting image data from said metamer according to said spatial frequency characteristic.
- U.S. Patent No. 7,916,939 for High brightness wide gamut display by inventors Roth, et al., filed November 30, 2009 and issued March 29, 2011, is directed to a device to produce a color image, the device including a color filtering arrangement to produce at least four colors, each color produced by a filter on a color filtering mechanism having a relative segment size, wherein the relative segment sizes of at least two of the primary colors differ.
- U.S. Patent No. 7,916,939 for High brightness wide gamut display by inventors Roth, et al. filed November 30, 2009 and issued March 29, 2011, is directed to a device to produce a color image, the device including a color filtering arrangement to produce at least four colors, each color produced by a filter on a color filtering mechanism having a relative segment size, wherein the relative segment sizes of at least two of the primary colors differ.
- 6,769,772 for Six color display apparatus having increased color gamut by inventors Roddy, et al., filed October 11, 2002 and issued August 3, 2004, is directed to a display system for digital color images using six color light sources or two or more multicolor LED arrays or OLEDs to provide an expanded color gamut.
- Apparatus uses two or more spatial light modulators, which may be cycled between two or more color light sources or LED arrays to provide a six-color display output. Pairing of modulated colors using relative luminance helps to minimize flicker effects.
- the present invention provides a system for displaying a primary color system, including a set of image data including a set of primary color signals, wherein the set of primmy color signals corresponds to a set of values in an International Commission on Illumination (CIE) Yxy color space, wherein the set of values in the CIE Yxy color space includes a luminance (Y) and two colorimetric coordinates (x,y), wherein the set of image data includes medical image data, and an image data converter, wherein the image data converter includes a digital interface, and wherein the digital interface is operable to encode and decode the set of values in the CIE Yxy color space, wherein the encode and the decode includes transportation of processed data, wherein the processed data includes a first channel related to the luminance (Y >.
- CIE International Commission on Illumination
- the image data converter is operable to convert the set of image data for display on at least one viewing device.
- the present invention provides a system for displaying a primary color system, including a set of image data including a set of primary color signals, wherein the set of primary color signals corresponds to a set of values in an International Commission on Illumination (CIE) Yxy color space, wherein the set of values in the CIE Yxy color space includes a luminance (Y) and two colorimetric coordinates (x,y), wherein the set of image data includes medical image data, at least one imager, wherein one or more of the at least one imager is operable to provide the medical image data, and an image data converter, wherein the image data converter includes a digital interface, and wherein the digital interface is operable to encode and decode the set of values in the CIE ⁇ xy color space, wherein the encode and the decode includes transportation of processed data, wherein the processed data includes a first channel related to the luminance (Y), a second channel related to a first colorimetric coordinate (x) of the two colorimetric coordinates (CIE) Yxy
- the present invention provides a system for displaying a primary color system including a set of image data including a set of primary color signals, wherein the set of primary color signals corresponds to a set of values in an International Commission on Illumination (CIE) Yxy color space, wherein the set of values in the CIE Yxy color space includes a luminance (Y) and two colorimetric coordinates (x,y), wherein the set of image data includes medical image data, at least one imager, wherein one or more of the at least one imager is operable to provide the medical image data, an image data converter, wherein the image data converter includes a digital interface, and wherein the digital interface is operable to encode and decode the set of values in the CIE Yxy color space, and at least one viewing device, wherein the image data converter and the at least one viewing device are in communication, wherein the encode and the decode includes transportation of processed data, wherein the processed data includes a first channel related to the luminance (Y), a
- CIE International Commission on Il
- FIG, 1 illustrates one embodiment of a six primary system including a red primary-, a green primary-, a blue primary, a cyan primary, a magenta primary-, and a yellow primary (“6P-B”) compared to ITU-R BT.709-6.
- FIG. 2 illustrates another embodiment of a six primary system including a red primary, a green primary, a blue primary, a cyan primary, a magenta primary, and a yellow primary (“6P-C”) compared to Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (SMPTE) RP431-2 for a D60 white point,
- SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers
- FIG, 3 illustrates yet another embodiment of a six primary system including a red primary, a green primary, a blue primary, a cyan primary, a magenta primary, and a yellow primary (“6P-C”) compared to SMPTE RP431-2 for a D65 white point.
- FIG. 4 illustrates Super 6Pa compared to 6P-C.
- FIG. 5 illustrates Super 6Pb compared to Super 6Pa and 6P-C.
- FIG. 6 illustrates an embodiment of an encode and decode system for a multi- primary color system.
- FIG . 7 illustrates a sequential method where three color primaries are passed to the transport format as full bit level image data and inserted as normal (“System 2”).
- FIG. 8 illustrates one embodiment of a system encode and decode process using a dual link method (“System 3”).
- FIG. 9 illustrates one embodiment of an encoding process using a dual link method.
- FIG, 10 illustrates one embodiment of a decoding process using a dual link method.
- FIG. 11 illustrates one embodiment of a Yxy or Yu'v' encode with a non-linear transfer function (NLTF).
- NLTF non-linear transfer function
- FIG. 12 illustrates one embodimen t of a Yxy or Yu'v' encode without an NLTF.
- FIG. 13 illustrates one embodimen t of a Yxy or Yu'v' decode with an inverse non- linear transfer function (NLTF -1 ).
- FIG, 14 illustrates one embodiment of a Yxy or Yu'v" decode without an NLTF -1 .
- FIG, 15A illustrates one embodiment of a 4:2:2 Yxy encode with an NLTF.
- FIG. 15B illustrates one embodiment of a 4:2:2 Yxy encode without an NLTF.
- FIG. 16A illustrates one embodiment of a 4:2:2 Yxy encode with an NLTF applied to all three channels and linear scaling of x and y.
- FIG. 16B illustrates one embodiment of a 4:2:2 Yxy encode without an NLTF and with linear scaling of x and y.
- FIG, 17A illustrates one embodiment of a 4:4:4 Yxy encode with an NLTF.
- FIG. 17B illustrates one embodiment of a 4:4:4 Yxy encode without an NLTF.
- FIG. ISA illustrates one embodiment of a 4:4:4 Yxy encode with an NLTF applied to all three channels and linear scaling of x and y.
- FIG. 18B illustrates one embodiment of a 4:4:4 Yxy encode without an NLTF and with linear scaling of x and y.
- FIG, 19 illustrates sample placements of Yxy system components for a 4:2:2 pixel mapping.
- FIG. 20 illustrates sample placements of Yxy system components for a 4:2:0 pixel mapping.
- FIG. 21 illustrates one embodiment of a SMPTE ST292 Yxy system mapping.
- FIG. 22 illustrates one embodiment of a SMPTE ST2082 Yxy system mapping.
- FIG. 23 illustrates one embodiment of Yxy inserted into a CTA 861 stream.
- FIG . 24A illustrates one embodiment of a Yxy decode with an inverse non-linear transfer function (NLTF -1 ) applied only to the Y channel.
- NLTF -1 inverse non-linear transfer function
- FIG. 24B illustrates one embodiment of a Yxy decode without an NLTF 1 applied to any of the channels.
- FIG. 25 A illustrates one embodiment of a Y xy decode with an NLTF -1 applied to all three channels and rescaling of x and y.
- FIG, 25B illustrates one embodiment of a Yxy decode without an NLTF* applied to any of the channels and with rescaling applied to the x and y channels.
- FIG. 26A illustrates one embodiment of an IPT 4:4:4 encode.
- FIG. 26B illustrates one embodiment of an IPT 4:4:4 decode.
- FIG. 27A illustrates one embodiment of an ICTCP 4:2:2 encode.
- FIG. 27B illustrates one embodiment of an ICTCP 4:2:2 decode.
- FIG. 28 illustrates one embodiment of a A gamma function.
- FIG, 29 illustrates a graph of maximum quantizing error using the ‘A gamma function.
- FIG. 30 illustrates one embodiment of a 1/3 gamma function.
- FIG. 31 illustrates one embodiment of an encoder.
- FIG. 32 illustrates one embodimen t of a decoder.
- FIG. 33 illustrates one embodiment of a display engine operable to interact with a graphics processing unit (GPL ! ) according to the present invention.
- GPL ! graphics processing unit
- FIG, 34 illustrates one embodiment of a process flow diagram to convert an image for display.
- FIG. 35 illustrates one embodiment of a camera process flow.
- FIG. 36 illustrates one embodiment of a display process flow.
- FIG. 37 illustrates one embodiment of modifications to payload ID metadata as applied to SMPTE ST352.
- FIG, 38A illustrates one embodiment of modifications to payload ID as applied to SMPTE ST352 and ST292.
- FIG. 38B illustrates one embodiment of payload ID as applied to SMPTE ST352 and ST372.
- FIG. 38C illustrates one embodiment of payload ID as applied to SMPTE ST352 and ST425.
- FIG. 39 illustrates one embodiment of a System 4 Yxy 10-bit 4:2:2 encode as applied to SMPTE ST292.
- FIG . 40A illustrates one embodiment of a first link for a System 4 Yxy 10-bit 4:4:4 YC B C R encode as applied to SMPTE ST372.
- FIG. 40B illustrates one embodiment of a second link for a System 4 Yxy 10-bit 4:4:4 YC B C R encode as applied to SMPTE ST372.
- FIG. 41A illustrates one embodiment of a first link for a System 4 Yxy 10-bit 4:4:4 RGB encode as applied to SMPTE ST372.
- FIG, 41B illustrates one embodiment of a second link for a System 4 Yxy 1 O-bit 4:4:4 RGB encode as applied to SMPTE ST372.
- FIG. 42A illustrates one embodiment of a first link for a System 4 Y xy 12-bit 4:4:4 YC B C R encode as applied to SMPTE ST372.
- FIG. 42B illustrates one embodiment of a second link for a System 4 Yxy 12-bit 4:4:4 YC B C R encode as applied to SMPTE ST372.
- FIG. 43A illustrates one embodiment of a first link for a System 4 12-bit Yxy 4:4:4 RGB encode as applied to SMPTE ST372.
- FIG. 43B illustrates one embodiment of a second link for a System 4 Yxy 12-bit 4:4:4 RGB encode as applied to SMPTE ST372.
- FIG. 44A illustrates one embodiment of a first data stream for a System 4 Yxy 10- bit 4:2:2 Level A encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
- FIG. 44B illustrates one embodiment of a second data stream for a System 4 Yxy 10-bit 4:2:2 Level A encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
- FIG, 45 A illustrates one embodiment of a first data stream for a Yxy System 4 10- bit 4:4:4 Level A encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
- FIG. 45B illustrates one embodiment of a second data stream for a Yxy System 4 10-bit 4:4:4 Level A encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
- FIG. 46A illustrates one embodiment of a first data stream for a Yxy System 4 12- bit 4:4:4 Level A encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
- FIG, 46B illustrates one embodiment of a second data stream for a Yxy System 4 12-bit 4:4:4 Level A encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
- FIG. 47A illustrates one embodiment of a first data stream for a System 4 Yxy 12- bit 4:2:2 Level A encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
- FIG. 47B illustrates one embodiment of a second data stream for a System 4 Yxy 12-bit 4:2:2 Level A encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
- FIG. 48A illustrates one embodiment of a first data stream for a System 4 Yxy Level B Multiplex Dual Stream (DS) encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
- DS System 4 Yxy Level B Multiplex Dual Stream
- FIG. 48B illustrates one embodiment of a second data stream for a System 4 Yxy Level B Multiplex Dual Stream (DS) encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
- DS System 4 Yxy Level B Multiplex Dual Stream
- FIG. 49A illustrates one embodiment of a first data link for a System 4 Yxy 10-bit Level B Multiplex Dual Link (DL) encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
- DL Level B Multiplex Dual Link
- FIG. 49B illustrates one embodiment of a second data link for a System 4 Yxy 10- bit Level B Multiplex Dual Link (DL) encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
- DL Level B Multiplex Dual Link
- FIG . 50A illustrates one embodiment of a first data link for a System 4 Yxy 12-bit Level B Multiplex Dual Link (DL) encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
- DL Level B Multiplex Dual Link
- FIG. 50B illustrates one embodiment of a second data link for a System 4 Yxy 12- bit Level B Multiplex Dual Link (DL) encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
- DL Level B Multiplex Dual Link
- FIG. 51 is a table illustrating modification of SMPTE ST2036-1 (2014) parameters to include System 4 (e.g., Yxy, Yu'v’).
- FIG, 52. is a table illustrating modification of CTA 861 Table 6 - Colorimetry Transfer Characteristics to include System 4 (e.g., Yxy, Yu'v').
- FIG. 53A is a table for Yxy 8-bit 4:2:2 encoding with 4 lanes.
- FIG. 53B is a table for Yxy 8-bit 4:2:2. encoding with 2 lanes.
- FIG. 53C is a table tor Yxy 8-bit 4:2:2 encoding with 1 lane.
- FIG. 54A is a table for Yxy 10-bit 4:2:2 encoding with 4 lanes.
- FIG. 54B is a table for Yxy 10-bit 4:2:2 encoding with 2 lanes.
- FIG, 54C is a table for Yxy 10-bit 4:2:2 encoding with 1 lane.
- FIG. 55A is a table for Yxy 12-bit 4:2:2 encoding with 4 lanes.
- FIG. 55B is a table for Yxy 12-bit 4:2:2. encoding with 2 lanes.
- FIG. 55C is a table for Yxy 12-bit 4:2:2. encoding with 1 lane.
- FIG. 56A is a table for Yxy 16-brt 4:2:2 encoding with 4 lanes.
- FIG. 56B is a table for Y xy 16-bit 4:2:2 encoding with 2 lanes.
- FIG, 56C is a table for Yxy 16-bit 4:2:2 encoding with 1 lane.
- FIG, 57A is a table for Yxy 10-bit 4:4:4 encoding with 4 lanes.
- FIG. 57B is a table for Yxy 10-bit 4:4:4 encoding with 2 lanes.
- FIG. 57C is a table for Yxy 10-bit 4:4:4 encoding with 1 lane.
- FIG. 58A is atable for Yxy 12-bit 4:4:4 encoding with 4 lanes
- FIG. 58B is a table for Yxy 12-bit 4:4:4 encoding with 2 lanes.
- FIG. 58C is a table for Yxy 12-bit 4:4:4 encoding with 1 lane.
- FIG. 59A is atable for Yxy 16-bit 4:4:4 encoding with 4 lanes.
- FIG, 59B is a table for Yxy 16-bit 4:4:4 encoding with 2 lanes.
- FIG. 59C is a table for Yxy 16-bit 4:4:4 encoding with 1 lane.
- FIG. 60 is table with auxiliary video information (AVI) for InfoFrame version 4.
- FIG. 61 illustrates an RGB sampling transmission for a 4:4:4 sampling system.
- FIG. 62 illustrates a RGBCYM sampling transmission for a 4:4:4 sampling system.
- FIG, 63 illustrates an example of System 2 to RGBCYM 4:4:4 transmission .
- FIG, 64 illustrates a Y Cb Cr sampling transmission using a 4:2:2 sampling system.
- FIG. 65 illustrates a Y Cr Cb Cc Cy sampling transmission using a 4:2:2 sampling system.
- FIG. 66 illustrates an example of a System 2 to Y Cr Cb Cc Cy 4:2:2 Transmission as non-constant luminance.
- FIG, 67 illustrates a Y Cb Cr sampling transmission using a 4:2:0 sampling system
- FIG. 68 illustrates a Y Cr Cb Cc Cy sampling transmission using a 4:2:0 sampling system.
- FIG. 69 illustrates a dual stack LCD projection system for a, six-primary color system.
- FIG. 70 illustrates one embodiment of a single projector.
- FIG. 71 illustrates a six-primary color system using a single projector and reciprocal mirrors.
- FIG. 72 illustrates a dual stack DMD projection system for a six-primary color system.
- FIG. 73 illustrates one embodiment of a single DMD projector solution.
- FIG, 74 illustrates one embodiment of a color filter array for a six-primary color system with a white OLED monitor.
- FIG. 75 illustrates one embodiment of an optical filter array for a six-primary color system with a white OLED monitor.
- FIG. 76 illustrates one embodiment of a matrix of an LCD drive for a six-primary color system with a backlight illuminated LCD monitor.
- FIG. 77 illustrates one embodiment of an optical filter array for a six-primary color system with a backlight illuminated LCD monitor.
- FIG. 78 illustrates an array for a Quantum Dot (QD) display device.
- FIG. 79 illustrates one embodiment of an array for a six-primary color system for use with a direct emissive assembled display.
- FIG. 80 illustrates one embodiment of a six-primary color system in an emissive display that does not incorporate color filtered subpixels.
- FIG. 81 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of the invention illustrating a computer system
- the present invention is generally directed to a multi-primary color system.
- the present invention provides a system for displaying a primary color system, including a set of image data including a set of primary color signals, wherein the set of primary color signals corresponds to a set of values in an International Commission on Illumination (CIE) Yxy color space, wherein the set of values in the CIE Yxy color space includes a luminance (Y) and two colorimetric coordinates (x,y), wherein the set of image data includes medical image data, and an image data converter, wherein the image data converter includes a digital interface, and wherein the digital interface is operable to encode and decode the set of values in the CIE Yxy color space, wherein the encode and the decode includes transportation of processed data, wherein the processed data includes a first channel related to the luminance (Y), a second channel related to a first colorimetric coordinate (x) of the two colorimetric coordinates (x,y), and a third
- CIE International Commission on Illumina
- the image data converter is operable to convert the set of values in the CIE Yxy color space to a plurality of color gamuts.
- the image data converter includes a look-up table.
- the set of image data includes colors outside of an International Telecommunication Union Recommendation (ITU-R) BT.2020 color gamut.
- the image data converter is operable to fully sample the processed data on the first channel and subsample the processed data on the second channel and the third channel. In one embodiment, the processed data on the first channel, the second channel, and the third channel are fully sampled.
- the encode includes scaling of the two colorimetric coordinates (x,y), thereby creating a first scaled colorimetric coordinate and a second scaled colorimetric coordinate and/or the decode includes rescaling of data related to the first scaled colorimetric coordinate and data related to the second scaled colorimetric coordinate.
- the encode includes converting the set of primary color signals to XYZ data and then converting the XYZ data to create the set of values in the CIE Yxy color space and/or the decode includes converting the processed data to XYZ data and then converting the XYZ data to a format operable to display on the at least one viewing device.
- the system further includes at least one non-linear function, wherein the at least one non-linear function includes a data range reduction function with a value between about 0.25 and about 0.9 and/or an inverse data range reduction function with a value between about 1 .1 and about 4.
- the system further includes at least one imager, wherein one or more of the at least one imager is operable to provide the medical image data.
- the system is compatible with Digital Imaging Communication in Medicine standards for metadata.
- the system further includes at least one processor coupled to at least one memory and at least one learning algorithm for image processing and comparison.
- the set of image data further includes hyperspectral data, ultraviolet (UV) data, and/or infrared (I R ) data.
- the image data converter is operable to create two different three-coordinate format elements, wherein the first three-coordinate format element is Y xy and the second three-coordinate format element includes a first coordinate related to the UV data, a second coordinate related to the IR data, and a third coordinate proportional to an intensity of the UV data and the IR data.
- the system further includes at least one chip chart or at least one tele-med-chart with a plurality of colors and/or at least one reference to calibrate the system.
- the present invention provides a system for displaying a primary color system, including a set of image data including a set of primary color signals, wherein the set of primary color signals corresponds to a set of values in an International Commission on Illumination (CIE) Yxy color space, wherein the set of values in the CIE Yxy color space includes a luminance (Y) and two colorimetric coordinates (x,y), wherein the set of image data includes medical image data, at least one imager, wherein one or more of the at least one imager is operable to provide the medical image data, and an image data converter, wherein the image data converter includes a digital interface, and wherein the digital interface is operable to encode and decode the set of values in the CIE Yxy color space, wherein the encode and the decode includes transportation of processed data, wherein the processed data includes a first channel related to the luminance O'), a second channel related to a first colorimetric coordinate (x) of the two colorimetric coordinates (CIE) Yxy
- tire present invention provides a system for displaying a primary color system including a set of image data including a set of primary color signals, wherein the set of primary color signals corresponds to a set of values in an International Commission on Illumination (CIE) Yxy color space, wherein the set of values in the CIE Yxy color space includes a luminance (Y) and two colorimetric coordinates (x,y), wherein the set of image data includes medical image data, at least one imager, wherein one or more of the at least one imager is operable to provide the medical image data, an image data converter, wherein the image data converter includes a digital interface, and wherein the digital interface is operable to encode and decode the set of values in the CIE Yxy color space, and at least one viewing device, wherein the image data converter and the at least one viewing device are in communication, wherein the encode and the decode includes transportation of processed data, wherein the processed data includes a first channel related to the luminance (Y), a
- CIE International Commission on Il
- the at least one viewing device includes at least four primaries. In one embodiment, the at least one viewing device is operable to display colors outside of an International Telecommunication Union Recommendation (ITU-R) BT.2020 color gamut. In one embodiment, the at least one viewing device includes a headset configured for virtual reality, augmented reality, and/or mixed reality environments.
- ITU-R International Telecommunication Union Recommendation
- the at least one viewing device includes a headset configured for virtual reality, augmented reality, and/or mixed reality environments.
- Enhancements to the television system have expanded from the early CCIR 601 standard to ITU-R BT.709-6, to Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (SMPTE) RP431-2, and ITU-R BT.2020.
- SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers
- ITU-R BT.2020 ITU-R BT.2020.
- Each one has increased the gamut of visible colors by expanding the distance from the reference white point to the position of the Red (R), Green (G), and Blue (B) color primaries (collectively known as “RGB”) in chromaticity space. While this approach works, it has several disadvantages.
- issues arise due to the technical methods used to expand the gamut of colors seen (typically using a more-narrow emissive spectrum) can result in increased viewer metameric errors and require increased power due to lower illumination source. These issues increase both capital and operational costs.
- Narrower bandwadth emitters result in the viewer experiencing higher color saturation. But there can be a disconnect between how saturation is produced and how it is controlled. What is believed to occur when changing saturation is that increasing color values of a color primary represents an increase to saturation. This is not true, as changing saturation requires the variance of a color primary spectral output as parametric. There are no variable spectrum displays available to date as the technology to do so has not been commercially developed, nor has the new infrastructure required to support this been discussed.
- the method that a display changes for viewer color sensation is by changing color luminance. As data values increase, the color primary gets brighter. Changes to color saturation are accomplished by varying the brightness of all three primaries and taking advantage of the dominant color theory-.
- VASARI Visual Arts System for Archiving and Retrieval of Images
- the multi- primary- systems of the present invention include at least four primaries.
- the at least four primaries preferably include at least one red primary, at least one green primary, and/or at least one blue primary.
- the at least four primaries include a cyan primary-, a magenta, primary-, and/or a. yellow- primary.
- the at least four primaries include at least one white primary.
- the multi-primary system includes six primaries.
- the six primaries include a red (R) primary-, a green (G) primary-, a blue (B) primary-, a cyan (C) primary-, a magenta (M) primary-, and a yellow- (Y) primary-, often referred to as “RGBCMY”.
- R red
- G green
- B blue
- C cyan
- M magenta
- Y yellow- (Y) primary-, often referred to as “RGBCMY”.
- 6P-B is a color set that uses the same RGB values that are defined in the ITU-R
- BT.709-6 television standard The gamut includes these RGB primary colors and then adds three more color primaries orthogonal to these based on the white point.
- the white point used in 6P-B is D65 (ISO 11664-2).
- the red primary has a dominant wavelength of 609nm
- the yellow primary has a dominant wavelength of 571nm
- the green primary has a dominant wavelength of 552nm
- the cyan primary has a dominant wavelength of 491nm
- the blue primary has a dominant wavelength of 465nm as shown in Table 1.
- the dominant wavelength is approximately (e.g., within ⁇ 10%) the value listed in the table below.
- the dominant wavelength is within ⁇ 5% of the value listed in the table below.
- the dominant w avelength is w ithin ⁇ 2% of the value listed in the table below.
- FIG . 1 illustrates 6P-B compared to ITU-RBT.709-6.
- 6P-C is based on the same RGB primaries defined in SMPTE RP431-2 projection recommendation. Each gamut includes these RGB primary colors and then adds three more color primaries orthogonal to these based on the white point.
- the white point used in 6P-B is D65 (ISO 11664-2).
- Two versions of 6P-C are used. One is optimized for a D60 white point (SMPTE ST2065-1), and the other is optimized for a D65 white point.
- the red primary has a dominant wavelength of 615nm
- the yellow' primary has a dominant wavelength of 570nm
- the green primary has a dominant wavelength of 545nm
- the cyan primary has a dominant wavelength of 493nm
- the blue primary has a dominant wavelength of 465nm as showm in Table 2.
- the dominant wavelength is approximately (e.g., within ⁇ 10%) the value listed in the table below'.
- the dominant wavelength is within ⁇ 5% of the value listed in the table below.
- the dominant wavelength is within ⁇ 2% of the value listed in the table below'.
- FIG. 2 illustrates 6P-C compared to SMPTE RP431-2 for a D60 white point.
- the red primary has a dominant wavelength of 615mn
- the yellow primary- has a dominant wavelength of 570nm
- the green primary has a dominant wavelength of 545nm
- the cyan primary has a dominant wavelength of 423nm
- the blue primary has a dominant wavelength of 465nm as shown in Table 3.
- the dominant wavelength is approximately (e.g., within ⁇ 10%) the value listed in the table below.
- the dominant wavelength is within ⁇ 5% of the value listed in the table below.
- the dominant wavelength is within ⁇ 2% of the value listed in the table below.
- FIG. 3 illustrates 6P-C compared to SMPTE RP431 -2 for a. D65 white point.
- ITU-R BT.2020 One of the advantages of ITU-R BT.2020 is that it is operable to include all of the Pointer colors and. that increasing primary saturation in a six-color primary' design is also operable to do this.
- Pointer is described in ‘"The Gamut of Real Surface Colors”, M.R. Pointer, Published in Colour Research and Application Volume #5, Issue #3 (1980), which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
- 6P-C adds two problems. The first problem is the requirement to narrow the spectrum of the extended primaries. The second problem is the complexity of designing a. backwards compatible system using color primaries that are not related to current standards.
- the cyan color primary position is located so that the gamut edge encompasses all of Pointer’s data set. In another embodiment, the cyan color primary position is a location that limits maximum saturation.
- S6Pa Super 6Pa
- Table 4 is a table of values for Super 6Pa.
- the definition of x,y are described in ISO 11664 -3:2012/CIE S 014 Part 3, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety'.
- the definition of u',v' are described in ISO 11664-5: 2016/CIE S 014 Part 5, which is incorporated herein by reference m its entirety.
- ⁇ ' defines each color primary as dominant color wavelength for RGB and. complementary wavelengths CMY.
- the saturation is expanded on the same hue angle as 6P-C as shown in FIG. 5.
- this makes backward compatibility less complicated. However, this requires much more saturation (i.e., narrower spectra).
- FIG. 5 illustrates Super 6Pb compared to Super 6Pa and 6P-C.
- Table 5 is a table of values for Super 6Pb. The definition of x,y are described in
- a matrix is created from XYZ values of each of the primaries. As the XYZ values of the primaries change, the matrix changes. Additional details about the matrix are described below.
- the present invention includes three different methods to format video for transport: System I, System 2, and System 3.
- System 1 is comprised of an encode and decode system, which is operable to be divided into base encoder and digitation, image data stacking, mapping into the standard data transport, readout, unstack, and finally image decoding.
- the basic method of this system is to combine opposing color primaries within the three standard transport channels and identify them by their code value.
- System 2 uses a sequential method where three color primaries are passed to the transport format as full bit level image data and inserted as normal. Tire three additional channels are delayed by one pixel and then placed into the transport instead of the first colors.
- this system is comprised of the six primaries (e.g., RGB plus a method to delay the CMY colors for injection), image resolution identification to allow for pixel count synchronization, start of video identification, and RGB Delay.
- System 3 utili zes a dual link method where two wires are used.
- a first set of three channels e.g., RGB
- a second set of three channels e.g., CMY
- System 3 is operable to be used as described. If four color components are used, two of the channels are set to 0. If five color components are used, one of the channels is set to 0.
- this transportation method works for all primary systems described herein that include up to six color components.
- System 1 fits within legacy SDI, CTA, and Ethernet transports. Additionally, System 1 has zero latency processing for conversion to an RGB display. However, System 1 is limited to 11-bit words.
- System 2 is advantageously operable to transport 6 channels using 16-bit words with no compression. Additionally, System 2 fits within newer SDI, CTA, and Ethernet transport formats. However, System 2 requires double bit rate speed. For example, a 4K image requires a data rate for an 8K RGB image.
- System 3 is operable to transport up to 6 channels using 16-bit words with compression and at the same data required for a specific resolution. For example, a data rate for an RGB image is the same as for a 6P image using System 3. However, System 3 requires a twin cable connection within the video system.
- a standard video nomenclature is used to better describe each system.
- R describes red data as linear light (e.g., without a non-linear function applied).
- G describes green data as linear light.
- B describes blue data as linear light.
- C describes cyan data as linear light.
- M describes magenta data as linear light.
- P and/or Y describe yellow data as linear light.
- R ⁇ describes red data as non-linear light (e.g., with a non-linear function applied).
- G' describes green data as non-linear light.
- B' describes blue data as non-linear light.
- C' describes cyan data as non-linear light.
- M* describes magenta data as non-linear light.
- Y c ' and/or Y' describe yellow data as non-linear light.
- Y 6 describes the luminance sum of RGBCMY data
- Y RGB describes a System 2 encode that is the linear luminance sum of the RGB data
- Y CMY describes a System 2 encode that is the linear luminance sum of the CMY data.
- C R describes the data value of red after subtracting linear image luminance.
- C B describes the data value of blue after subtracting linear image luminance.
- C c describes the data value of cyan after subtracting linear image luminance.
- Cy describes the data value of yellow after subtracting linear image luminance.
- RGB describes a System 2 encode that is the nonlinear luminance sum of the RGB data.
- CMY describes a System 2 encode that is the nonlinear luminance sum of the CMY data.
- -Y describes the sum of RGB data subtracted from Y 6 .
- C' R describes the data value of red after subtracting nonlinear image luminance.
- C' B describes the data value of blue after subtracting nonlinear image luminance.
- C'c describes the data value of cyan after subtracting nonlinear image luminance.
- C'y describes the data value of yellow after subtracting nonlinear image luminance.
- B+Y Y describes a System 1 encode that includes either blue or yellow data.
- G+M describes a System 1 encode that includes either green or magenta data.
- R+C describes a System 1 encode that includes either green or magenta data.
- C R +C C describes a System 1 encode that includes either color difference data.
- CB+CY describes a System 1 encode that includes either color difference data.
- 4:4:4 describes full bandwidth sampling of a color in an RGB system.
- 4:4:4:4:4 describes full sampling of a color in an RGBCMY system.
- 4:2:2 describes an encode where a full bandwidth luminance channel (7) is used to carry image detail and the remaining components are half sampled as a Cb Cr encode.
- 4:2:2:2:2 describes an encode where a full bandwidth luminance channel (7) is used to cany image detail and the remaining components are half sampled as a Cb Cr Cy Cc encode.
- 4:2:0 describes a component system similar to 4:2:2, but where Cr and Cb samples alternate per line.
- Constant luminance is the signal process where luminance (7) values are calculated in linear light.
- Non-constant luminance is the signal process where luminance (7) values are calculated in nonlinear light.
- Magenta is operable to be calculated as follows:
- the multi-primary color system is compatible with legacy systems.
- a backwards-compatible multi-primary color system is defined by a sampling method.
- the sampling method is 4:4:4.
- the sampling method is 4:2:2.
- the sampling method is 4:2:0.
- new encode and decode systems are divided into tire steps of performing base encoding and digitization, image data stacking, mapping into the standard data transport, readout, unstacking, and image decoding (“System 1"’).
- System 1 combines opposing color primaries within three standard transport channels and identifies them by their code value.
- the processes are analog processes.
- the processes are digital processes.
- the sampling method for a multi-primary color system is a 4:4:4 sampling method. Black and white bits are redefined. In one embodiment, putting black at midlevel within each data word allows the addition of CMY color data.
- FIG. 6 illustrates an embodiment of an encode and decode system for a multiprimary color system.
- the multi-primary color encode and decode system is divided into a base encoder and digitation, image data stacking, mapping into the standard data transport, readout, unstack, and finally image decoding (“System 1”).
- System 1 image decoding
- the method of this system combines opposing color primaries within the three standard transport channels and identifies them by their code value.
- the encode and decode for a multi-primary color system are analog-based. In another embodiment, the encode and decode for a multi-primary color system are digital-based.
- System 1 is designed to be compatible with lower bandwidth systems and allows a maximum of 11 bits per channel and is limited to sending only three channels of up to six primaries at a time. In one embodiment, it does this by using a stacking system where either the color channel or the complementary- channel is decoded depending on tire bit level of that one channel.
- FIG. 7 illustrates a sequential method where three color primaries are passed to the transport format as foil bit level image data and inserted as normal (“System 2”).
- System 2 The three additional channels are delayed by one pixel and then placed into the transport instead of the first colors.
- This method is useful in situations where quantizing artifacts is critical to image performance.
- this system is comprised of six primaries (RGBCMY), a method to delay the CMY colors for injection, image resolution identification to all for pixel count synchronization, start of video identification, RGB delay, and for YCCCCC systems, logic to select the dominant color primary.
- RGBCMY six primaries
- the advantage of System 2 is that foil bit level video is operable to be transported, but at double the normal data rate.
- System 2 sequences on a pixel-to-pixel basis.
- System 2 A a quadrature method is also possible (“System 2 A”) that is operable to transport six primaries in stereo or twelve primary image information.
- Each quadrant of the frame contains three color primary data sets. These are combined in the display.
- a first set of three primaries is displayed in the upper left quadrant
- a second set of three primaries is displayed in the upper right quadrant
- a third set of primaries is displayed in the lower left quadrant
- a fourth set of primaries is displayed in lower right quadrant.
- the first set of three primaries, the second set of three primaries, the third set of three primaries, and the fourth set of three primaries do not contain any overlapping primaries (i.e., twelve different primaries).
- the first set of three primaries, the second set of three primaries, the third set of three primaries, and the fourth set of three primaries contain overlapping primaries (i.e., at least one primary is contained in more than one set of three primaries).
- the first set of three primaries and the third set of three primaries contain the same primaries and the second set of three primaries and the fourth set of three primaries contain the same primaries.
- FIG. 8 illustrates one embodiment of a system encode and decode process using a dual link method (“System 3”).
- System 3 utilizes a dual link method where two wires are used.
- RGB is sent to link A and CMY is sent to link B. After arriving at the image destination, the two links are recombined.
- Alternative primaries are compatible with the present invention.
- System 3 is simpler and more straight forward than Systems 1 and 2.
- the advantage with this system is that adoption is simply to format non-RGB primaries (e.g., CMY) on a second link.
- RGB is sent on a standard SDI stream just as it is currently done.
- this link is operable to be sent to any RGB display requiring only the compensation for the luminance difference because the non-RGB (e.g., CMY) components are not included.
- Data for the nonRGB primaries e.g., CMY data
- RGB data for the nonRGB primaries e.g., CMY data
- This data is then combined in the display to make up a 6P image.
- the downside is that the system requires two wires to move one image.
- This system is operable to work with most any format including SMPTE ST292, 424, 2082, and 2110. It also is operable to work with dual High- Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI)/CTA connections.
- the system includes at least one transfer function (e.g., OETF, EOTF).
- FIG. 9 illustrates one embodiment of an encoding process using a dual link method. Alternative numbers of primaries and alternative primaries are compatible with the present invention.
- FIG. 10 illustrates one embodiment of a decoding process using a dual link method.
- Alternative numbers of primaries and alternative primaries are compatible with the present invention.
- Color is generally defined by three component data levels (e.g., RGB, YCbCr).
- a serial data stream must accommodate a word for each color contributor (e.g., R, G, B).
- Use of more than three primaries requires accommodations to fit this data based on an RGB concept. This is why System 1, System 2, and System 3 use stacking, sequencing, and/or dual links. Multiple words are required to define a single pixel, which is inefficient because not all values are needed.
- System 4 includes, but is not limited to, Yxy, L*a*b*, IC T C p , YCbCr, YUV, Yu'v', YPbPr, YIQ, OkLab, LMS, Mlm, and/or XYZ.
- the previously mentioned color spaces are all based on a set of three human spectral response functions.
- color is defined as a colorimetric coordinate. Thus, every color is defined by three words.
- Serial systems are already based on three color contributors (e.g., RGB, YCbCr). System 4 preferably uses XYZ or Yxy as the three color contributors.
- System 4 more preferably uses Yxy as the three color contributors. In another preferred embodiment, System 4 uses Yu'v' as the three color contributors. System 4 preferably uses two colorimetric coordinates and a luminance or a luma. In a preferred embodiment, System 4 uses color formats described in CIE and/or ISO colorimetric standards. In a preferred embodiment, System 4 uses color contributors that are independent of a white point and/or a reference white value. Alternatively, System 4 uses color contributors that are not independent of a white point and/or a reference white value (e.g., YCbCr, L*a*b*). In another embodiment, System 4 uses color contributors that require at least one known primary.
- Yxy does not require reference to a white point and/or at least one known primary. While YUV and/or L*a*b are plausible solutions, both are based on the CIE 1931 standard observer and would require additional processing with no gain in accuracy or gamut coverage when compared to Yxy. While XYZ is the basis for YUV and L*a*b, both require additional mathematical conversions beyond those required by Yxy. For example, x and y must be calculated before calculating a*b*. Additionally, YUV requires converting back to RGB and then converting to YUV via a known white point and color primaries.
- the reliance on a known white point also requires additional processing (e.g., chromatic adaptation) if the display white point is different from the encoded white point.
- the 3x3 matrix used in the conversion of RGB to YUV has negative values that impact the chrominance because the values are centered around 0 and can have positive and negative values, while luminance can only be positive.
- Yxy is derived from XYZ, it advantageously only deals with positive coefficients.
- luminance is only in Y, as brightness is reduced, chrominance is not affected. However, in YUV, the chrominance gets less contrast as brightness is reduced.
- L*C*h or other non-rectangular coordinate systems are compatible with the present invention.
- the 0 angle is expanded by applying a transform (e.g., an affine transform) to x, y data wherein the x, y values of the white point of the system (e.g., D65) are subtracted from the x, y data such that the x, y data includes negative values.
- a transform e.g., an affine transform
- 0 ranges from 0 to 360 degrees and the polar plot of the Yxy data is operable to occupy more than one quadrant.
- XYZ has been used in cinema for over 10 years.
- the Digital Cinema Initiative (DCI) defined the file format for distribution to theaters using an XYZ format.
- the reason for adopting XYZ was specifically to allow adaptation of new display technologies of the future. By including every color possible within a 3D space, legacy content would be compatible with any new display methods. This system has been in place since 2005.
- RGB and XYZ contain luminance in all three channels, which requires a system where each subpixel uses discrete image information. To get around this, a technology is employed to spread color information over several pixel areas. The logic behind this is that (1) image detail is held in the luminance component of the image and (2) resolution of the color areas is operable to be be much lower without an objectionable loss of picture quality. Therefore, methods such as YP B P R , YCBCR, and YC T C p are used to move images.
- RGB or XYZ only utilize a 4:4:4 sampling system, while YC B C R is operable be implemented as a 4:4:4, 4:2:2, 4: 1: 1, or a 4:2:0 sampled system.
- the present invention advantageously uses Yxy or Yu v to describe images outside of an RGB gamut.
- the Yxy or Yu v system is operable to transmit data using more than three primaries (e.g., more than RGB).
- the Yxy or Yu v system advantageously provides for all color possibilities to be presented to the display.
- the Yxy or Yu v system bridges the problems between scene referred and display referred imaging. In an end-to-end system, with a defined white point and EOTF, image data from a camera or graphics generator must conform to the defined display.
- a scene-referred workflow refers to manipulating an image prior to its transformation from camera color space to display color space.
- XYZ or ACES 0 are operable to be used to color time, then move to Yxy or Yu'v' to meet the display requirements, allows for a smoother approach to the display not losing any of the color values and keeping the color values as positive values. This is an advantage of Yxy or Yu'v', even if an image is only manipulated after it has been transformed from camera color space to display color space as displayed referred imaging.
- the Yxy or Yu'v' system is agnostic to both the camera data and the display characteristics, thus simplifying the distribution of electronic images.
- the Yxy or Yu'v' system of the present invention additionally does not increase data payloads and is operable to be substituted into any RGB file or transport system. Additionally, xy or u'v' information is operable to be subsampled, allowing for 4:2:2, 4:1: 1, and 4:2:0 packaging.
- the present invention also does not require specific media definitions to address limits in a display gamut. Displays with different color primaries (e.g., multi-primary display) are operable to display the same image if the color falls within the limits of that display using the Yxy or Yu'v' system of the present invention.
- Out of gamut information is operable to be managed by the individual display, not by the media definitions.
- Luminance is described only in one channel (Y), and because xy or u'v' do not contain any luminance information, a change in Y is independent of hue or chroma, making conversions between SDR and HDR simpler.
- Any camera gamut is operable to be coded into a Yxy or Yu'v' encode, and only minor modifications are required to implement a Yxy or Yu'v' system. Conversion from Yxy or Yu'v' to RGB is simple, with minimal latency processing and is completely compatible with any legacy RGB system.
- DRR data range reduction
- the brightness of the display is advantageously operable to be increased by adding more primaries.
- the image brightness is operable to be scaled to any desired display brightness using DRR.
- XYZ needs 16-bit float and 32-bit float encode or a miniminn of 12 bits for gamma or log encoded images for better quality.
- Transport of XYZ must be accomplished using a 4:4:4 sample system. Less than a 4:4:4 sample system causes loss of image detail because Y is used as a coordinate along with X and Z and carries color information, not a value.
- X and Z are not orthogonal to Y and, therefore, also include luminance information.
- converting to Yxy or Yu'v* concentrates the luminance in Y only, leaving two independent and pure chromaticity values.
- X, Y, and Z are used to calculate x and y.
- X, Y, and Z are used to calculate u' and v'.
- Y or an equivalent component is used as a luminance value with two independent colorimetric coordinates (e.g., x and y, u' and v', u and v, etc.) used to describe color
- 1 or L* components are used instead of Y.
- I and/or L* data is created from XYZ via a matrix conversion to LMS values.
- L* has a non-linear form that uses a power function of 1/3.
- I has a non-linear curve applied (e.g., PQ, HLG).
- I has a power function of 0.43 applied (e.g., in the case of FTP).
- the system is operable to use any two independent colorimetric coordinates with similar properties to x and y, u' and v', and/or u and v.
- the two independent colorimetric coordinates are x and y and the system is a Yxy system.
- the two colorimetric coordinates are u' and V and the system is a Yu'v' system.
- the two independent colorimetric coordinates (e.g., x and y, u' and v') are independent of a white point.
- the image data includes a reference to at least one white point.
- NTSC National Television System Committee
- Encoding described in SMPTE, International Telecommunication Union (ITU), and CTA standards includes methods using subsampling as 4:2:2, 4:2:0, and 4:1:1.
- this allows for color transportation of more than three primaries, including, but not limited to, at least four primaries, at least five primaries, at least six primaries, at least seven primaries, at least eight primaries, at least nine primaries, at least ten primaries, at least eleven primaries, and/or at least twelve primaries (e.g., through a SMPTE ST292 or an HDMI 1.2 transport).
- color transportation of more than three primaries occurs through SMPTE defined Serial Digital Interfeces (SDI), HDMI, or Display Port digital display interfeces.
- color transportation of more than three primaries occurs through an imaging serial data stream format.
- System 1, System 2, and System 3 use a YCbCr expansion to transport six color primary data sets, and the same transport (e.g., a YCbCr expansion) is operable to accommodate the image information as Yxy where Y is the luminance information and x,y describe CIE 1931 color coordinates in the half sample segments of the data stream (e.g., 4:2:2).
- the same transport e.g., a YCbCr expansion
- x,y or u',v' are fully sampled (e.g., 4:4:4).
- the sampling rate is 4:2:0 or 4: 1 : 1.
- the same transport is operable to accommodate the information as luminance and colorimetric coordinates other than x,y (e.g., u',v').
- the same transport is operable to accommodate data set using one channel of luminance data and two channels of colorimetric data.
- the same transport is operable to accommodate the image information as Yu'v' with foil sampling (e.g., 4:4:4) or partial sampling (e.g., 4:2:2, 4:2:0, 4: 1 : 1 ).
- the same transport is used with full sampling (e.g., XYZ).
- x,y have no reference to any primaries because x,y are explicit colorimetric positions.
- x and y are chromaticity coordinates such that x and y are operable to be used to define a gamut of visible color.
- u' and v' are explicit colorimetric positions. It is possible to define a gamut of visible color in other formats (e.g., L*a*b*, IC T C p , YCbCr), but it is not always trivial.
- L*a*b* and IC T C p are colorimetric and are operable to describe any visible color
- YCbCr is constrained to the available colors within the RGB primary color triad.
- IC T C p requires a gamut limitation/description before it is operable to encode color information.
- a color is visible in Yxy space, it must be determined if the sum of x and y is greater than or equal to zero. If not, the color is not defined. If the x,y point is within the CIE x,y locus (CIE horseshoe), the color is visible. If not, the color is not visible. Similarly, if a u',v' point is within the CIE u',v' locus (CIE horseshoe), the color is visible.
- the Yxy chromaticity diagram is non-linear, such that there is not a vector of unit magnitude operable to represent the difference between two chromaticities that is uniformly visible.
- Yu'v' reduces non-uniformity present in Yxy systems and is perceptually more uniform than Yxy.
- the Y value plays a role especially in a display.
- the display is operable to reproduce an x,y color within a certain range of Y values, wherein the range is a function of the primaries.
- the display is operable to reproduce a u',v' color within a certain range of Y values, wherein the range is a function of the primaries.
- a non-linear fimction e.g., electro-optical transfer function (EOTF)
- EOTF electro-optical transfer function
- Y, L*, or I are altered by a non-linear function.
- Y, L*, or I are sent linearly (e.g., without a non-linear function applied).
- a non-linear fimction is applied to all three channels (e.g., Yxy, Yu'v').
- applying the non-linear function to all three channels provides data compression.
- FIG. 11 illustrates one embodiment of a Yxy or Yu'v' encode with a non-linear transfer function (NLTF).
- Image data is acquired in any format (e.g., RGB, RGBCMY, CMYK) operable to be converted to XYZ linear data.
- the XYZ data is then converted to Yxy or Yu'v' data, and the Yxy or Yu'v' data is processed through an NLTF.
- the processed Yxy or Yu'v' data is then converted to a standardized transportation format for mapping and readout.
- x and y remain as independent colorimetric coordinates and the non-linear transfer function is only applied to Y, thus providing simpler decoding of x and y values.
- u' and v' remain as independent colorimetric coordinates and the non-linear transfer function is only applied to Y, thus providing simpler decoding of u' and v* values.
- application of the NLTF to all three channels provides compression in the system.
- the NLTF is described in
- Y is orthogonal to x and y, and remains orthogonal to x and y even when a non-linear function is applied.
- Y is also orthogonal to u' and v', and remains orthogonal to u* and v' even when a non-linear function is applied.
- System 4 is compatible with a plurality of data formats including data formats using one luminance coordinate and two colorimetric coordinates.
- LMS data is transformed to a projected representation using the following equations:
- the M channel which is the closest to the Y response is not exactly Y.
- the projected representation is operable to be used analogous to Yxy as Mlm.
- the projected representation is operable to be used as Yim where 1ms is operable to be transformed back to
- the Hunt-Pointer-Estevez matrix is used as shown below:
- the XYZ data from the above equation is operable to be rescaled by using a ratio of Yoriginal to Ymatrix using the following equation:
- FIG. 12 illustrates one embodiment of a Yxy or Yu'v' encode without an NLTF.
- Image data is acquired in any format (e.g., RGB, RGBCMY, CMYK) operable to be converted to XYZ data.
- the XYZ data is then converted to Yxy or Y u'v' data, and then converted to a standardized transportation format for mapping and readout.
- FIG. 12 shows a Yxy or Yu'v' encode
- System 4 is operable to be used with a plurality of data formats.
- FIG. 13 illustrates one embodiment of a Yxy or Yu'v' decode with an inverse nonlinear transfer function (NLTF- 1 ). After mapping and readout, the data is processed through an NLTF" 1 to yield the Yxy or Yu'v' data. The Yxy or Yu'v' data is then converted back to the NLTF- 1 .
- the XYZ data is operable to be converted to multiple data formats including, but not limited to, RGB, CMYK, 6P (e.g., 6P-B, 6P-C), and gamuts including at least four primaries through at least twelve primaries.
- RGB CMYK
- 6P e.g., 6P-B, 6P-C
- gamuts including at least four primaries through at least twelve primaries.
- the matrices are as follows:
- the matrices are as follows:
- the matrices are as follows:
- FIG. 14 illustrates one embodiment of a Yxy or Yu'v' decode without an NLTF.
- the Yxy or Yu'v' data is then converted to the XYZ data.
- XYZ data is operable to be converted to multiple data formats including, but not limited to.
- RGB, CMYK, 6P e.g., 6P-B, 6P-C
- gamuts including at least four primaries through at least twelve primaries.
- System 4 is operable to be used with a plurality of data formats.
- FIG. 15A illustrates one embodiment of a 4:2:2 Yxy encode with an NLTF.
- a full bandwidth luminance channel (1) is used to carry image detail and the remaining color coordinate components (e.g., x,y) are half sampled.
- the remaining color coordinate components e.g., x,y
- Yxy data undergoes a 4:2:2 encode.
- Other encoding methods e.g., 4:4:4, 4:2:0, 4:1:1 are compatible with the present invention.
- Other quantization methods and bit depths are also compatible with the present invention.
- the bit depth is 8 bits, 10 bits, 12 bits, 14 bits, and/or 16 bits.
- the Yxy values are sampled as floats (e.g., 16-bit floating point representation, 32-bit floating point representation).
- the floats include IEEE 754 defined floats.
- the NLTF is a DRR function between about 0.25 and about 0.9. In another embodiment, the NLTF is a DRR function between about 0.25 and about 0.7. In one embodiment, the NLTF is a DRR function including a value between about 0.41 and about 0.7. In one embodiment, the NLTF is a 1/3 DRR function including a value between about 0.25 and about 0.499.
- FIG. 15B illustrates one embodiment of a 4:2:2 Yxy encode without an NLTF.
- the Yxy data undergoes a 4:2:2 encode.
- Other encoding methods e.g., 4:4:4, 4:2:0, 4: 1 : 1 are compatible with the present invention.
- System 4 is operable to be used with a plurality of data formats.
- FIG. 16A illustrates one embodiment of a 4:2:2 Yxy encode with an NLTF applied to all three channels and linear scaling of x,y.
- a full bandwidth luminance channel (Y) is used to carry image detail and the remaining color coordinate components (e.g., x,y) are half sampled.
- the Yxy data undergoes a 4:2:2 encode.
- Other encoding methods e.g., 4:4:4, 4:2:0, 4: 1: 1
- Other quantization methods and bit depths are also compatible with the present invention. In one embodiment, the bit depth is 8 bits, 10 bits, 12 bits, 14 bits, and/or 16 bits.
- the Yxy values are sampled as floats (e.g., 16-bit floating point representation, 32-bit floating point representation).
- the floats include IEEE 754 defined floats.
- FIG. 16A shows a Yxy decode
- System 4 is operable to be used with a plurality of data formats.
- FIG. 16B illustrates one embodiment of a 4:2:2 Yxy encode without an NLTF and with linear scaling of x,y.
- the Yxy data undergoes a 4:2:2 encode.
- Other encoding methods e.g., 4:4:4, 4:2:0, 4: 1: 1 are compatible with the present invention.
- System 4 is operable to be used with a plurality of data formats.
- FIG. 17A illustrates one embodiment of a 4:4:4 Yxy encode with an NLTF.
- a full bandwidth luminance channel (f) is used to carry image detail and the remaining color coordinate components (e.g., x,y) are also fully sampled.
- the Yxy data undergoes a 4:4:4 encode.
- Other encoding methods e.g., 4:2:2, 4:2:0, 4: 1 : 1) are compatible with the present invention.
- FIG. 17A shows a Yxy encode
- System 4 is operable to be used with a plurality of data formats.
- FIG. 17B illustrates one embodiment of a 4:4:4 Yxy encode without an NLTF.
- the Yxy data undergoes a 4:4:4 encode.
- Other encoding methods e.g., 4:2:2, 4:2:0, 4: 1 : 1 are compatible with the present invention.
- System 4 is operable to be used with a plurality of data formats.
- FIG. 18A illustrates one embodiment of a 4:4:4 Yxy encode with an NLTF applied to all three channels and linear scaling of x,y.
- a foil bandwidth luminance channel (f) is used to carry image detail and the remaining color coordinate components (e.g., x,v) are also folly sampled.
- the Yxy data undergoes a 4:4:4 encode.
- Other encoding methods e.g., 4:2:2, 4:2:0, 4: 1: 1) are compatible with the present invention.
- FIG. 18A shows a Yxy encode
- System 4 is operable to be used with a plurality of data formats.
- FIG. 18B illustrates one embodiment of a 4:4:4 Yxy encode without an NLTF and with linear scaling of x,y.
- the Yxy data undergoes a 4:4:4 encode.
- Other encoding methods e.g., 4:2:2, 4:2:0, 4: 1 : 1 are compatible with the present invention.
- System 4 is operable to be used with a plurality of data formats.
- FIG. 19 illustrates sample placements of Yxy system components for a 4:2:2 pixel mapping.
- a plurality of pixels e.g., P00-P35
- the first subscript number refers to a row number and the second subscript number refers to a column number.
- W' INT00 is the luma and the color components are x INT0 0 ”d Y INT00 .
- pixel P 01 is the luma.
- Y' INT10 is the luma and the color components are x INT10 and Y INT10
- W' INT11 is the luma.
- the luma and the color components e.g., the set of image data
- a particular pixel e.g., Poo
- the data is sent linearly as luminance (e.g., Y INT00 ).
- the example in FIG. 19 includes Yxy system components, System 4 is operable to be used with a plurality' of data formats.
- the present invention is operable to provide pixel mapping data as Yxy data and transport data as a Y channel, a first colorimetric coordinate channel (e.g., x), and a second colorimetric coordinate channel (e.g., y).
- FIG. 20 illustrates sample placements of Yxy system components for a 4:2:0 pixel mapping.
- a plurality of pixels e.g., P00-P35
- the first subscript number refers to a row number and the second subscript number refers to a column number.
- pixel Poo is the luma and the color components are x INTQQ and Y INT00 -
- pixel P01 is the luma.
- pixel Pio is the luma.
- pixel P11 is the luma.
- the luma and the color components corresponding to a particular pixel e.g., Poo
- the luma and the color components corresponding to a particular pixel is used to calculate color and brightness of subpixels.
- FIG. 20 includes luma, it is equally possible that the data is sent linearly as luminance (e.g., YINTOO). Further, although the example in FIG. 20 includes Yxy system components, System 4 is operable to be used with a plurality of data formats.
- the set of image data includes pixel mapping data.
- the pixel mapping data includes a subsample of the set of values in a color space.
- the color space is a Yxy color space (e.g., 4:2:2).
- the pixel mapping data includes an alignment of the set of values in the color space (e.g., Yxy color space, Yu'v' colorspace).
- Table 6 illustrates mapping to SMPTE ST2110 for 4:2: 2 sampling of Yxy and Yu'v data.
- Table 7 illustrates mapping to SMPTE ST2110 for 4:4:4 linear and non-linear sampling of Yxy and Yu'v data.
- the present invention is compatible with a plurality of data formats and not restricted to Yxy and Yu'v data.
- FIG. 21 illustrates one embodiment of a SMPTE ST292 Yxy system mapping.
- To fit a Yxy system into a SMPTE ST292 stream involves the following substitutions: is placed in the Y data segments, x INT is placed in the Cr data segments, and y iNT is placed in the Cb data segments.
- luminance or luma is placed in the Y data segments, a first colorimetric coordinate is placed in the Cr data segments, and a second colorimetric coordinate is placed in the Cb data segments.
- FIG. 21 shows a Yxy system mapping
- System 4 is operable to be used with a plurality of data formats.
- FIG. 22 illustrates one embodiment of a SMPTE ST2082 Yxy system mapping.
- Y] NT is placed in the G data segments
- x INT is placed in the R data segments
- B data segments is placed in the B data segments.
- luminance or luma is placed in the G data segments
- a first colorimetric coordinate is placed in the R data segments
- a second colorimetric coordinate is placed in the B data segments.
- FIG. 23 illustrates one embodiment of Yxy inserted into a CTA 861 data stream.
- System 4 is operable to be used with a plurality of data formats.
- FIG. 24A illustrates one embodiment of a Yxy decode with an NLTF 1 applied only to the Y channel.
- a non-linear function e.g., NLTF 1
- the non-linear function is not applied to the two colorimetric coordinates.
- System 4 is operable to be used with a plurality of data formats.
- the NLTF 1 is an inverse DRR function with a value between about 1.1 and about 4. In one embodiment, the NLTF 1 is an inverse DRR function with a value between about 1.4 and about 4. In one embodiment, the NLTF 1 is an inverse DRR function with a value between about 1.4 and about 2.4. In one embodiment, the NLTF 1 is an inverse DRR function with a value between about 2 and about 4.
- FIG. 24B illustrates one embodiment of a Yxy decode without an NLTF 1 applied to any of the channels.
- data is sent linearly as luminance.
- a non-linear function e.g., an NLTF' 1
- System 4 is operable to be used with a plurality of data formats.
- FIG. 25 A illustrates one embodiment of a Yxy decode with an NLTF* applied to all three channels and rescaling of x and y.
- a non-linear function e.g., an NLTF 1
- System 4 is operable to be used with a plurality of data formats.
- FIG. 25B illustrates one embodiment of a Yxy decode without an NLTF 1 applied to any of the channels and with rescaling applied to the x,y channels.
- data is sent linearly as luminance.
- a non-linear function e.g., an NLTF 1
- System 4 is operable to be used with a plurality of data formats (e.g., Yu'V).
- XYZ is used as the basis of ACES for cinematographers and allows for the use of colors outside of the ITU-R BT.709 and/or the P3 color spaces, encompassing all of the CIE color space. Colorists often work in XYZ, so there is widespread familiarity with XYZ. Further, XYZ is used for other standards (e.g., JPEG 2000, Digital Cinema Initiatives (DCI)), which could be easily adapted for System 4. Additionally, most color spaces use XYZ as the basis for conversion, so the conversions between XYZ and most color spaces are well understood and documented. Many professional displays also have XYZ option as a color reference function.
- DCI Digital Cinema Initiatives
- the image data converter includes at least one processor coupled to at least one memory.
- the image data converter includes at least one look-up table (LUT).
- the at least one look-up table maps out- of-gamut colors to zero.
- the at least one look-up table maps out-of-gamut colors to a periphery of visible colors.
- an out-of-gamut color is mapped to the periphery along a straight line between the out-of-gamut color in its original location and a white point of the system (e.g., D65).
- the luminance and/or luma value is maintained, and only die colorimetric coordinates are affected by the mapping.
- gamma transforms and/or scaling are added after mapping.
- the mapping is used to convert Yxy to XYZ and back.
- the mapping is used to convert Y'xy to X’Y'Z* and back.
- a gamma function and/or a scaling is maintained throughout the conversion.
- a 2.6 gamma function is used to scale x by 0.74 and y by 0.84.
- the gamma and/or the scaling are removed after conversion of gamut colors to zero.
- the at least one look-up table maps out of gamut colors to a periphery of visible colors.
- the image data converter includes at least one look-up table (LUT).
- the at least one look-up table maps out-of-gamut colors to zero.
- the at least one look-up table maps out-of-gamut colors to a periphery of visible colors.
- an out-of-gamut color is mapped to the periphery along a straight line between the out-of-gamut color in its original location and a white point of the system (e.g., D65).
- the luminance and/or luma value is maintained, and only the colorimetric coordinates are affected by the mapping.
- gamma transforms and/or scaling are added after mapping.
- the mapping is used to convert Yxy to XYZ and back.
- the mapping is used to convert Y'xy to XY'Z ⁇ and back.
- a gamma function and/or a scaling is maintained throughout the conversion.
- a 2.6 gamma function is used to scale x by 0.74 and y by 0.84.
- the gamma and/or the scaling are removed after conversion.
- the system design minimizes limitations to use standard transfer functions for both encode and/or decode processes.
- Current practices used in standards include, but are not limited to, ITU-R BT.1886, ITU-R BT.2020, SMPTE ST274, SMPTE ST296, SMPTE ST2084, and ITU-R BT.2100. These standards are compatible with this system and require no modification.
- Encoding and decoding multi-primary (e.g., 6P, RGBC) images is formatted into several different configurations to adapt to image transport frequency limitations.
- the highest qualify transport is obtained by keeping all components as multi-primary (e.g., RGBCMY) components. This uses the highest sampling frequencies and requires the most signal bandwidth.
- An alternate method is to sum the image details in a luminance channel at full bandwidth and then send the color difference signals at half or quarter sampling (e.g., Y Cr Cb Cc Cy). This allows a similar image to pass through lower bandwidth transports.
- An IPT system is a similar idea to the Yxy system with several exceptions.
- An IPT system or an IC T C p system is still an extension of XYZ and is operable to be derived from RGB and multiprimary (e.g., RGBCMY, RGBC) color coordinates.
- An IPT color description is operable to be substituted within a 4:4:4 sampling structure, but XYZ has already been established and does not require the same level of calculations.
- XYZ has already been established and does not require the same level of calculations.
- For an IC T C p transport system similar substitutions are operable to be made. However, both substitution systems are limited in that a non-linear function (e.g., OOTF) is contained in all three components.
- the non-linear function is operable to be removed for IPT or IC T C p , the derivation is still based on a set of RGB primaries with a white point reference. Removing the non-linear function may also alter the bit depth noise and compressibility.
- FIG. 26A illustrates one embodiment of an IPT 4:4:4 encode.
- FIG. 26B illustrates one embodiment of an IPT 4:4:4 decode.
- FIG. 27A illustrates one embodiment of an IC T C p 4:2:2 encode.
- FIG. 27B illustrates one embodiment of an IC T C p 4:2:2 decode.
- Transfer functions used in systems 1, 2, and 3 are generally framed around two basic implementations.
- the transfer functions are defined within two standards.
- the OETF is defined in ITU-R BT.709-6, table 1, row 1.2.
- the inverse function, the EOTF is defined in ITU-R BT.1886.
- PQ perceptual quantizer
- HLG hybrid log-gamma
- DRR Data Range Reduction
- the image is operable to be encoded within the source device.
- the use of a common non-linearity allows faster and more accurate conversion.
- the design of this non-linearity is for data transmission efficiency, not as an optical transform function. This only works if certain parameters are set for the encode. Any pre-process is acceptable, but it must ensure an accurate 16-bit linear result.
- Two methods are available for decode: (1) applying the inverse DRR to the input data and converting to a linear data format or (2) a difference between the DRR value and the desired display gamma is operable to be used to directly map the input data to the display for simple display gammas.
- Another requirement is that the calculation be simple. By using DRR, processing is kept to a minimum, which reduces signal latency.
- the non-linearity e.g., DRR
- System 4 is operable to use any of the transfer functions, which are operable to be applied to the Y component.
- a new method has been developed: a Vi DRR function.
- the 1/2 DRR function allows for a single calculation from the luminance (e.g., Y) component of the signal (e.g., Yxy signal, Yu'v' signal) to the display.
- the 1/2 DRR function is designed for data efficiency, not as an optical transform function.
- the 1/2 DRR function is used instead of a non-linearposition (e.g., OETF or EOTF).
- signal input to the 1/2 DRR function is assumed to be linear and constrained between values of 0 and 1.
- the 1/2 DRR function is optimized for 10-bit transport and/or 12-bit transport.
- the 1/2 DRR function is optimized for 14-bit transport and/or 16-bit transport.
- the 1/2 DRRsch is optimized for 8-bit transport.
- a typical implementation applies an inverse of the 1/2 DRRsch, which linearizes the signal. A conversion to a display gamut is then applied.
- FIG. 28 illustrates one embodiment of a 1/2 DRRsch.
- the system incorporates both the source gamma (e.g., OETF) and the display gamma (e.g., EOTF).
- the source gamma e.g., OETF
- EOTF display gamma
- the following equation for a DRR is used: where the DRR value in this equation is the conversion factor from linear to non-linear.
- An inverse DRR (DRR- 1 ) is the re-expansion coefficient from the non-linear to the linear.
- using the Vi DRR function with the OOTF gamma combines the functions into a single step rather than utilizing a two-step conversion process.
- at least one tone curve is applied after the ‘/z DRR function.
- the 1/2 DRR function advantageously provides ease to convert to and from linear values. Given that all color and tone mapping has to be done in the linear domain, having a simple to implement conversion is desirable and makes the conversion to and from linear values easier and simpler.
- FIG. 29 illustrates a graph of maximum quantizing error using the Vi DRR function. The maximum quantizing error from an original 16-bit image to a 10-bit (blue trace) signal is shown in the graph.
- the maximum quantizing error is less than 0.05% (e.g., 0.047%) for 16-bit to 10-bit conversion using the 1/2 DRR function.
- the graph also shows the maximum quantizing error from the original 16-bit image to a 12-bit (orange trace) signal and a 14 -bit (gray trace) signal.
- a Vi DRR is ideal for converting images with 16-bit (e.g., 16-bit float) values to 12 -bit (e.g., 12-bit integer) values
- a 1/3 DRR provides equivalent performance in terms of peak signal-to-noise ratio (PSNR).
- PSNR peak signal-to-noise ratio
- the 1/3 DRR conversion from 16-bit float maintains the same performance as 1/2 DRR
- an equation for finding an optimum value of tau is:
- the Minimum Float Value is based on the IEEE Standard for Floating-Point Arithmetic (IEEE 754) (July 2019), which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
- the range of image values is normalized to between 0 and 1.
- the range of image values is preferably normalized to between 0 and 1 and then the DRR function is applied.
- FIG. 30 illustrates one embodiment of a 1/3 DRR function.
- the DRR value is preferably between 0.25 and 0.9.
- Table 8 illustrates one embodiment of an evaluation of DRR vs. bit depth vs. foil 16-bit float (equivalent to 24 f-stops).
- Table 9 illustrates one embodiment of a recommended application of DRR.
- Table 10 illustrates one embodiment of DRR functions optimized for 8 bits, 10 bits, and 12 bits, based on tire desired dynamic range as indicted in f-stops. Each f-stop represents a doubling of light values. The f-stops provide a range of tones over which the noise, measured in f-stops (e.g., the inverse of the perceived signal-to-noise ratio, PSNR) remains under a specified maximum value.
- PSNR signal-to-noise ratio
- no DRR is applied to Yxy or Y u'v' 16-bit data.
- the Yxy or Yu'v' 16-bit data covers 24 f-stops.
- a 0.6 DRR is applied to Yxy or Yu'v' 12-bit data
- a 0.5 DRR is applied to Yxy or Yu'v' 10-bit data
- a 0.4 DRR is applied to Yxy or Yu'v' 8-bit data.
- the Yxy or Y u'v' 12-bit data, the Yxy or Y u'v' 10-bit data, and/or the Yxy or Y u'v' 8-bit data cover 20 f- stops.
- the multi-primary system includes an encoder operable to accept image data input (e.g., RAW, SDI, HDMI, DisplayPort, ethemet).
- image data input is from a camera, a computer, a processor, a flash memory card, a network (e.g., local area network (LAN)), or any other file storage or transfer medium operable to provide image data input.
- the encoder is operable to send processed image data (e.g., Yxy, XYZ, Yu'v') to a decoder (e.g., via wired or wireless communication).
- the decoder is operable to send formatted image data (e.g., SDI, HDMI, Ethemet, DisplayPort, Yxy, XYZ, Yu'v', legacy RGB, multi-primary data (e.g., RGBC, RGBCMY, etc.)) to at least one viewing device (e.g., display, monitor, projector) for display (e.g., via wired or wireless communication).
- the decoder is operable to send formatted image data to at least two viewing devices simultaneously. In one embodiment, two or more of the at least two viewing devices use different color spaces and/or formats.
- the decoder sends formatted image data to a first viewing device in HDMI and a second viewing device in SDI.
- the decoder sends formatted image data as multi-primary (e.g., RGBCMY, RGBC) to a first viewing device and as legacy RGB (e.g., Rec. 709) to a second viewing device.
- the Ethemet formatted image data is compatible with SMPTE ST2022. Additionally or alternatively, the Ethemet formatted image data is compatible with SMPTE ST2110 and/or any internet protocol (IP)-based transport protocol for image data.
- IP internet protocol
- the encoder and the decoder preferably include at least one processor.
- the at least one processor is be a general-purpose microprocessor (e.g., a central processing unit (CPU)), a graphics processing unit (GPU), a microcontroller, a Digital Signal Processor (DSP), an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), a Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA), a Programmable Logic Device (PLD), a controller, a state machine, gated or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, or any other suitable entity or combinations thereof that can perform calculations, process instructions for execution, and/or other manipulations of information.
- one or more of the at least one processor is operable to run predefined programs stored in at least one memory' of the encoder and/or the decoder.
- the encoder and/or the decoder include hardware, firmware, and/or software.
- the encoder and/or the decoder is operable to be inserted into third party software (e.g., via a dynamic-link library (DLL)).
- DLL dynamic-link library
- functionality and/or features of the encoder and/or the decoder are combined for efficiency.
- FIG. 31 illustrates one embodiment of an encoder.
- the encoder includes at least one encoder input (e.g., SDI, HDMI, SMPTE ST2110, SMPTE ST2022, DisplayPort, fiber, ethemet) and at least one encoder output (e.g., SDI, HDMI, SMPTE ST2110, SMPTE ST2022, Yxy SDI, Yxy HDMI, Yu'v* SDI, Yu'v' HDMI, DisplayPort, fiber, ethemet).
- the encoder preferably includes an encoder operations programming port operable to provide updates to firmware and/or software on the encoder.
- the encoder operations programming port is operable to update library functions, internal formatting, camera demosaicing (e.g., DeBayer) pattern algorithms, and/or look-up tables in the encoder.
- the encoder includes a metadata input.
- the encoder includes an encoder configuration central processing unit (CPU) operable to interface with at least one encoder memory.
- the encoder further includes an encoder equalizer, at least one encoder serial to parallel (S/P) converter (e.g., SDI S/P converter, HDMI S/P, Ethemet S/P converter), at least one encoder flash card reader, at least one Ethemet port, a demosaicing (e.g., DeBayer) engine, a linear converter, a scaler (e.g., 0-1), at least one custom encoder LUT, a color channel-to-XYZ converter (e.g., RGB in Rec. 709, P3, Rec.
- an XYZ-to-Y xy converter an XYZ-to-Y u'v' converter, a DRR function (e.g., */i DRR), an xy scaler, a u'v' scaler, a sampling selector (e.g., 4:4:4, 4:2:2, 4:2:0), a metadata decoder, an encoder metadata formatter, at least one encoder parallel to serial (P/S) converter (e.g., SDI P/S converter, HDMI P/S converter, Ethemet P/S converter), at least one encoder formatter (e.g., SDI formatter, HDMI formatter, Ethemet formatter), and/or a watermark engine.
- the input data is operable to bypass any combination of processing stages and/or components in the encoder.
- the at least one encoder input includes, but is not limited to, an SDI input, an HDMI input, a DisplayPort input, an ethemet input, and/or a SMPTE ST2110 input.
- the SDI input preferably follows a modified version of SMPTE ST352 payload identification (ID) standard.
- ID payload identification
- the SDI input is SMPTE ST292, SMPTE ST425, and/or SMPTE ST2082.
- a video signal from the SDI input is then sent to the encoder equalizer to compensate for cable type and length.
- the HDMI input is decoded with a standard HDMI receiver circuit.
- the HDMI input is converted to a parallel format.
- the HDMI input is defined within the CTA 861 standard.
- the at least one encoder input includes image data (e.g., RAW data) from a flash device.
- the configuration CPU identifies a format on the flash card and/or a file type, and has software operable to read the image data and make it available to the encoder.
- the encoder operations port is operable to connect to an encoder control system (e.g., via a micro universal serial bus (USB) or equivalent).
- USB micro universal serial bus
- the encoder control system is operable to control the at least one encoder memory that holds tables for the decmosaidng (e.g., DeBayer) engine, load modifications to the linear converter and/or scaler, select the at least one input, loads a table for the at least one custom encoder LUT, bypass one or more of the at least one custom encoder LUT, bypass the demosaicing (e.g., DeBayer) engine, add or modify conversion tables for the RGB to XYZ converter, modify the DRR function (e.g., a Vi DRR function), turn the watermark engine on or off, modify a digital watermark for the watermark engine, and/or perform functions for the flash memory player (e.g., play, stop, forward, first forward, rewind, fest rewind, frame selection).
- the decmosaidng e.g., DeBayer
- load modifications to the linear converter and/or scaler select the at least one input
- loads a table for the at least one custom encoder LUT bypass
- the metadata decoder is operable to decode Extended Display Identification Data (EDID) (e.g., for HDMI inputs), SDP parameters (SMPTE ST 2110), payload ID, and/or ancillary information (e.g., vertical ancillary data (VANC)).
- EDID Extended Display Identification Data
- SMPTE ST 2110 SDP parameters
- VANC vertical ancillary data
- the encoder configuration CPU is operable to process data from the metadata decoder. Further, the encoder configuration CPU is operable to select particular settings and/or deliver selected data to the encoder metadata formatter.
- the metadata input is operable to insert additional data and/or different data values, which are also operable to be sent to the encoder metadata formatter.
- the encoder metadata formatter is operable to take information from the encoder configuration CPU and arrange the information to be reinserted into the output of the process. In one embodiment, each encoder output formatter then takes this formatted data and times it to be used in tire serial stream.
- the at least one S/P converter is up to n bit for improved processing efficiency.
- the at least one S/P converter preferably formats the processed image data so that the encoder and/or the decoder is operable to use parallel processing.
- parallel processing keeps processing fast and minimizes latency.
- the at least one encoder formatter is operable to organize the serial stream as a proper format.
- the encoder includes a corresponding encoder formatter for each of the at least one encoder output. For example, if the encoder includes at least one HDMI output in the at least one encoder output, the encoder also includes at least one HDMI formatter in the at least one encoder formatter; if the encoder includes at least one SDI output in the at least one encoder output, the encoder also includes at least one SDI formatter in the at least one encoder formatter; if the encoder includes at least one Ethernet output in the at least one encoder output, the encoder also includes at least one Ethernet formatter in the at least one encoder formatter; and so forth.
- the demosaicing (e.g., DeBayer) engine is operable to convert RAW image data into a raster image.
- the raster image is a 3-channel image (e.g., RGB).
- the demosaicing (e.g., DeBayer) engine is bypassed for data that is not in a RAW image format.
- the demosaicing (e.g., DeBayer) engine is configured to accommodate at least three primaries (e.g., 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, etc.) in the Bayer or stripe pattern.
- the operations programming port is operable to load a file with code required to adapt a specific pattern (e.g., Bayer).
- a bypass path is provided and switched to and from using the encoder configuration CPU.
- the encoder is operable to recognize the image data format and select the correct path automatically. Alternatively, the image data format is included in metadata.
- the encoder configuration CPU is operable to recognize an input non-linearity value and provide an inverse value to the linear converter to linearize the image data.
- the scaler is operable to map out of gamut values into in gamut values.
- the at least one custom encoder LUT is operable to transform an input (e.g., a standard from a manufacturer) to XYZ, Yxy, or Yu'v*.
- the input include, but are not limited to, RED Log3G10, ARR1 log C, ACEScc, SONY S-Log, CANON Log, PANASONIC V Log, PANAVISION Panalog, and/or BLACK MAGIC CinemaDNG.
- the at least one custom encoder LUT is operable to transform the input to an output according to artistic needs.
- the encoder does not include the color channel-to-XYZ converter or the XYZ-to-Y xy converter, as this functionality is incorporated into the at least one custom encoder LUT.
- the at least one custom encoder LUT is a 65-cube look-up table.
- the at least one custom encoder LUT is preferably compatible with ACES Common LUT Format (CLF) - A Common File Format for Look-Up Tables S-2014-006, which was published July 22, 2021 and which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
- the at least one custom encoder LUT is a multi-column LUT.
- the at least one custom encoder LUT is preferably operable to be loaded through the operations programming port.
- the encoder configuration CPU is operable to bypass the at least one custom encoder LUT.
- RGB or multi-primary (e.g., RGBCMY, RGBC) data is converted into XYZ data using the color channel-to-XYZ converter.
- a white point value for the original video data e.g., RGB, RGBCMY
- the encoder configuration CPU is operable to provide an adaption calculation using the white point value.
- the XYZ-to-Yxy converter is operable to convert XYZ data to Yxy data.
- the Yxy image data is segmented into a luminance value and a set of colorimetric values, the relationship between Y and x,y is operable to be manipulated to use lower data rates.
- the XYZ-to-Yu'v 1 converter is operable to convert XYZ data to Yu'v' data, and the conversion is operable to be manipulated to use lower data rates.
- Any system with a luminance value and a set of colorimetric values is compatible with the present invention.
- the configuration CPU is operable to set the sample selector to fit one or more of the at least one encoder output.
- the sampling selector sets a sampling structure (e.g., 4:4:4, 4:2:2, 4:2:0, 4:1:1).
- the sampling selector is preferably controlled by the encoder configuration CPU.
- the sampling selector also places each component in the correct serial data position as shown in Table 8.
- the watermark engine is operable to modify an image from an original image to include a digital watermark.
- the digital watermark is outside of tire ITU- R BT.2020 color gamut.
- the digital watermark is compressed, collapsed, and/or mapped to an edge of the smaller color gamut such that it is not visible and/or not detectable when displayed on a viewing device with a smaller color gamut than ITU-R BT.2020.
- the digital watermark is not visible and/or not detectable when displayed on a viewing device with an ITU-R BT.2020 color gamut.
- tire digital watermark is a watermark image (e.g., logo), alphanumeric text (e.g., unique identification code), and/or a modification of pixels.
- the digital watermark is invisible to the naked eye.
- the digital watermark is perceptible when decoded by an algorithm.
- the algorithm uses an encryption key to decode the digital watermark.
- the digital watermark is visible in a non-obtrusive manner (e.g., at the bottom right of the screen).
- the digital watermark is preferably detectable after size compression, scaling, cropping, and/or screenshots.
- the digital watermark is an imperceptible change in sound and/or video.
- the digital watermark is a pattern (e.g., a random pattern, a fixed pattern) using a luminance difference (e.g., 1 bit luminance difference).
- the pattern is operable to change at each flame.
- the digital watermark is a dynamic digital watermark and/or a static digital watermark.
- the dynamic digital watermark works as a full frame rate or a partial frame rate (e.g., half frame rate).
- the watermark engine is operable to accept commands from the encoder configuration CPU.
- the at least one encoder input already includes a digital watermark when input to the encoder.
- a camera includes the digital watermark on an image signal that is input to the encoder as the at least one encoder input.
- the at least one encoder output includes, but is not limited to SDI, HDMI, DisplayPort, and/or ethemet.
- at least one encoder formatter formats the image data to produce the at least one encoder output.
- the at least one encoder formatter includes, but is not limited to, an SDI formatter, an SMPTE ST2110, and/or an HDMI formatter.
- the SDI formatter formats the serial video data into an SDI package as a Yxy or Yu'v' output.
- the SMPTE ST2110 formatter formats the serial video data into an ethemet package as a Yxy or Yu'v' output.
- the HDMI formatter formats the serial video data into an HDMI package as a Yxy or Yu'v' output.
- FIG. 32 illustrates one embodiment of a decoder.
- the decoder includes at least one decoder input (e.g., SDI, HDMI, Ethernet, Yxy SDI, Yxy' HDMI, Yxy Ethernet, Yu'v' SDI, Yu'v' HDMI, Yu'v' Ethemet, DisplayPort, fiber) and at least one decoder output (e.g., Yxy SDI, Yu'v' SDI, at least one SDI, XY'Z', HDMI, Ethernet, DisplayPort, fiber).
- the decoder includes a decoder configuration central processing unit (CPU) operable to interface with at least one decoder memory.
- CPU central processing unit
- the decoder preferably includes a decoder operations programming port operable to provide updates to firmware and/or software on the decoder.
- the decoder further includes a decoder equalizer, at least one decoder serial to parallel (S/P) converter (e.g., SDI S/P converter, HDMI S/P converter, Ethemet S/P converter), a watermark detection engine, a watermark subtraction engine, a DRR-to-linear converter (e.g., Vi DRR-to-linear converter), an xy de-scaler, a u'v' de-scaler, at least one sampling converter (e.g., 4:2:2 or 4:2:0 to 4:4:4 converter), at least one Yxy-to- XYZ converter, at least one Yu'v'-to-XYZ converter, a gamma library' (e.g., linear, 2.2, 2.35, 2.4, 2.6, HLG, PQ, custom), an XYZ
- a color channel-to-YUV library e.g., RGB (e.g.. Rec. 709, P3, Rec. 2020); multi-primary data
- a color channel-to-YUV library e.g., RGB (e.g.. Rec. 709, P3, Rec. 2020); multi-primary data
- at least one sample selector at least one transfer function, at least one custom decoder LUT, a metadata reader, a decoder metadata formatter, at least one decoder parallel to serial (P/S) converter (e.g., SDI XY'Z', at least one SDI, HDMI), and/or at least one decoder formatter (e.g., SDI X’Y'Z* formatter, SDI RGB formatter, SDI CMY formatter, HDMI formatter).
- P/S parallel to serial
- X’Y'Z' output includes a non-linear function (e.g., gamma, PQ, HLG) applied to XYZ data.
- the processed image data is operable to bypass any combination of processing stages and/or components in the decoder.
- the decoder operations port is operable to connect to a decoder control system (e.g., via a micro universal serial bus (USB) or equivalent).
- the decoder control system is operable to select the at least one decoder input, perform functions for the flash memory player (e.g., play, stop, forward, fast forward, rewind, fest rewind, frame selection), turn watermark detection on or off, add or modify the gamma library and/or look-up table selection, add or modify the XYZ-to-RGB library and/or look-up table selection, load data to the at least one custom decoder LUT, select bypass of one or more of the custom decoder LUT, and/or modify the Ethernet SDP.
- functions for the flash memory player e.g., play, stop, forward, fast forward, rewind, fest rewind, frame selection
- turn watermark detection on or off add or modify the gamma library and/or look-up table selection
- the gamma library preferably takes linear data and applies at least one non-linear function to the linear data.
- the at least non-linear function includes, but is not limited to, at least one standard gamma (e.g., those used in standard dynamic range (SDR) and high definition range (HDR) formats) and/or at least one custom gamma.
- the at least one standard gamma is defined in ITU BT.709 or ITU BT.2100.
- the output of the gamma library is fed to the XYZ-to-RGB library, where tables are included to map the XYZ data to a standard RGB or YCbCr output format.
- the output of the gamma library bypasses the XYZ-to-RGB library. This bypass leaves an output of XYZ data with a gamma applied.
- the selection of the XYZ-to-RGB library or bypass is determined by the configuration CPU. If the output format selected is YCbCr, then the XYZ-to-RGB library flags which sampling method is desired and provides that selection to the sampling selector.
- the sampling selector then formats the YCbCr data to a 4:2:2, 4:2:0, or 4: 1 : 1 sampling structure.
- an input to the decoder does not include full pixel sampling (e.g., 4:2:2, 4:2:0, 4: 1 : 1).
- the at least one sampling converter is operable to take subsampled images and convert the subsampled images to full 4:4:4 sampling.
- the 4:4:4 Yxy image data is then converted to XYZ using the at least one Yxy-to-XYZ converter.
- the 4:4:4 Yu'v* image data is then converted to XYZ using the Yu'v' using the at least one Yu'v'-to-XYZ converter.
- Image data is then converted from a parallel form to a serial stream.
- the metadata reader is operable to read Extended Display Identification Data (EDID) (e.g., for HDMI inputs), SDP parameters (SMPTE ST 2110), payload ID, and/or ancillary' information (e.g., vertical ancillary data (VANC)).
- EDID Extended Display Identification Data
- SDP parameters SMPTE ST 2110
- payload ID e.g., payload ID
- ancillary' information e.g., vertical ancillary data (VANC)
- the decoder configuration CPU is operable to process data from the metadata reader. Further, the decoder configuration CPU is operable to select particular settings and/or deliver selected data to the decoder metadata formatter.
- the decoder metadata formatter is operable to take information from the decoder configuration CPU and arrange the information to be reinserted into the output of the process. In one embodiment, each decoder output formatter then takes this formatted data and times it to be used in the serial stream.
- the at least one SDI output includes more than one SDI output.
- this allows for output over multiple links (e.g., System 3).
- the at least one SDI output includes a first SDI output and a second SDI output.
- the first SDI output is used to transport a first set of color channel data (e.g., RGB) and the second SDI output is used to transport a second set of color channel data (e.g., CMY).
- the watermark detection engine detects the digital watermark.
- a pattern of the digital watermark is loaded to the decoder using the operations programming port.
- the decoder configuration CPU is operable to turn the watermark detection engine on and off.
- the watermark subtraction engine removes the digital watermark from image data before formatting for display on the at least one viewing device.
- the decoder configuration CPU is operable to allow bypass of the watermark subtraction engine, which will leave the digital watermark on an output image.
- the decoder requires the digital watermark in the processed image data sent from the encoder to provide the at least one decoder output.
- the decoder does not send color channel data to the at least one viewing device if the digital watermark is not present in the processed image data.
- the decoder is operable to provide the at least one decoder output without the digital watermark in the processed image data sent from the encoder. If the digital watermark is not present in the processed image data, an image displayed on the at least one viewing device preferably includes a visible watermark.
- output from the watermark subtraction process includes data including a non-linearity (e.g., Vi DRR).
- Non-linear data is converted back to linear data using an inverse non-linear transfer fimction (e.g., NLTF" 1 ) for the Y channel and the xy or u'v' channels.
- NLTF inverse non-linear transfer fimction
- the at least one custom decoder LUT includes a 9-column LUT.
- the 9-column LUT includes 3 columns for a legacy RGB output (e.g., Rec. 709, Rec. 2020, P3) and 6 columns for a 6P multi-primary display (e.g., RGBCMY). Other numbers of columns (e.g., 7 columns) and alternative multi-primary displays (e.g., RGBC) are compatible with the present invention.
- the at least one custom decoder LUT e.g., the 9-column LUT
- tetrahedral interpolation uses a smaller volume of color space to determine the output values, resulting in more accurate color channel data.
- each of the tetrahedrons used in the tetrahedral interpolation includes a neutral diagonal.
- this embodiment works even with having less than 6 color channels.
- a 4P output e.g., RGBC
- a 5P output e.g., RGBCY
- this embodiment allows for an encoder to produce legacy RGB output in addition to multiprimary output.
- the at least one custom decoder LUT is operable to produce output value using cubic interpolation.
- the at least one custom decoder LUT is preferably operable to accept linear XYZ data.
- the at least one custom decoder LUT is a multi-column LUT.
- the at least one custom decoder LUT is preferably operable to be loaded through the operations programming port. If no LUT is required, the decoder configuration CPU is operable to bypass the at least one custom decoder LUT.
- the at least one custom decoder LUT is operable to be used for streamlined HDMT transport.
- the at least one custom decoder LUT is a 3D LUT.
- the at least one custom decoder LUT is operable to take in a 3-column input (e.g., RGB, XYZ) and produce an output of greater than three columns (e.g., RGBC, RGBCY, RGBCMY).
- RGBC 3-column input
- RGBCY RGBCY
- RGBCMY RGBCY
- this system only requires 3 channels of data as the input to the at least one custom decoder LUT.
- the at least one custom decoder LUT applies a non-linear fimction (e.g., inverse gamma) and/or a curve to produce a linear output.
- the at least one custom decoder LUT is a trimming LUT.
- the at least one decoder formatter is operable to organize a serial stream as a proper format for the at least one output.
- the decoder includes a corresponding decoder formatter for each of the at least one decoder output.
- the decoder includes at least one HDMI output in the at least one decoder output, the decoder also includes at least one HDMI formatter in the at least one decoder formatter; if the decoder includes at least one SDI output in the at least one decoder output, the decoder also includes at least one SDI formatter in the at least one decoder formatter; if the decoder includes at least one Ethernet output in the at least one decoder output, the decoder also includes at least one Ethernet formatter in the at least one decoder formatter; and so forth.
- the encoder and/or the decoder are operable to generate, insert, and/or recover metadata related to an image signal.
- the metadata includes, but is not limited to, a color space (e.g., 6P-B, 6P-C), an image transfer function (e.g., DRR, gamma, PQ, HLG, 1/2 DRR), a peak white value, a white point (e.g., D65, D60, DCI), an image signal range (e.g., narrow (SMPTE) or full), sampling structure (e.g., 4:4:4, 4:2:2, 4:2:0, 4:1:1), bit depth, (e.g., 8, 10, 12, 16), and/or a signal format (e.g., RGB, Yxy, Yu'v', multi-primary (e.g., RGBCMY, RGBC)).
- a color space e.g., 6P-B, 6P-C
- an image transfer function e.g., DRR,
- the metadata is inserted into SDI or ST2110 using ancillary (ANC) data packets.
- the metadata is inserted using Vendor Specific InfoFrame (VSIF) data as part of the CTA 861 standard.
- the metadata is compatible with SMPTE ST 2110-10:2017, SMPTE ST 2110-20:2017, SMPTE ST 2110- 40:2018, SMPTE ST 352:2013, and/or SMPTE ST 352:2011, each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
- the present invention provides a display engine operable to interact with a graphics processing unit (GPU) and provide Yxy, XYZ, YUV, Yu'v', RGB, YCrCb, and/or ICiCp configured outputs.
- the display engine and the GPU are on a video card.
- the display engine and the GPU are embedded on a motherboard or a central processing unit (CPU) die.
- the display engine and the GPU are preferably included in and/or connected to at least one viewing device (e.g., display, video game console, smartphone, etc.). Additional information related to GPUs are disclosed in U.S. Patent Nos.
- the GPU includes a render engine.
- the render engine includes at least one render pipeline (RP), a programmable pixel shader, a programmable vector shader, a vector array processor, a curvature engine, and/or a memory cache.
- the render engine is operable to interact with a memory controller interface, a command CPU, a host bus (e.g., peripheral component interconnect (PCI), PCI Express (PCIe), accelerated graphics port (AGP)), and/or an adaptive foil frame anti-aliasing.
- the memory controller interface is operable to interact with a display memory (e.g., double data rate (DDR) memory), a pixel cache, the command CPU, the host bus, and a display engine.
- the command CPU is operable to exchange data with the display engine.
- DDR double data rate
- FIG. 33 illustrates one embodiment of a display engine operable to interact with a graphics processing unit (GPU) according to the present invention.
- tire display engine operable to interact with the GPU is included on a video card.
- the video card is operable to interface with a computer.
- the video card is operable to be inserted into a connector (e.g., PCIe connector, PCI connector, accelerated graphics port (AGP) connector, etc.) located within a computer.
- the computer includes a command central processing unit (CPU).
- the command CPU is dedicated to communication between the video card and the computer core.
- the command CPU is preferably operable to input instractions from an application programming interface (API).
- API application programming interface
- the command CPU is further operable to distribute appropriate commands to components in the video card.
- the video card further includes a memory controller interface.
- the memory controller interface is preferably a bus including hardware operable to manage which data is allowed on the bus and where the data is routed.
- the video card includes a plurality of video cards linked together to allow scaling of graphics processing.
- the plurality of video cards is linked with a PCIe connector. Other connectors are compatible with the plurality of video cards.
- each of the plurality of video cards has the same technical specifications.
- the API includes methods for scaling the graphics processing, and the command CPU is operable to distribute the graphics processing across the plurality of video cards.
- the command CPU is operable to scale up the graphics processing as well as scale down the graphics processing based on processing demands and/or power demands of the system.
- the display engine is operable to take rendered data from the GPU and convert the rendered data to a format operable to be displayed on at least one viewing device.
- the display engine includes a raster scaler, at least one video display controller (e.g., XYZ video display controller, RGB video display controller, ICrCp video display controller), a color channel-to-XYZ converter, a linear converter, a scaler and/or limiter, a multi-column LUT with at least three columns (e.g., three-dimensional (3D) LUT (e.g., 129 3 LUT)), an XYZ-to- Yxy converter, an XYZ-to-Yu'v' converter, a non-linear function and/or tone curve applicator (e.g., */i DRR), a sampling selector, a video bus, and/or at least one output formatter and/or encoder (e.g., ST 2082, ST 2110, DisplayPort, HDMI).
- the color channel-to-XYZ converter includes an RGB-to-XYZ converter. Additionally or alternatively, the color channel-to-XYZ converter includes a Yu'v'-to-XYZ converter, an IC T Cp-to-XYZ converter and/or an ACES-to-XYZ converter.
- the video bus is operable to receive input from a graphics display controller and/or at least one input device (e.g., a cursor, a mouse, a joystick, a keyboard, a videogame controller, etc.).
- the video card is operable to connect through any number of lanes provided by hardware on the computer.
- the video card is operable to communicate through a communication interface including, but not limited to, a PCIe Physical Layer (PHY) interface.
- the communication interface is an API supported by the computer (e.g., OpenGL, Direct3D, OpenCL, Vulkan).
- Image data in the form of vector data or bitmap data is output from the communication interface into the command CPU.
- the communication interface is operable to notify the command CPU when image data is available.
- the command CPU opens the bus bidirectional gate and instructs the memory' controller interface to transmit the image data to a double data rate (DDR) memory.
- the memory controller interface is operable to open a path from the DDR memory to allow the image data to pass to the GPU for rendering. After rendering, the image data is channeled back to the DDR for storage pending output processing by the display engine.
- DDR double data rate
- the command CPU instructs the memory controller interface to allow rendered image data to load into the raster scaler.
- the command CPU loads the raster scaler with framing information.
- the foaming information includes, but is not limited to, a start of file (SOF) identifier, an end of file (EOF) identifier, a pixel count, a pixel order, multi-primary data (e.g., RGBCMY data), and/or a frame rate.
- the framing information includes HDMI and/or Display Port (e.g., CTA 861 format) information.
- EDID Extended Display Identification Data
- the raster scaler provides output as image data formatted as a raster in the same format as the file being read (e.g., RGB, XYZ, Yxy, Yu'v').
- the output of the raster scaler is RGB data, XYZ data, or Yxy data.
- the output of the raster scaler is Yu'v' data, IC T C p data, or ACES data.
- the output of the raster scaler is sent to a graphics display controller.
- the graphics display controller is operable to provide display information for a graphical user interface (GUI).
- GUI graphical user interface
- the RGB video controller and the XYZ video controller block image data from entering the video bus.
- Raster data includes, but is not limited to, synchronization data, an SOF, an EOF, a frame rate, a pixel order, multi-primary data (e.g., RGBCMY data), and/or a pixel count.
- the raster data is limited to an RGB output that is operable to be transmitted to the at least one output formatter and/or encoder.
- a separate path is included.
- the separate path is operable to provide outputs including, but not limited to, SMPTE SDI, Ethernet, DisplayPort, and/or HDMI to the at least one output formatter and/or encoder.
- the at least one video display controller e.g., RGB video display controller
- the at least one video display controller is operable to limit and/or optimize video data for streaming and/or compression.
- the RGB video display controller and the XYZ video display controller block image data from entering the video bus.
- image data is provided by the raster scaler in the format provided by the file being played (e.g., RGB, multi-primary (e.g., RGBCMY), XYZ, Yxy, Yu'v').
- the raster scaler presets the XYZ video display controller as the format provided and contained within the raster size to be displayed.
- non-linear information e.g., OOTF
- sent from the API through the command CPU is sent to the linear converter.
- the linear converter is operable to use the non-linear information.
- the linear converter develops an EOTF map to linearize input data (e.g., when EOTF data is available). In one embodiment, the linear converter uses an EOTF when already available.
- the XYZ video display controller passes the image data in its native format (e.g., RGB, multi-primary data (e.g., RGBCMY), XYZ, Yxy, Yu'v'), but without a non-linearity applied to the luminance (e.g., Y) component.
- the color channel -to-XYZ converter is operable to accept a native format (e.g., RGB, multi-primary data (e.g., RGBCMY), XYZ, Yxy, Yu'v') and convert to an XYZ format.
- the XYZ format includes at least one chromatic adaptation (e.g., D60 to D65).
- the XYZ video display controller uses data supplied from the command CPU, which obtains color gamut and white point specifications from the API to convert to an XYZ output.
- a corresponding matrix or a look-up table is used to convert from the multi-primary system to XYZ.
- the multi-primary system is RGBCMY (e.g., 6P-B, 6P-C, S6Pa, S6Pb).
- the color channel-to-XYZ converter formats the Yxy data back to XYZ data.
- the color channel-to-XYZ converter formats the Yu'v' data back to XYZ data.
- the color channel-to-XYZ converter is bypassed.
- the color channel-to-XYZ converter is bypassed if there is a requirement to stay within a multi-primary system. Additionally, the color channel-to-XYZ converter is bypassed for XYZ data.
- the input to the scaler and/or limiter is XYZ data or multiprimary data.
- the multi-primary data includes, but is not limited to, RGBCMY (e.g., 6P-B, 6P-C, S6Pa, S6Pb), RGBC, RG1G2B, RGBCW, RGBCY, RG1G2BW, RGBWRWGWB, or R1R2G1G2B1B2.
- Other multi-primary data formats are compatible with the present invention.
- the scaler and/or limiter is operable to map out of gamut values (e.g., negative values) to in gamut values (e.g., out of gamut values developed in the process to convert to XYZ).
- the scaler and/or limiter uses a gamut mapping algorithm to map out of gamut values to in gamut values.
- the input to the scaler and/or limiter is multi-primary data and all channels are optimized to have values between 0 and 1. For example, if the input is RGBCMY data, all six channels are optimized to have values between 0 and 1.
- the output of the scaler and/or limiter is operable to be placed into a three- dimensional (3-D) multi-column LUT.
- the 3-D multi-column LUT includes one column for each channel. For example, if the output is RGBCMY data, the 3-D multi-column LUT includes six columns (i.e., one for each channel).
- each channel is operable to be selected to balance out the white point and/or shade the image toward one particular color channel.
- the 3-D multi- column LUT is bypassed if the output of the scaler and/or limiter is XYZ data.
- the output of the 3-D multi-column LUT is sent to the XYZ-to-Yxy converter, where a simple summation process is used to make the conversion.
- the output of the 3-D multi-column LUT is sent to the XYZ-to-Yu'v' converter.
- any tone curve is operable to be added to the luminance (e.g., Y).
- luminance e.g., Y
- L*a*b* has a 1/3 gamma applied to all three channels. 1PT and IC T C p operate with a gamma in all three channels.
- the tone curve is operable to be added to the luminance (e.g., Y) only, with the colorimetric coordinates (e.g., x and y channels, u* and v* channels) remaining linear.
- the tone curve is operable to be anything (e.g., a non-linear function), including standard values currently used.
- the tone curve is an EOTF (e.g., those described for television and/or digital cinema). Additionally or alternatively, the tone curve includes HDR modifications.
- a non-linear transfer function is added to all three channels (e.g., Yxy or Yu'v').
- the output is handled through this process as three to six individual components (e.g., three components for Yxy, Yu'v', or XYZ, six components for RGBCMY, etc.). Alternative number of primaries and components are compatible with the present invention. However, in some serial formats, this level of payload is too large.
- the sampling selector sets a sampling structure (e.g., 4:4:4, 4:2:2, 4:2:0, 4: 1 : 1).
- the sampling selector is operable to subsample processed image data.
- the sampling selector is preferably controlled by the command CPU.
- the command CPU gets its information from the API and/or the display EDID.
- the sampling selector also places each component in the correct serial data position as shown in Table 11 (supra).
- the output is RGBCMY.
- the RGBCMY output is configured as 4:4:4:4:4:4 data.
- the format to the at least one viewing device includes, but is not limited to, SMPTE ST2082 (e.g., 3, 6, and 12G serial data output), SMPTE ST2110 (e.g., to move through ethemet), and/or CTA 861 (e.g., DisplayPort, HDMI).
- the video card preferably has the appropriate connectors (e.g., DisplayPort, HDMI) for distribution through any external system (e.g., computer) and connection to at least one viewing device (e.g., monitor, television, etc.).
- the at least one viewing device includes, but is not limited to, a smartphone, a tablet, a laptop screen, a light emitting diode (LED) display, an organic light emitting diode (OLED) display, a miniLED display, a microLED display, a liquid crystal display (LCD), a quantum dot display, a quantum nano emitting diode (QNED) device, a personal gaming device, a virtual reality (VR) device and/or an augmented reality (AR) device, an LED wall, a wearable display, and at least one projector.
- the at least one viewing device is a single viewing device.
- FIG. 34 illustrates one embodiment of a process flow diagram to convert an image for display.
- An image from an image source undergoes linear conversion and/or scaling (e.g., 0 to 1 scaling) to produce a processed image.
- the processed image undergoes RGB to XYZ conversion and XYZ to Yxy conversion.
- the processed image undergoes XYZ to Yu'v' conversion.
- At least one non-linear transfer function (NLTF) e.g., Yi DRR
- Y luminance
- Y 1 luma
- the x and y colorimetric coordinates are scaled and then have the at least one NLTF applied.
- the u' and v' colorimetric coordinates are scaled and then have the at least one NLTF applied.
- the colorimetric coordinates (x and y, u' and v') are folly sampled or subsampled.
- the luma and the colorimetric coordinates (e.g., folly sampled, subsampled) are formatted with an output formatter (e.g., ST 2082, ST 2110, DisplayPort, HDMI) before signal transport, thereby creating formatted luma and colorimetric coordinates.
- an output formatter e.g., ST 2082, ST 2110, DisplayPort, HDMI
- the formatted luma and colorimetric coordinates are decoded by using an inverse of the at least one function (e.g., inverse Vi DRR), rescaling of the colorimetric coordinates (x and y, u' and v'), and sampling reconstruction, thereby creating decoded image data.
- the decoded image data undergoes Yxy to XYZ conversion or Yu'v' to XYZ conversion and XYZ to gamut (e.g., RGB, ITU-R BT.709, SMPTE RP431, ITU-R BT.2020, ACES, custom, multi-primary) conversion before a gamma function is applied, thereby creating image data.
- gamut e.g., RGB, ITU-R BT.709, SMPTE RP431, ITU-R BT.2020, ACES, custom, multi-primary
- the image data is operable to be sent to a display (e.g., operable to display the gamut). In one embodiment, the image data undergoes further processing in the display.
- the top of the diagram shows the process that typically resides in the camera or image generator.
- the bottom of the diagram shows the decode process typically located in the display.
- the image is acquired from a camera or generated from an electronic source. Typically, a gamma has been applied and needs to be removed to provide a linear image. After the linear image is acquired, the linear image is scaled to values between 0 and 1. this allows scaling to a desired brightness on the display.
- the source is operable to detail information related to the image including, but not limited to, a color gamut of the device and/or a white point used in acquisition.
- an accurate XYZ conversion is possible.
- the image is coded as XYZ, it is operable to be converted to Yxy.
- the components are operable to be split into a Y path and an xy path or a Y path and a u'v' path.
- a non-linearity e.g., DRR
- the non-linearity e.g., DRR
- the xy or u'v' components are operable to be subsampled, if required, e.g., to fit into the application without loss of luminance information.
- the Y channel preferably has an inverse non-linearity (e.g., inverse DRR) applied to restore the Y channel to linear space.
- the xy or u'v' channels preferably have the inverse non-linearity (e.g., inverse DRR) applied to restore the image data (i.e., Yxy, Yu'v') to linear space and then re-scaled to their original values.
- the xy or u'v' channels are brought back to full sub-pixel sampling.
- XYZ is operable to converted to the display gamut (e.g., RGB). Because a linear image is used, any gamma is operable to be applied by the display. This advantageously puts the limit of the image not in the signal, but at the maximum performance of the display.
- images are operable to match between displays with different gammas, gamuts, and/or primaries (e.g., multi-primary). Colorimetric information and luminance are presented as linear values. Any white point, gamma, and/or gamut is operable to be defined, e.g., as a scene referred set of values or as a display referred set. Furthermore, dissimilar displays are operable to be connected and set to match if the image parameters fall within the limitations of the display. Advantageously, this allows accurate comparison without conversion. [00367] In any system, the settings of the camera and the capabilities of the display are known. Current methods take an acquired image and confirm it to an assumed display specification.
- the system is operable to be divided into simpler parts for explanation: (1) camera/acquisition, (2) files and storage, (3) transmission, and (4) display.
- Most professional cameras have documentation describing the color gamut that is possible, the OETF used by the camera, and/or a white point to which the camera was balanced. In an RGB system, these parameters must be tracked and modified throughout the workflow.
- these conversions are enabled by the camera as part of the encode process because image parameters are known at the time of acquisition.
- the Yxy or Yu'v' system has the intrinsic colorimetric and luminance information without having to cany along additional image metadata.
- the conversions are operable to be accomplished outside the camera in a dedicated encoder (e.g., hardware) or image processing (e.g., software) in a post-production application.
- FIG. 35 illustrates one embodiment of a camera process flow.
- An image sensor e.g., RGB sensor
- the image data is processed by the camera (e.g., via a camera manufacturer's proprietary process), thereby creating processed camera data.
- the image data or the camera data undergoes linear conversion and/or scaling (e.g., 0 to 1 scaling) to produce a processed image.
- the processed image undergoes conversion from an acquisition gamut (e.g., RGB) to Yxy or Yu'v 1 .
- a non-linear transfer function (e.g., DRR) is applied to Y (e.g., to create luma) and xy.
- an NLTF e.g., DRR
- the luma and the colorimetric coordinates are formatted with an output formatter (e.g., ST 2082, ST 2110, DisplayPort, HDMI) to provide output data.
- the output data is transmitted to a display and/or a decoder.
- the example shown in FIG. 35 uses Yxy or Yu'v* data, the system is operable to be used with a plurality of formats.
- Images are acquired in a specific process designed by a camera manufacturer. Instead of using RAW output format, the process starts with the conversion of the RGB channels to a linear (e.g., 16 -bit) data format, wherein the RGB data is normalized to 1.
- this linear image is then converted from RGB to XYZ (e.g., via a conversion matrix) and then processed to produce the Yxy or Y u'v' data stream.
- Y continues as a folly sampled value, but xy or u'v' are operable to be subsampled (e.g., 4:2:2, 4:2:0).
- a DRR value is applied to Yxy or Yu'v' and scaled x and y or u' and v' values prior to being sent as a serial data stream or is stored in a suitable file container.
- the biggest advantage that the Yxy or Yu'v' system provides is the ability to send one signal format to any display and achieve an accurate image.
- the signal includes all image information, which allows for the display design to be optimized for best performance. Issues (e.g., panel, backlight accuracy) are operable to be adjusted to the conformed image gamut and luminance based on the Yxy or Yu'v' data.
- Prior art displays use a specific gamut.
- the specific gamut is an RGB gamut (e.g., Rec. 2020, P3, Rec. 709). Comparing different displays using a Yxy or Yu'v' input offers a significant advantage. Images displayed on a BT.709 monitor matches a P3 monitor and a BT.2020 monitor for all colors that fell within a gamut of the BT.709 monitor. Colors outside that gamut are controlled by the individual monitor optimized for that device. Images with gamuts felling within the P3 color space will match on the P3 monitor and the BT.2020 monitor until the image gamut exceeds the capability of tire P3 monitor.
- RGB gamut e.g. 2020, P3, Rec. 709
- FIG. 36 illustrates one embodiment of a display process flow.
- a Yxy or Yu'v 1 signal is input as a digital signal.
- the digital signal undergoes equalization.
- the formatted luma and colorimetric coordinates are decoded by using an inverse of at least one non-linear function (e.g., inverse 14 DRR), thereby creating decoded image data.
- the decoded image data undergoes Yxy to XYZ or Yu'v' or XYZ conversion to create XYZ data.
- the XYZ data is operable to converted to a gamut (e.g., RGB, ITU-R BT.709, SMPTE RP431, ITU-R BT.2020, ACES, custom, multiprimary) using an XYZ to gamut library', thereby creating gamut data.
- a gamma library is operable to apply at least one function (e.g., linear, 2.2, 2.35, 2.4, 2.6 gamma functions, HLG, PQ, custom) to the gamut data.
- the gamut data (e.g., with or without the at least one function applied) undergoes a calibration process (e.g., using a LUT) before being transmitted to a display panel and/or modulator.
- FIG. 36 illustrates a Yxy or Yu'v' signal
- the system is compatible with a plurality of data formats.
- Most image file formats are based on storing the RGB data, and typically only accommodate three sets of data.
- the Yxy or Yu'v' implementation only requires three sets of data, which simplifies substitutions into any file format.
- RGB system uses information obtained from the camera and builds a replicating electrical representation formatted within signal. This means that each signal fed to a process or display must be formatted or reformatted to be viewed correctly. Yxy or Yu'v' redefine this and advantageously move the formatting into the acquiring device and the display, leaving a consistent signal available for differing devices. Connection in the system is simplified as connections and display setup are agnostic to the signal format.
- payload ID identifies Yxy or Yu'v' at Byte 4 as shown in FIG. 37.
- FIG. 38A illustrates one embodiment of payload ID per SMPTE ST352:2013 and ST292:2018.
- FIG. 38B illustrates one embodiment of payload ID per SMPTE ST352:2013 and ST372:2017.
- FIG. 38C illustrates one embodiment of payload ID per SMPTE ST352:2013 and ST425:2017.
- FIG. 39 illustrates one embodiment of a System 4 Yxy 10-bit 4:2:2 encode as applied to SMPTE ST292 (e.g., SMPTE ST292-L2018).
- SMPTE ST292 e.g., SMPTE ST292-L2018.
- FIGS. 40A-40B illustrate one embodiment of a System 4 Yxy 10-bit 4:4:4 YCBCR encode as applied to SMPTE ST372 (e.g., SMPTE ST372:2017).
- the encode utilizes a first link (e.g., Link A) and a second link (e.g., Link B).
- FIG. 40A illustrates one embodiment of a first link for a System 4 Yxy 10-bit 4:4:4 YCBCR encode as applied to SMPTE ST372.
- FIG. 40B illustrates one embodiment of a second link for a System 4 Yxy 10-bit 4:4:4 YCBCR encode as applied to SMPTE ST372.
- FIGS. 41A-41B illustrate one embodiment of a System 4 10-bit 4:4:4 Yxy RGB encode as applied to SMPTE ST372 (e.g., SMPTE ST372:2017).
- the encode utilizes a first link (e.g., Link A) and a second link (e.g., Link B).
- FIG. 41A illustrates one embodiment of a first link for a System 4 Yxy 10-bit 4:4:4 RGB encode as applied to SMPTE ST372.
- FIG. 41B illustrates one embodiment of a second link for a System 4 Yxy 10-bit 4:4:4 RGB encode as applied to SMPTE ST372.
- FIGS. 42A-42B illustrate one embodiment of a System 4 12-bit 4:4:4 Yxy YCBCR encode as applied to SMPTE ST372 (e.g., SMPTE ST372:2017).
- the encode utilizes a first link (e.g., Link A) and a second link (e.g., Link B).
- FIG. 42A illustrates one embodiment of a first link for a System 4 Yxy 12-bit 4:4:4 YCBCR encode as applied to SMPTE ST372.
- FIG. 42B illustrates one embodiment of a second link for a System 4 Yxy 12-bit 4:4:4 YCBCR encode as applied to SMPTE ST372.
- FIGS. 43A-43B illustrate one embodiment of a System 4 12-bit 4:4:4 Yxy RGB encode as applied to SMPTE ST372 (e.g., SMPTE ST372:2017).
- the encode utilizes a first link (e.g., Link A) and a second link (e.g., Link B).
- FIG. 43A illustrates one embodiment of a first link for a System 4 Yxy 12-bit 4:4:4 RGB encode as applied to SMPTE ST372.
- FIG. 43B illustrates one embodiment of a second link for a System 4 Yxy 12-bit 4:4:4 RGB encode as applied to SMPTE ST372.
- FIGS. 44A-44B illustrate one embodiment of a System 4 10-bit 4:2:2 Yxy Level A encode as applied to SMPTE ST425 (e.g., SMPTE ST425-1 :2017) (“Mapping Structure 1”).
- FIG. 44A illustrates one embodiment of a first data stream for a System 4 Yxy 10-bit 4:2:2 Level A encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
- FIG. 44B illustrates one embodiment of a second data stream for a System 4 Yxy 10-bit 4:2:2 Level A encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
- FIGS. 45A-45B illustrate one embodiment of a System 4 10-bit 4:4:4 Yxy Level A encode as applied to SMPTE ST425 (e.g., SMPTE ST425-1 :2017) (“Mapping Structure 2”).
- FIG. 45 A illustrates one embodiment of a first data stream for a System 4 Yxy 10-bit 4:4:4 Level A encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
- FIG. 45B illustrates one embodiment of a second data stream for a System 4 Yxy 10-bit 4:4:4 Level A encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
- FIGS. 46A-46B illustrate one embodiment of a System 4 Yxy 12-bit 4:4:4 Level A encode as applied to SMPTE ST425 (e.g., SMPTE ST425-L2017) (“Mapping Structure 3”).
- FIG. 46A illustrates one embodiment of a first data stream for a System 4 Yxy 12-bit 4:4:4 Level A encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
- FIG. 46B illustrates one embodiment of a second data stream for a System 4 Yxy 12-bit 4:4:4 Level A encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
- FIGS. 47A-47B illustrate one embodiment of a System 4 12-bit 4:2:2 Yxy Level A encode as applied to SMPTE ST425 (e.g., SMPTE ST425-L2017) (“Mapping Structure 4”).
- FIG. 47A illustrates one embodiment of a first data stream for a System 4 Yxy 12-bit 4:2:2 Level A encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
- FIG. 47B illustrates one embodiment of a second data stream for a System 4 Yxy 12-bit 4:2:2 Level A encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
- FIGS. 48A-48B illustrate one embodiment of a System 4 Yxy Level B Multiplex Dual Stream (DS) encode as applied to SMPTE ST425 (e.g., SMPTE ST425-L2017).
- FIG. 48A illustrates one embodiment of a first data stream for a System 4 Yxy Level B Multiplex Dual Stream (DS) encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
- FIG. 48B illustrates one embodiment of a second data stream for a System 4 Yxy Level B Multiplex Dual Stream (DS) encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
- FIGS. 49A-49B illustrate one embodiment of a System 4 Yxy 10-bit Level B
- FIG. 49 A illustrates one embodiment of a first data link for a System 4 Yxy 10-bit Level B Multiplex Dual Link (DL) encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
- FIG. 49B illustrates one embodiment of a second data link for a System 4 Yxy 10-bit Level B Multiplex Dual Link (DL) encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
- FIGS. 50A-50B illustrate one embodiment of a System 4 Yxy 12-bit Level B Multiplex Dual Link (DL) encode as applied to SMPTE ST425 (e.g., SMPTE ST425- 1:2017).
- FIG. 50A illustrates one embodiment of a first data link for a System 4 Yxy 12-bit Level B Multiplex Dual Link (DL) encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
- FIG. SOB illustrates one embodiment of a second data link for a System 4 Yxy 12-bit Level B Multiplex Dual Link (DL) encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
- the formatting is compatible with SMPTE ST2022-6 (2012).
- SMPTE ST2022 does not describe any modifications to mapping, so mapping to Ethernet simply follows the appropriate SDI standard.
- map code 0x00 uses Level A direct mapping from SMPTE ST292 or SMPTE ST425.
- map code 0x01 uses Level B direct mapping formatted as SMPTE ST372 DL.
- map code 0x02 uses Level B direct mapping formatted as SMPTE ST292 DS.
- FIG. 51 is a table illustrating modification of SMPTE ST2036-1 (2014) parameters to include System 4 (e.g., Yxy, Yu'v').
- Table 13 illustrates construction of 4:4:4 pgroups.
- Table 14 illustrates construction of 4:2:2 pgroups.
- Table 15 illustrates construction of 4:2:0 pgroups.
- SDP parameters are defined using SMPTE ST2110-20 (2017).
- a Yxy or YuV system uses CIE S 014-3:2011 as a colorimetry standard.
- Table 16 illustrates one embodiment of SDP colorimetry flag modification.
- FIG. 52 is a table illustrating modification of CTA 861 Table 6 - Colorimetry Transfer Characteristics to include System 4 (e.g., Yxy, Yu'v').
- CTA 861 standards conform to CTA 861-H (2021), which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
- FIG. 53 A is a table for Yxy 8-bit 4:2:2 encoding with 4 lanes.
- FIG. 53B is a table for Yxy 8-bit 4:2:2 encoding with 2 lanes.
- FIG. 53C is a table for Yxy 8-bit 4:2:2 encoding with 1 lane.
- FIG. 54A is a table for Yxy 10-bit 4:2:2 encoding with 4 lanes.
- FIG. 54B is a table for Yxy 10-bit 4:2:2 encoding with 2 lanes.
- FIG. 54C is a table for Yxy 10-bit 4:2:2 encoding with 1 lane.
- FIG. 55A is a table for Yxy 12-bit 4:2:2 encoding with 4 lanes.
- FIG. 55B is a table for Yxy 12-bit 4:2:2 encoding with 2 lanes.
- FIG. 55C is a table for Yxy 12-bit 4:2:2 encoding with 1 lane.
- FIG. 56A is a table for Yxy 16-bit 4:2:2 encoding with 4 lanes.
- FIG. 56B is a table for Yxy 16-bit 4:2:2 encoding with 2 lanes.
- FIG. 56C is a table for Yxy 16-bit 4:2:2 encoding with 1 lane.
- FIG. 57A is a table for Yxy 10-bit 4:4:4 encoding with 4 lanes.
- FIG. 57B is a table for Yxy 10-bit 4:4:4 encoding with 2 lanes.
- FIG. 57C is a table for Yxy 10-bit 4:4:4 encoding with 1 lane.
- FIG. 58A is a table for Yxy 12-bit 4:4:4 encoding with 4 lanes.
- FIG. 58B is a table for Yxy- 12-bit 4:4:4 encoding with 2 lanes.
- FIG. 58C is a table for Yxy 12-bit 4:4:4 encoding with 1 lane.
- FIG. 59A is a table for Yxy 16-bit 4:4:4 encoding with 4 lanes.
- FIG. 59B is a table for Yxy 16-bit 4:4:4 encoding with 2 lanes.
- FIG. 59C is a table for Yxy 16-bit 4:4:4 encoding with 1 lane.
- the identification of a Yxy or Yu'v' formatted connection is preferably provided in the auxiliary video information (AVI) (e.g., for CTA 861).
- AVI auxiliary video information
- the AVI is provided according to InfoFrame version 4 as shown in FIG. 60. Additional information is available in ANS1/CTA-861-H-2021, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. See, e.g., ANSI/CTA-861-H-2021 Section 6.2.
- location of the identification is in data byte 14 (e.g., ACE3, ACE2, ACEl, ACEO).
- Table 17 illustrates values for data byte 2.
- Table 18 illustrates values for data byte 3.
- Table 19 illustrates values for data byte 14. [00413] TABLE 17
- SDP is derived flora IETF RFC 4566 which sets parameters including, but not limited to, bit depth and sampling parameters.
- IETF RFC 4566 (2006) is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
- SDP parameters are contained within the RTP payload.
- SDP parameters are contained within the media format and transport protocol. This payload information is transmitted as text. Therefore, modifications for the additional sampling identifiers requires the addition of new parameters for the sampling statement.
- SDP parameters include, but are not limited to, color channel data, image data, framerate data, a sampling standard, a flag indicator, an active picture size code, a timestamp, a clock frequency, a frame count, a scrambling indicator, and/or a video format indicator.
- the additional parameters include, but are not limited to, RGBCMY-4:4:4, YBRCY-4:2:2, and YBRCY -4:2:0.
- tire additional parameters include, but are not limited to, CLYBRCY-4:2:2 and CLYBRCY-4:2:0.
- 6PB 1 defines 6P with a color gamut limited to ITU-R BT.709 formatted as System 1
- 6PB2 defines 6P with a color gamut limited to ITU-R BT.709 formatted as System 2
- 6PB3 defines 6P with a color gamut limited to ITU-R BT.709 formatted as System 3
- 6 PC I defines 6P with a color gamut limited to SMPTE RP 431-2 formatted as System 1
- 6PC2 defines 6P with a color gamut limited to SMPTE RP 431-2 formatted as System 2
- 6PC3 defines 6P with a color gamut limited to SMPTE RP 431-2 formatted as System 3
- 6PS 1 defines 6P with a color gamut as Super 6P formatted as System 1
- 6PS2 defines 6P with a color gamut as Super 6P formatted as System 2
- 6PS3 defines 6P with a color gamut as Super 6P formatted as System 3.
- Colorimetry is also operable to be defined between a six-primary color system using the ITU-R BT.709-6 standard and the SMPTE ST431-2 standard, or colorimetry is operable to be left defined as is standard for the desired standard.
- the six-primary color system is integrated with a Consumer Technology Association (CTA) 861-based system.
- CTA-861 establishes protocols, requirements, and recommendations for the utilization of uncompressed digital interfaces by consumer electronics devices including, but not limited to, digital televisions (DTVs), digital cable, satellite or terrestrial set-top boxes (STBs), and related peripheral devices including, but not limited to, DVD players and/or recorders, and other related Sources or Sinks.
- DTVs digital televisions
- STBs satellite or terrestrial set-top boxes
- peripheral devices including, but not limited to, DVD players and/or recorders, and other related Sources or Sinks.
- TMDS transition- minimized differential signaling
- DVI Digital Visual Interface
- HD MI High-Definition Multimedia Interface
- TMDS is similar to low-voltage differential signaling (LVDS) in that it uses differential signaling to reduce electromagnetic interference (EMI), enabling faster signal transfers with increased accuracy.
- EMI electromagnetic interference
- TMDS uses a twisted pair for noise reduction, rather than a coaxial cable that is conventional for carrying video signals. Similar to LVDS, data is transmitted serially over the data link. When transmitting video data, and using HDMI, three TMDS twisted pairs are used to transfer video data.
- each pixel packet is limited to 8 bits only. For bit depths higher than 8 bits, fragmented packs are used. This arrangement is no different than is already described in the current CTA-861 standard.
- CTA extension Version 3 Based on CTA extension Version 3, identification of a six-primary color transmission is performed by the sink device (e.g., the monitor). Adding recognition of the additional formats is flagged in the CTA Data Block Extended Tag Codes (byte 3). Since codes 33 and above are reserved, any two bits are operable to be used to identify that the format is RGB, RGBCMY, Y Cb Cr, or Y Cb Cr Cc Cy and/or identify System 1 or System 2. Should byte 3 define a six-primary sampling format, and where the block 5 extension identifies byte 1 as 1TU-R BT.709, then logic assigns as 6P-B. However, should byte 4 bit 7 identify colorimetry as DCI-P3, the color gamut is assigned as 6P-C.
- the system alters the Auxiliary Video Information (AVI) Infoframe Data to identify content.
- AVI Infoframe Data is shown in Table 10 of CTA 861-G.
- FIG. 61 illustrates the current RGB sampling structure for 4:4:4 sampling video data transmission.
- video data is sent through three TMDS line pairs.
- FIG. 62 illustrates a six-primary color sampling structure, RGBCMY, using System 1 for 4:4:4 sampling video data transmission.
- the six-primary color sampling structure complies with CTA 861-G, November 2016, Consumer Technology Association, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
- FIG. 63 illustrates an example of System 2 to RGBCMY 4:4:4 transmission.
- FIG. 64 illustrates current Y Cb Cr 4:2:2 sampling transmission as non-constant luminance.
- FIG. 65 illustrates a six-primary color system (System 1) using Y Cr Cb Cc Cy 4:2:2 sampling transmission as non-constant luminance.
- FIG. 66 illustrates an example of a System 2 to Y Cr Cb Cc Cy 4:2:2 Transmission as non-constant luminance.
- the Y Cr Cb Cc Cy 4:2:2 sampling transmission complies with CTA 861-G, November 2016, Consumer Technology Association.
- FIG. 67 illustrates current Y Cb Cr 4:2:0 sampling transmission.
- FIG. 68 illustrates a six-primary color system (System 1) using Y Cr Cb Cc Cy 4:2:0 sampling transmission.
- HDMI sampling systems include Extended Display Identification Data (EDID) metadata.
- EDID metadata describes the capabilities of a display device to a video source.
- the data format is defined by a standard published by the Video Electronics Standards Association (VESA).
- VESA Video Electronics Standards Association
- the EDID data structure includes, but is not limited to, manufacturer name and serial number, product type, phosphor or filter type, timings supported by the display, display size, luminance data, and/or pixel mapping data.
- the EDID data structure is modifiable and modification requires no additional hardware and/or tools.
- EDID information is transmitted between the source device and the display through a display data channel (DDC), which is a collection of digital communication protocols created by VESA.
- DDC display data channel
- EDID providing the display information
- DDC providing the link between the display and the source
- the two accompanying standards enable an information exchange between the display and source.
- VESA has assigned extensions for EDID.
- Such extensions include, but are not limited to, timing extensions (00), additional time data black (CEA EDID Timing Extension (02)), video timing block extensions (VTB-EXT (10)), EDID 2.0 extension (20), display information extension (DI-EXT (40)), localized string extension (LS-EXT (50)), microdisplay interface extension (MI-EXT (60)), display ID extension (70), display transfer characteristics data block (DTCDB (A7, AF, BF)), block map (F0), display device data block (DDDB (FF)), and/or extension defined by monitor manufacturer (FF).
- SDP parameters include data corresponding to a payload identification (ID) and/or EDID information.
- FIG. 69 illustrates a dual stack LCD projection system for a six-primary color system.
- the display is comprised of a dual stack of projectors. This display uses two projectors stacked on top of one another or placed side by side. Each projector is similar, with the only difference being the color filters in each unit. Refresh and pixel timings are synchronized, enabling a mechanical alignment between the two units so that each pixel overlays the same position between projector units.
- the two projectors are Liquid-Crystal Display (LCD) projectors.
- the two projectors are Digital Light Processing (DLP) projectors.
- the two projectors are Liquid-Crystal on Silicon (LCOS) projectors.
- the two projectors are Light-Emitting Diode (LED) projectors.
- the display is comprised of a single projector.
- a single projector six-primary color system requires the addition of a second cross block assembly for the additional colors.
- a single projector e.g., single LCD projector
- FIG. 70 One embodiment of a single projector (e.g., single LCD projector) is shown in FIG. 70.
- a single projector six-primary color system includes a cyan dichroic minor, an orange dichroic minor, a blue dichroic mirror, a red dichroic mirror, and two additional standard mirrors.
- the single projector six-primary color system includes at least six minors.
- the single projector six-primary color system includes at least two cross block assembly units.
- FIG. 71 illustrates a six-primary color system using a single projector and reciprocal minors.
- the display is comprised of a single projector unit working in combination with at first set of at least six reciprocal mirrors, a second set of at least six reciprocal mirrors, and at least six LCD units.
- Light from at least one light source emits towards the first set of at least six reciprocal mirrors.
- the first set of at least six reciprocal mirrors reflects light towards at least one of the at least six LCD units.
- the at least six LCD units include, but are not limited to, a Green LCD, a Yellow LCD, a Cyan, LCD, a Red LCD, a Magenta LCD, and/or a Blue LCD.
- Output from each of the at least six LCDs is received by the second set of at least six reciprocal minors.
- Output from the second set of at least six reciprocal minors is sent to the single projector unit.
- Image data output by the single projector unit is output as a six-primary color system.
- more than one projector is used.
- the display is comprised of a dual stack Digital Microminor Device (DMD) projector system.
- FIG. 72 illustrates one embodiment of a dual stack DMD projector system. In this system, two projectors are stacked on top of one another.
- the dual stack DMD projector system uses a spinning wheel filter.
- the dual stack DMD projector system uses phosphor technology.
- tire filter systems are illuminated by a xenon lamp.
- the filter system uses a blue laser illuminator system.
- Filter systems in one projector are RGB, while the second projector uses a CMY filter set.
- the wheels for each projector unit are synchronized using at least one of an input video sync or a projector to projector sync, and timed so that the inverted colors are output of each projector at the same time.
- the projectors are phosphor wheel systems.
- a yellow phosphor wheel spins in time with a DMD imager to output sequential RG.
- the second projector is designed the same, but uses a cyan phosphor wheel.
- the output from this projector becomes sequential BG.
- the output of both projectors is YRGGCB.
- Magenta is developed by synchronizing the yellow and cyan wheels to overlap the flashing DMD.
- the display is a single DMD projector solution.
- a single DMD device is coupled with an RGB diode light source system.
- the DMD projector uses LED diodes.
- the DMD projector includes CMY diodes.
- the DMD projector creates CMY primaries using a double flashing technique.
- FIG. 73 illustrates one embodiment of a single DMD projector solution.
- FIG. 74 illustrates one embodiment of a six-primary color system using a white OLED display.
- the display is a white OLED monitor. Current emissive monitor and/or television designs use a white emissive OLED array covered by a color filter.
- FIG. 75 illustrates one embodiment of an optical filter array for a white OLED display.
- FIG. 76 illustrates one embodiment of a matrix of an LCD drive for a six-primary color system with a backlight illuminated LCD monitor.
- the display is a backlight illuminated LCD display.
- the design of an LCD display involves adding the CMY subpixels. Drives for these subpixels are similar to the RGB matrix drives. With the advent of 8K LCD televisions, it is technically feasible to change the matrix drive and optical filter and have a 4K six-primary color TV.
- FIG. 77 illustrates one embodiment of an optical filter array for a six-primary' color system with a backlight illuminated LCD monitor.
- the optical filter array includes the additional CMY subpixels.
- the display is a direct emissive assembled display.
- the design for a direct emissive assembled display includes a matrix of color emitters grouped as a six-color system. Individual channel inputs drive each Quantum Dot (QD) element illuminator and/or micro LED element.
- QD Quantum Dot
- FIG. 78 illustrates an array for a Quantum Dot (QD) display device.
- FIG. 79 illustrates one embodiment of an array for a six-primary color system for use with a direct emissive assembled display.
- FIG. 80 illustrates one embodiment of a six-primary' color system in an emissive display that does not incorporate color filtered subpixels.
- this is operable to be modified for a six-primary color system by expanding the RGB or WRGB filter arrangement to an RGBCMY matrix.
- the white subpixel is operable to be removed as the luminance of the three additional primaries will replace it.
- SDI video is input through an SDI decoder.
- the SDI decoder outputs to a Y CrCbCcCy-RGBCMY converter. The converter outputs RGBCMY data, with the luminance component (Y) subtracted. RGBCMY data is then converted to RGB data.
- This RGB data is sent to a scale sync generation component, receives adjustments to image controls, contrast, brightness, chroma, and saturation, is sent to a color correction component, and output to the display panel as LVDS data.
- the SDI decoder outputs to an SDI Y-R switch component.
- the SDI Y-R switch component outputs RGBCMY data.
- the RGBCMY data is sent to a scale sync generation component, receives adjustments to image controls, contrast, brightness, chroma, and saturation, is sent to a color correction component, and output to a display panel as LVDS data.
- the display is further operable to display super saturated colors, which are described in U.S. Application No. 17/748,655, filed May 19, 2022, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
- the present invention includes a device wherein the device is operable to acquire image data, process image data, and/or display image data.
- the device includes, but is not limited to, a camera (e.g., digital video camera, still camera), a mobile device (e.g., a smartphone), a tablet, a computer (e.g., desktop computer, laptop computer), a monitor, a wearable device, a personal digital assistant (PDA), an electronic book reader, a digital media player, a video gaming device, a video teleconferencing device, a video streaming device, and/or an augmented reality/virtual reality (AR/VR) device (e.g., a headset, a pair of goggles, smart lenses).
- a camera e.g., digital video camera, still camera
- a mobile device e.g., a smartphone
- a tablet e.g., a computer (e.g., desktop computer, laptop computer), a monitor, a wearable device, a personal digital assistant (
- the device does not require transport of data between separate components via a wireless connection. Additionally, the device does not require transport of data over longer wired and/or cable connections (e.g., HDMI cables, SDI cables).
- wired connections of the device e.g., soldered connections
- wired connections of the device are operable to be shorter because the wired connections are within a single device.
- the device streamlines the process of acquiring and displaying image data.
- the device includes at least one imager for acquiring image data.
- the at least one imager preferably includes at least one lens and at least one image sensor (e.g., a camera, a video camera, a camcorder, a slow-motion camera, and/or a highspeed camera).
- CCD Charge-coupled device
- CMOS complementary metal-oxide- semiconductor
- APS active-pixel sensors
- NMOS n-type metal -oxide-semiconductor
- quanta image sensors are compatible with the present invention.
- the at least one imager is a single imager with a striped filter system.
- the at least one imager includes a red imager, a green imager, and a blue imager.
- the at least one lens directs light towards the at least one image sensor.
- the at least one lens includes, but is not limited to, at least one convex lens and/or at least one concave lens.
- the at least one image sensor is a wide gamut image sensor, e.g., a wide gamut camera.
- the at least one image sensor is a single-pixel image sensor.
- the at least one image sensor does not include a detector array.
- the at least one image sensor is a plurality of image sensors.
- one or more of the at least one imager is interchangeable such that the device is compatible with a plurality of imagers.
- this modular design enables the at least one imager to be upgraded or swapped out depending on varying image acquisition needs and/or technological developments.
- the at least one imager includes a plurality of lenses for a plurality of image sensors.
- the plurality of lenses creates different focal lengths for each of the plurality of image sensors.
- the device is operable to change the focal lengths, e.g., by zooming.
- the device is operable to interpolate signals from the plurality of image sensors with different focal lengths to create hybrid sensor data.
- the device is operable to combine sensor data from each of the plurality of image sensors into a single set of image data.
- the device includes a stabilizer, e.g., a gyroscope system, an electronic stabilization system.
- the at least one imager is preferably located on the stabilizer and the stabilizer moves the at least one imager to counteract movements that would result in blurry images.
- the at least one imager includes a lens mount, e.g., a screw mount, a bayonet mount, a breech lock, a tab lock, a double bayonet, Z, X, Electro-Focus (EF), EF-M, EF-S, AF, E, L, RF, G, M, SA, A, K, F, S, PL, T, C, H, and/or 645 mounts.
- EF Electro-Focus
- the at least one imager includes at least one filter (e.g., optical filter).
- the at least one filter is overlaid atop a photosite on the at least one image sensor.
- the at least one filter is an absorptive filter.
- the at least one filter is an interference filter or a dichroic filter.
- the at least one filter has at least one cut-off wavelength and passes or blocks light based on the at least one cut-off wavelength (e.g., a long-pass filter, a short-pass filter, a bandpass filter, a multi-bandpass filter, a notch filter).
- the at least one filter modifies the intensity of all wavelengths equally, e.g., a neutral density filter.
- the at least one filter includes at least one color filter array, e.g., a Bayer filter, a Quad Bayer filter, a diamond pattern color filter array, a Y amanaka color filter array, a vertical stripe color filter array, a diagonal stripe color filter array, a pseudo-random color filter array, and/or a human visual system-based color filter array.
- Filter colors compatible with the present invention include, but are not limited to, RGB, CYGM, RGBE (red, green, blue, emerald), and/or CMY.
- the at least one filter is operable to be modified.
- a Bayer filter is modified to include a magenta filter.
- the size of the elements in the Bayer filter are adjusted to increase sensitivity of the at least one image sensor.
- one or more of the at least one filter is operable to be rotated.
- the at least one filter includes a plurality' of filter layers.
- the at least one filter includes at least one filter for light outside of the visible wavelength range, e.g., ultraviolet (UV) filters, infrared (IR) filters.
- the device is operable to convert light captured through non-visible wavelength filters into visible light for visual effects such as UV/blacklight simulation.
- the at least one filter includes any number of color filters.
- the at least one filter includes inverse colors to increase a sensitivity of the at least one imager.
- the device is operable to acquire raw image data as a raw image file.
- a raw image file is considered unprocessed and thus cannot be edited or printed.
- Raw image files include image data as well as metadata and a header.
- the metadata includes, but is not limited to, image sensor parameters, imager parameters, timecodes, frame data, HDR metadata, colorimetric metadata, an aspect ratio, dimensions (e.g., pixel dimensions), and/or lens information (e.g., a focal length, an aperture, a shutter speed, an exposure time, a sensitivity, a white balance).
- Raw image formats include, but are not limited to.
- the device is operable to store the raw image file before processing.
- the device is then operable to render the raw image data into rendered image data, wherein the rendered image data is operable to be viewed and/or edited.
- Rendering includes, but is not limited to, decoding, demosaicing (e.g., removing the effects of a Bayer filter), pixel removal (e.g., of defective pixels), interpolation (e.g., to replace removed pixels), white balancing, noise reduction, color translation, tone reproduction, optical correction, contrast manipulation, resizing, splitting, cropping, and/or compression.
- the device does not compress the raw image data.
- the device is operable to render the image data as a pipeline process, wherein each step is performed in succession. The order of the steps is operable to be changed.
- the device is operable to render the image data in parallel steps.
- the device is operable to render the image data by solving a single optimization problem.
- the device is operable to save image prior data and/or image variation data and use the image prior data and/or the image variation data in rendering, processing, and/or displaying the image data.
- an acquisition color gamut is identical to a display color gamut.
- both the acquisition color gamut and the display color gamut are expanded color gamuts and/or include at least four primaries, e.g., 6P-B, 6P-C.
- the display color gamut e.g., RGBCMY
- the display color gamut has a larger volume than the acquisition color gamut (e.g., RGB).
- the display color gamut e.g., RGB
- the device is preferably operable to convert image data from the acquisition color gamut to the display color gamut.
- rendering includes converting the raw image data into a color space, e.g., CIE 1931, ITU-R BT.2020.
- the device is operable to render the image data in a three-coordinate format wherein a first coordinate is a luminance or a luma value and a second and third coordinate are both colorimetric (chroma).
- the three-coordinate format is Yxy, wherein Y is a luminance coordinate and wherein x and y are orthogonal colorimetric coordinates.
- the device is also operable to apply a transformation (e.g., a gamma compression) to the luminance coordinate to create a luma coordinate (e.g., Y').
- a transformation e.g., a gamma compression
- Alternative three- coordinate formats include, but are not limited to, L*a*b*, ICtCp, YCbCr, YUV, Yu’v’, YPbPr, and/or YIQ.
- the device is operable to render the image data as XYZ data.
- the device includes a user interface for accepting user input.
- tire raw image data is rendered based on the user input.
- the device is operable to apply an opto-electronic transfer function (OETF) and an electro-optical transfer function (EOTF) to the image data.
- the device is operable to apply at least one non-linear function (e.g., an OOTF) to the image data.
- the device includes at least one look-up table (LUT).
- the LUT is operable to be implemented in hardware (e.g., in an FPGA) and/or in software.
- rendering includes compressing the image data, e.g., using 4:2:2 sampling, 4:2:0 sampling.
- rendering includes applying color gamut constraints for a target color gamut.
- the image data is not compressed (4:4:4 sampling).
- rendering further includes HDR processing to create a larger visible range of luminance in image data.
- Displaying HDR images typically requires application of at least one transfer function, e.g., PQ, hybrid log-gamma (HLG).
- the device includes a PQ-compatible display and/or an HLG-compatible display to display HDR image data with the at least one transfer function applied.
- the device is further operable to apply at least one tone mapping curve to image data, e.g., an S-curve, to preserve highlight and shadow detail.
- the metadata includes information about the at least one transfer function and/or the at least one tone mapping curve.
- the device is further able to process and/or transform the rendered image data.
- the device includes the encoder and the decoder of the present invention in a single unit.
- the device is operable to store processed image data that is sent from the encoder to the decoder before the processed image data is decoded. Because the encoder and the decoder are located in the same device, data is transmitted between the encoder and the decoder over a wired connection.
- the wired connection does not require internet connectivity, BLUETOOTH, or any other type of wireless connection.
- storing data in intermediate formats creates backup data that is operable to be used in case of corrupted or lost image data.
- the device is operable to bypass encoding and/or decoding steps because the same device is operable for both image acquisition and image display.
- the device does not encode the image data as an HDMI input and then decode the HDMI input with an HDMI receiver circuit because HDMI connection is not necessary for displaying the image data.
- the device is operable to encode the image data for display on an additional display device separate from the device in addition to displaying the image data on the display screen.
- a bit depth of the image data is kept the same in the device throughout each step from acquisition to display.
- the device is operable to process and/or transform the image data internally, e.g., with an embedded ARM (advanced RISC (reduced instraction set computing) machine) processor.
- the device is operable for remote image processing.
- the device is in network communication with a platform wherein the device is operable to send image data to the platform and receive image data from the platform.
- the platform is operable to process the image data.
- the platform is hosted on a server, e.g., a cloud-based server, a server hosted on a distributed edge network.
- the device is operable for wired communication with an external processor (e.g., a computer, a tablet) for image processing.
- an external processor e.g., a computer, a tablet
- the device further includes a user interface, wherein the user interface is operable to accept user input to edit the image data, e.g., a brightness, a saturation, a contrast.
- the device is operable to edit the image data for a specific feature, e.g., skin tone correction.
- the device is operable to subsample the image data for display.
- storing and processing the image data in a three-coordinate system such as Yxy allows the chromaticity coordinates to be subsampled for display without affecting perception.
- 4:2:2, 4:2:0, and 4:1:1 subsampling are compatible with the present invention.
- the image data is fully sampled.
- the device is operable to decompress compressed image data.
- processing the image data for display includes applying color matching functions (CMFs).
- CMFs describe the chromatic response of the human eye using three functions of wavelength While CIE 1931 CMFs are commonly used, modifications to CIE 1931 CMFs including, but not limited to, Judd in 1951, Vos in 1978, Stiles and Burch in 1959, Stockman and Sharpe (Sharpe, L.T., Stockman, A., Jagla, W., Jagle, H. 2011. A luminous efficiency function, V*D65(X), for daylight adaptation: A correction.
- the device further includes a display.
- the display is preferably operable to display image data using greater than three primaries.
- the display is operable to display colors outside of an ITU-R BT.2020 color gamut.
- the display is operable to display at least 80% of a total area covered by the CIE-1931 color space.
- the display is as described in U.S. Patent No. 11,030,934, filed October 1, 2020 and issued June 8, 2021, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
- the display is a screen, e.g., a liquid crystal display (LCD) screen, a light-emitting diode (LED) screen, an LED-backlit screen, an organic LED (OLED) screen, an active matrix OLED (AMOLED) screen, a quantum dot (QD) display, an LCD display using QD backlight, a perovskite display, and/or a laser display (e.g., using discrete modulation, grating modulation).
- the display includes at least one projector.
- the device is operable to display the image data after it has been acquired, rendered, and/or processed by the device. Additionally or alternatively, the device is operable to receive image data for display from an external source.
- the display includes a plurality of display devices (e.g., screens, projectors).
- the device is operable to modify display parameters of the image data, including, but not limited to, a gamut, a frame rate, a sampling rate, an aspect ratio, a data format, metadata, and/or SDP parameters.
- the display of the device is interchangeable.
- the device is also operable to project the image data onto a second display wherein the second display is separate from the device.
- the device is operable to cast the image data onto a second display wherein the second display mirrors the display of the device (e.g., via a wireless or wired connection).
- the second display extends the first display.
- the device is further operable to optimize the image data for display on the second display, e.g., by applying atone curve, changing a resolution, changing a color space of the image data.
- the system includes at least one headset (e.g., a headset, two headsets, etc.) configured for virtual reality, augmented reality, and/or mixed reality environments (“AR/VR”).
- the headset preferably includes a display, an eyewear component, at least one power supply component, at least one image capturing device, and/or control electronics.
- the headset is a pair of goggles.
- the headset is a pair of glasses.
- the headset includes at least one strap and/or temples.
- the power supply component includes at least one battery, at least one supercapacitor, or other similar power supply components.
- the battery includes at least one rechargeable battery'.
- the at least one rechargeable battery includes a lithium ion battery.
- the headset is configured to receive and display an image of a virtual scene, movie, and/or environment.
- the headset is further operable to receive audio data and communicate the audio data to a wearer via a speaker, headphones, and other similar audio playback devices.
- the headphones are noise-cancelling headphones.
- the noise-cancelling headphones are configured to block out external noise such that the wearer is completely immersed in the AR/VR environment.
- headsets and/or AR/VR systems include, but are not limited to, those described in U.S. Patent Nos. 8,217,856; 8,743,145; 9,094,677; 9,223,136; 9,635,450; 9,671,614; 9,733,480; 9,734,402; 9,766,462; 9,846,483; 9,858,703; 9,897,812; 9,989,998; 10,025,060; 10,037,084; 10,055,645; 10,055,887; 10,061,352; 10,061,391; 10,102,674; 10,124,251; 10,133,305; 10,185,390; 10,209,769; 10,244,226; 10,254,547; 10,261,579; 10,318,007; 10,419,731; 10,429,647; 10,540,003; 10,656,423; 10,656,822; 10,769,438; 10,825,255; 10,838,206; 10,890,94
- the at least one strap is configured to wrap around a wearer’s head and attach to the eyewear component via at least one attachment mechanism.
- the at least one attachment mechanism includes a hook and loop fastener, a latch, a button, a buckle, a snap, a tie, a clip, and other similar attachment mechanisms.
- the at least one strap is adjustable to a wearer’s head.
- this allows the headset to be used for wearers of different head sizes.
- the at least one strap includes a tightening mechanism.
- the tightening mechanism is configured to rotate in one direction and increase the tension in the head strap and rotate in the opposite direction to loosen the tension in the head strap.
- the at least one strap includes at least two straps. In one embodiment, the at least two straps do not overlap and are in a parallel position around a wearer’s head. Alternatively, the at least two straps are configured to intersect in the center of the back of a wearer’s head to provide a tighter fit.
- the headset is configured to provide minimal pressure to a wearer’s face.
- the headset includes a nose component.
- a wearer’s nose is operable to rest inside the nose component.
- the nose component is adjustable.
- the nose component is configured to move left, right, up, and/or down.
- the nose component is operable to expand.
- the headset is designed to rest on the ridge of the wearer’s nose.
- the headset covers a wearer’s entire face.
- the at least one image capturing device is a motion sensor camera.
- the motion sensor camera is configured to capture a wearer’s body movement.
- the at least one image capturing device includes a LIDAR camera. The at least one image capturing device is further operable to determine a wearer’s positioning and provide at least one recommendation to correct a wearer’s positioning based on the display.
- the display includes Active Matrix Organic Light Emitting Diode (AMOLED) technology'.
- the display includes a diamond PenTile subpixel matrix.
- the display has a display panel size of between 12.7 cm (5 inches) and 22.9 cm (9 inches) (e.g., 17.8 cm (7 inches)).
- the display has a screen resolution of 2160 x 1200 and a per eye resolution of 1080 x 1200.
- the total pixels per eye is 1,296,000 pixels.
- the display has a refresh rate of 90Hz.
- the system includes a 6 degrees of freedom constellation camera.
- the system includes an optical 360-degree infrared (IR) LED tracking system.
- the system includes a field of view of 110 degrees.
- the system includes a near infrared CMOS sensor. See, e.g., Shafer DM, Carbonara CP, Korpi MF. Factors Affecting Consumment of Virtual Reality Games: A Comparison Involving Consumer-Grade Virtual Reality Technology. Games Health J. 2019 Feb;8(l): 15-23. doi: 10.1089/g4h.2017.0190. Epub 2018 Sep 8. PMID: 30199273, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
- the control electronics preferably include at least one processor.
- the processor includes a general-purpose microprocessor (e.g., a central processing unit (CPU)), a graphics processing unit (GPU), a microcontroller, a Digital Signal Processor (DSP), an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), a Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA), a Programmable Logic Device (PLD), a controller, a state machine, gated or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, or any other suitable entity or combinations thereof that is operable to perform calculations, process instructions for execution, and/or other manipulations of information.
- one or more of the at least one processor is operable to run predefined programs stored in at least one memory' of the control electronics.
- the control electronics preferably includes at least one antenna, which allows the control electronics to receive and process input data (e.g., AR/VR settings) from at least one remote device (e.g., smartphone, tablet, laptop computer, desktop computer, gaming system).
- the at least one remote device is in wireless network communication with the control electronics.
- the wireless communication is, by way of example and not limitation, radiofrequency, BLUETOOTH®, ZIGBEE®, WI-FI®, wireless local area networking, near field communication (NFC), infrared optical link, or other similar commercially utilized standards.
- the at least one remote device is in wired communication with the control electronics through USB or equivalent.
- the at least one processor is a microcontroller.
- the microcontroller includes a transceiver, BLUETOOTH module, WI-FI module, a microprocessor, an ultra-low-power co-processor, read-only memory (ROM), random-access memory (RAM) (e.g., static random-access memory (SRAM)), flash memory, a power management unit, and/or a digital-to-analog converter.
- the AR/VR system is operable to receive wearer voice input data.
- the AR/VR system includes a microphone that is operable to receive and record a wearer’s voice.
- the headset is further operable to change the display based on the wearer’s words.
- the AR/VR system is configured to receive the words “start virtual reality game” from a wearer, and activate the virtual reality game.
- the headset is operable to communicate, preferably wirelessly, with at least one remote device including, but not limited to, a mobile phone (e.g., smartphone), a tablet, a gaming system, at least one other headset, and/or a computer (e.g., laptop computer).
- the mobile phone is operable to be any mobile phone that (1) is capable of running mobile applications and (2) is capable of communicating with the headset.
- the mobile phone includes, for example, an ANDROIDTM phone, an APPLE® IPHONE®, or a SAMSUNG® GALAXY® phone.
- the tablet is operable to be any tablet that (1) is capable of running mobile applications and (2) is capable of communicating with the headset.
- the tablet includes, for example, the 3G or 4G version of the APPLE® IPAD® or the 5G version of the Samsung Galaxy Tab S6.
- the remote device is in communication with a cellular network and/or a network.
- the network is operable to be any network for providing wired or wireless connection to the Internet, such as a local area network (LAN) or a wide area network (WAN).
- LAN local area network
- WAN wide area network
- an AR/VR application (e.g., AR/VR mobile application) is installed and running at the remote device.
- the AR/VR system application is implemented according to the type (i.e., the operating system) of remote device on which it is running.
- the AR/VR system application is designed to receive wearer information from the headset.
- the AR/VR application is operable to provide graphical, audible, and/or tactile feedback to the wearer.
- the AR/VR system is configured to develop a personalized profile based on a wearer’s prior AR/VR environments and response.
- the AR/VR system is further operable to display super saturated colors, which are described in U.S. Application No. 17/748,655, filed May 19, 2022, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
- the AR/VR system is operable to utilize a plurality of learning techniques including, but not limited to, machine learning (ML), artificial intelligence (Al), deep learning (DL), neural networks (NNs), artificial neural networks (ANNs), support vector machines (SVMs), Maikov decision process (MDP), and/or natural language processing (NLP).
- ML machine learning
- Al artificial intelligence
- DL deep learning
- N neural networks
- ANNs artificial neural networks
- SVMs support vector machines
- MDP Maikov decision process
- NLP natural language processing
- the AR/VR system is operable to utilize predictive analytics techniques including, but not limited to, machine learning (ML), artificial intelligence (Al), neural networks (NNs) (e.g., long short term memory (LSTM) neural networks), deep learning, historical data, and/or data mining to make future predictions and/or models.
- ML machine learning
- Al artificial intelligence
- NNs neural networks
- LSTM long short term memory
- the AR/VR system is preferably operable to recommend and/or perform actions based on historical data, external data sources, ML, Al, NNs, and/or other learning techniques.
- the AR/VR system is operable to utilize predictive modeling and/or optimization algorithms including, but not limited to, heuristic algorithms, particle swarm optimization, genetic algorithms, technical analysis descriptors, combinatorial algorithms, quantum optimization algorithms, iterative methods, deep learning techniques, and/or feature selection techniques.
- the present invention is incorporated into medical imaging and/or diagnostics.
- Medical imaging and/or diagnostics has started moving away from grayscale, and the use of color in the field is increasing.
- the medical imaging and/or the diagnostics include, but are not limited to, telemedicine, digital microscopy, whole-slide imaging (WSI), histopathology, endoscopy, laparoscopy, retinal imaging, ophthalmology, dermatology, digital dermoscopy, echocardiography, radiology (e.g., magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) (e.g., 3D MRI), computed tomography (CT) scanning, positron emission tomography (PET) scanning, color-flow imaging, ultrasound (e.g., 2D flow imagery)), surgery (e.g., robotic surgery), veterinary applications, wound care management, cellular spectroscopy, digital pathology, short-wave infrared fluorescence tri-band imaging (SWIFTI), hyperspectral imaging (HSI), and/or dentistry (e
- MRI magnetic resonance imaging
- the robotic surgery includes at least one robotic surgery component including, but not limited to, a surgeon console, a patient cart, and/or a vision cart.
- the at least one robotic surgery component is a DA VINCI SYSTEMS robotic surgery component. See, e.g., (1) Mingels C, Sachpekidis C, Bohn KP, Hunermund JN, Schepers R, Fedi V, Prenosil G, Rominger A, Afshar-Oromieh A, Alberts I. The influence of colour scale in lesion detection and patient-based sensitivity in [68Ga]Ga- PSMA-PET/CT. Nucl Med Commun. 2021 May l;42(5):495-502.
- the present invention provides true color. Alternatively or additionally, the present invention provides false color (e.g., pseudo color, density slicing, choropleth).
- the system is operable to use a greater bit depth (e.g., larger than 8 bits) coupled with additional color primaries to provide pseudo color from a single band of data or single filter source.
- a greater bit depth e.g., larger than 8 bits
- additional color primaries to provide pseudo color from a single band of data or single filter source.
- the use of greater bit depth and additional color primaries enables tire system to provide pseudo color in an RGB false color application. See, e.g., Zabala-Travers S, Choi M, Cheng WC, Badano A. Effect of color visualization and display hardware on the visual assessment of pseudocolor medical images. Med Phys. 2015;42(6):2942-2954.
- the system incorporates at least one imager (e.g., camera), at least one spectrometer, at least one scanner, at least one medical device, at least one lighting source, at least one sensor, at least one lens, at least one processor, at least one memory', at least one computing device, at least one database, at least one learning algorithm (e.g., deep neural network) for image processing and comparison, and/or at least one viewing device.
- the at least one lighting source is a white light which is effective in detecting lesions.
- the at least one lighting source is a variable frequency lighting source including, but not limited to, visible light, infrared light, and/or ultraviolet light.
- visible light, infrared, and/or ultraviolet light are effective in detecting bacterial infections, lipid plaque, and precancerous and subtle inflammatory conditions.
- the system is preferably operable to use a narrowband fighting source (e.g., 300-3400Hz) in endoscopic diagnostic tests to provide a sharper and/or better contrast image.
- the system is preferably operable to use an infrared lighting source to provide a transcutaneous illumination of tissue. See, e.g., Hermanowski, J. Light Source Helps Endoscopes Get Smaller and Smaller. Photonics. Retrieved October 27, 2022, from 902. which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
- the system further includes at least one contrast dye and/or at least one contrast agent.
- the at least one contrast dye and/or at least one contrast agent is operable to increase the contrast of structures or fluids within the body in medical imaging.
- the at least one contrast dye and/or at least one contrast agent is radioactive.
- the at least one contrast dye and/or at least one contrast agent includes, but is not limited to, iodine, barium (e.g., barium sulfate), gadolinium, and/or microbubbles (e.g., saline).
- the at least one contrast dye and/or at least one contrast agent is a fluorescence dye (e.g., indocyanine green, methylene blue).
- the at least one contrast dye and/or at least one contrast agent includes at least one magnetic microstructure. See, e.g., U.S. Patent Nos. 10,188,755; 9,084,820; and 10,215,825, each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
- the system includes at least one imager for acquiring image data.
- the at least one imager preferably includes at least one lens and at least one image sensor (e.g., a camera, a video camera, a camcorder, a slow-motion camera, and/or a high- speed camera).
- the at least one lens directs light towards the at least one image sensor.
- the at least one lens includes, but is not limited to, at least one convex lens and/or at least one concave lens.
- the at least one image sensor is a wide gamut image sensor, e.g., a wide gamut camera.
- the at least one image sensor is a single-pixel image sensor.
- the at least one image sensor does not include a detector array.
- the at least one image sensor is a plurality of image sensors.
- one or more of the at least one imager is incorporated into the at least one medical device (e.g., endoscope).
- one or more of the at least one imager is interchangeable such that the at least one medical device is compatible with a plurality of imagers.
- this modular design enables the at least one imager to be upgraded or swapped out depending on varying image acquisition needs and/or technological developments.
- the at least one imager includes an array sensor such that the at least one imager is operable to provide multi-spectral capture and/or operate as a light field sensor.
- the at least one imager includes a plurality of lenses for a plurality of image sensors.
- the plurality of lenses creates different focal lengths for each of the plurality of image sensors.
- the at least one imager is operable to change the focal lengths, e.g., by zooming.
- the system is operable to interpolate signals from the plurality of image sensors with different focal lengths to create hybrid sensor data.
- the system is operable to combine sensor data from each of the plurality of image sensors into a single set of image data.
- the system includes a stabilizer, e.g., a gyroscope system.
- the at least one imager is preferably located on the stabilizer and the stabilizer moves the at least one imager to counteract movements that would result in blurry images.
- the plurality of lenses is made from meta-materials such that the meta-materials enable a negative index of refraction.
- this optimizes focal length while minimizing physical length.
- the at least one imager includes at least one optical filter.
- the at least one optical filter is overlaid atop of the at least one image sensor.
- the at least one filter is an absorptive filter.
- the at least one filter is an interference filter or a dichroic filter.
- the at least one filter has at least one cut-off wavelength and passes or blocks light based on the at least one cut-off wavelength (e.g., a long-pass filter, a short-pass filter, a bandpass filter, a multibandpass filter, a notch filter).
- the at least one filter modifies the intensity of all wavelengths equally, e.g., a neutral density filter.
- the at least one filter is a filter array, e.g., a Bayer filter.
- Bayer filter arrays compatible with the present invention include, but are not limited to, RGB, CYGM, RGBE (red, green, blue, emerald), and/or CMY.
- the Bayer filter is operable to be modified.
- the Bayer filter includes a magenta filter.
- the size of the elements in the Bayer filter are differentially adjusted to increase sensitivity of the at least one image sensor.
- one or more of the at least one filter is operable to be rotated, which advantageously enables the system to use different filters for different exposures.
- the at least one filter includes a plurality of filter layers.
- the at least one filter includes a plurality of filters.
- the plurality of filters are arranged in a radial pattern.
- the plurality of filters form a spinning filter wheel.
- an acquisition color gamut is identical to a display color gamut.
- both the acquisition color gamut and the display color gamut are expanded color gamuts and/or include at least four primaries, e.g., 6P-B, 6P-C.
- the display color gamut e.g., RGBCMY
- the display color gamut has a larger volume than the acquisition color gamut (e.g., RGB).
- the display color gamut e.g., RGB
- the system is preferably operable to convert image data from the acquisition color gamut to the display color gamut.
- the system is operable to acquire raw image data as a raw image file.
- a raw image file is considered unprocessed and thus cannot be edited or printed.
- Raw image files include image data as well as metadata and a header.
- the metadata includes, but is not limited to, patient health information (PHI) (e.g., patient name, medical record number, date of birth), image anatomic source and/or tissue type, image acquisition parameters (e.g., image dimensions, voxel size, repetition time, voxel datatype), image sensor parameters, imager parameters, timecodes, imager ISO, aperture measurements (e.g., f-stop, aperture size), exposure data, color space parameters, lens data (e.g., focal length and lens type), filter data, file format, compression data, frame rate data, flash data, light source, location data, and/or flame data.
- PHI patient health information
- image acquisition parameters e.g., image dimensions, voxel size, repetition time, voxel datatype
- image sensor parameters
- the system is compatible with Digital Imaging and Communication in Medicine (DICOM) standards for metadata.
- DICOM metadata varies based on different imaging modalities (e.g., CT scans and ultrasounds) because there is specific metadata related to each modality.
- DICOM metadata defines information object definitions (IODS), which are object-oriented metadata organized into modules.
- IODS information object definitions
- DICOM standardizes the structure of data values (e.g., date, time, patient names) and provides pre-defined lists of attributes (e.g., sex, body part). Additional information about DICOM is found in ISO 12052:2017 Health informatics — Digital imaging and communication in medicine (DICOM) including workflow and data management (8/2017), which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
- Raw image formats include, but are not limited to, Digital Negative Raw (DNG), ISO 12234-2 (TIFF/EP), Nikon NEF, Canon Raw v2 (CR2), CR3, Sony S-Log, ARRI Log, Panasonic V-Log, and/or Redcode Raw (R3D) files.
- DNG Digital Negative Raw
- ISO 12234-2 TIFF/EP
- Nikon NEF Canon Raw v2
- CR3D Redcode Raw
- the system is operable to store the raw image file before processing.
- the system is then operable to render the raw image data into rendered image data, wherein the rendered image data is operable to be viewed and/or edited.
- Rendering includes, but is not limited to, decoding, demosaicing (e.g., removing the effects of a Bayer filter), pixel removal (e.g., of defective pixels), interpolation (e.g., to replace removed pixels), white balancing, noise reduction, color translation, tone reproduction, optical correction, contrast manipulation, resizing, splitting, and/or compression.
- the system does not compress the raw image data.
- the system is operable to render the image data as a pipeline process, wherein each step is performed in succession. The order of the steps is operable to be changed.
- the system is operable to render the image data in parallel steps.
- the system is operable to render the image data by solving a single optimization problem.
- the system is operable to save image prior data and/or image variation data and use the image prior data and/or the image variation data in rendering, processing, and/or displaying the image data.
- rendering includes converting the raw image data into a color space, e.g., CIE 1931, ITU-R BT.2020.
- the system is operable to render the image data in a three-coordinate format wherein a first coordinate and a second coordinate are both colorimetric (chroma) and wherein a third coordinate is a luminance or a luma value.
- the three-coordinate format is Yxy, wherein x and y are orthogonal colorimetric coordinates and wherein Y is a luminance coordinate.
- the system is also operable to apply a transformation (e.g., a gamma compression) to the luminance coordinate to create a luma coordinate (e.g., ⁇ ').
- a transformation e.g., a gamma compression
- Alternative three-coordinate formats include, but are not limited to, L*a*b*, ICtCp, YCbCr, YUV, Yu’v’, YPbPr, and/or YIQ.
- the system is operable to render the image data as XYZ data.
- the system includes a user interface for accepting user input.
- the user input determines how the raw image data is rendered.
- the system is operable to apply an opto-electronic transfer function (OETF) and an electro-optical transfer function (EOTF) to the image data.
- OETF opto-electronic transfer function
- EOTF electro-optical transfer function
- the system is operable to apply at least one non-linear function (e.g., an OOTF) to the image data.
- the system includes at least one look-up table (LUT).
- the LUT is operable to be implemented in hardware (e.g., in an FPGA) and/or in software.
- the system is operable to remap colors to include a just noticeable difference for display on a viewing device.
- a first color and a second color are not perceptually different to a viewer, so the second color is remapped to a modified second color, which advantageously allows the viewer to perceive the differences between the first color and the modified second color.
- the system retains the original information, which allows the system to perform a plurality of learning techniques and/or a plurality of predictive analytics techniques using unmodified data.
- the system is also operable to retain information regarding the remapping.
- the retained information is stored in the metadata.
- the at least one imager acquires data as Yxy data, XYZ data, RGB data, and/or multi-primary data (e.g., RGBC, RGBCY, RGBCMY, RGBEYC). Additionally or alternatively, the at least one imager is operable to acquire data including, but not limited to, hyperspectral data, ultraviolet (UV) data, and/or infrared (IR) data. See, e.g., Lu, Guolan, and Baowei Fei. “Medical hyperspectral imaging: a review.” Journal of Biomedical Optics vol. 19,1 (2014): 10901. doi:10.1117/l.JB0.19.1.010901, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
- the present invention is used to process hyperspectral data, UV data, and/or IR data that is outside of the visible spectrum.
- the system extends colorimetric visible data with data that is outside of the visible spectrum.
- the system creates two different three-coordinate format elements for each data point acquired from the at least one imager such that one of the elements is related to Yxy (e.g., Y’xy) and the other is related to WUI (e.g., W’UI), wherein W (or W’) is a function similar to Y (or Y’) but encompasses more of the UV and IR wavelengths, wherein U is the UV channel, and I is the IR channel, and W (or W’) is proportional to the intensity of U and I.
- the system is operable to calculate a projection using the WUI values such that the projection plane is wui.
- the system is operable to assess the relevance of a spectral captured channel and its propensity to change rapidly.
- the system is operable to assign captured elements to a specific primary.
- the system is operable to assign captured elements to a mathematical combination of captured elements, for example, UV*Red and IR*Cyan.
- a non-linear function is applied to xy and/or UI.
- xy and/or UI are scaled.
- the present invention further includes at least one spectrometer.
- the at least one spectrometer includes, but is not limited to, a filtered camera, a whiskbroom scanner, a pushbroom scanner, an integral field spectrograph, a wedge imaging spectrometer, a Fourier transform imaging spectrometer, a computed tomography imaging spectrometer (CTIS), an image replicating imaging spectrometer (IRIS), a coded aperture snapshot spectral imager (CASSI), an image mapping spectrometer (IMS), and/or a spectrophotometer.
- CTIS computed tomography imaging spectrometer
- IRIS image replicating imaging spectrometer
- CASSI coded aperture snapshot spectral imager
- IMS image mapping spectrometer
- the spectrophotometer is used to acquire color data to perform shade matching for a dental implant.
- the present invention incorporates a luminance (e.g., Y) and two independent colorimetric coordinates (e.g., x and y, u' and v').
- a luminance e.g., Y
- two independent colorimetric coordinates e.g., x and y, u' and v'.
- this allows for separate processing of luminance and the two independent colorimetric coordinates.
- a non-linear function, an algorithm, and/or a LUT is operable to be placed only on the luminance.
- the non-linear function, the algorithm, and/or the LUT is operable to be placed on the luminance and the two independent colorimetric coordinates.
- the system is operable to include at least two luminance levels (e.g., standard and increased luminance).
- the system is operable to leverage Yxy and/or Yu V to plot the two independent colorimetric coordinates x and y outside the boundaries of the CIE-1931 color space.
- this enables tire system to render Ultraviolet Visible Near Infrared Spectrophotometry (UV-Vis-NIR) raw data into rendered image data.
- UV-Vis-NIR Ultraviolet Visible Near Infrared Spectrophotometry
- the system further includes at least one viewing device.
- the at least one viewing device is a multi-primary display (e.g., RGBC, RGBCY, RGBCMY).
- adding a cyan primary allows for greater range of colors and allows for better visualization of green-cyan pseudocolor, which is a current challenge in medical imagery. See, e.g., Zabala-Travers, Silvina et al. “Effect of color visualization and display hardware on the visual assessment of pseudocolor medical images. Medical Physics vol. 42,6 (2015): 2942-54. doi: 10.1118/1.4921125, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
- a multi-primary display is operable to provide additional colors that are not available on an RGB device.
- a 12-bit display having four primaries e.g., RGBC
- RGBC four primaries
- the at least one viewing device is operable to display colors outside of an ITU-R BT.2020 color gamut. In one embodiment, the at least one viewing device is operable to display at least 80% of a total area covered by the CIE-1931 color space. In one embodiment, the at least one viewing device is as described in U.S. Patent No. 11,030,934, filed October 1, 2020 and issued June 8, 2021, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
- the at least one viewing device is a screen, e.g., a liquid crystal display (LCD) screen, a fight-emitting diode (LED) screen, an LED-backlit screen, an organic LED (OLED) screen, an active matrix OLED (AMOLED) screen, a quantum dot (QD) display, a perovskite display, a stereoscopic display (e.g., head-mounted and/or autostereoscopic), a virtual reality (VR) display, and/or an augmented reality display.
- the at least one viewing device includes at least one projector. The at least one viewing device is operable to display the image data after it has been acquired, rendered, and/or processed by the system.
- the at least one viewing device includes a plurality of display devices (e.g., screens, projectors).
- the at least one viewing device is operable to modify display parameters of the image data, including, but not limited to, a gamut, a flame rate, a sampling rate, an aspect ratio, a data format, metadata, atone curve (e.g., perceptual quantizer (PQ), hybrid log-gamma (HLG), and gamma), and/or SDP parameters.
- a gamut e.g., a flame rate, a sampling rate, an aspect ratio, a data format, metadata, atone curve (e.g., perceptual quantizer (PQ), hybrid log-gamma (HLG), and gamma), and/or SDP parameters.
- PQ perceptual quantizer
- HGG hybrid log-gamma
- gamma gamma
- the system further includes additional health information including, but not limited to, vital signs, test results (e.g., blood test results, genetic test results), previous images or scans, and/or health history.
- additional health information including, but not limited to, vital signs, test results (e.g., blood test results, genetic test results), previous images or scans, and/or health history.
- the system incorporates a plurality of learning techniques in the imaging and/or the diagnostics.
- the plurality of learning technique utilizes a training set to train the system (e.g., during a learning period).
- the plurality of learning techniques includes, but is not limited to, machine learning (ML), artificial intelligence (Al), deep learning (DL), neural networks (NNs), artificial neural networks (ANNs), support vector machines (SVMs), Markov decision process (MDP), decision trees, linear regression, logistic regression, naive Bayes, ⁇ -nearest neighbor, random forest, Adaptive Boosting (i.e., AdaBoost), and/or natural language processing (NLP).
- ML machine learning
- Al artificial intelligence
- DL deep learning
- Ns artificial neural networks
- ANNs artificial neural networks
- SVMs support vector machines
- MDP Markov decision process
- decision trees linear regression, logistic regression, naive Bayes, ⁇ -nearest neighbor, random forest, Adaptive Boosting (i.e.
- the plurality of learning techniques is operable to extract features from an image including, but not limited to, at least one intensity, at least one edge, at least one texture, at least one segment, at least one color, at least one luminance, at least one color/tone gradient, at least one histogram/heat diagram, and/or at least one wavelength from an image.
- the ANNs include, but are not limited to, a multilayer perceptron (MLP). Alternatively or additionally, the ANNs include a single-layer perceptron (SLP).
- the learning system includes a feed-forward network trained by a backpropagation algorithm.
- the plurality of learning techniques includes supervised learning techniques.
- the plurality of learning techniques includes unsupervised learning techniques.
- Unsupervised learning techniques include, but are not limited to, K-means, mean shift, affinity propagation, hierarchical clustering, density-based spatial clustering of applications with noise (DBSCAN), Gaussian mixture modeling, Maikov random fields, iterative self-organizing data (ISODATA), and fuzzy C-means systems.
- the plurality of learning techniques includes reinforcement learning techniques (e.g., Maja, Teaching-Box) The system is operable to use any of the aforementioned learning techniques alone or in combination.
- the system is operable to utilize predictive analytics techniques including, but not limited to, machine learning (ML), artificial intelligence (Al), neural networks (NNs) (e.g., long short term memory' (LSTM) neural networks), deep learning, historical data, and/or data mining to make future predictions and/or models.
- ML machine learning
- Al artificial intelligence
- NNs neural networks
- the system is preferably operable to recommend and/or perform actions based on historical data, external data sources, ML, Al, NNs, and/or other learning techniques.
- the system is operable to utilize predictive modeling and/or optimization algorithms including, but not limited to, heuristic algorithms, particle swarm optimization, genetic algorithms, technical analysis descriptors, combinatorial algorithms, quantum optimization algorithms, iterative methods, deep learning techniques, and/or feature selection techniques.
- the predictive modeling and/or optimization algorithms include extraction of features from an image including, but not limited to, at least one intensity, at least one edge, at least one texture, at least one segment, at least one color, at least one luminance, and/or at least one wavelength from an image. See, e.g., Erickson, Bradley J et al. “Machine Learning for Medical Imaging.” Radiographics: a review publication of the Radiological Society of North America, Inc vol. 37,2 (2017): 505- 515. doi: 10.1148/rg.2017160130, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
- the system is used in digital dermoscopy and/or imaging, viewing, and/or diagnosing skin conditions.
- the viewing device is preferably operable to display images of tissue, live tissue manipulation (e.g., in real time or near-real time), and/or images of various tissue types within or on the body with increased color accuracy.
- live tissue manipulation e.g., in real time or near-real time
- images of various tissue types within or on the body with increased color accuracy are important for diagnostic imaging related to the skin and other organs (e.g., brain, lungs, etc.).
- a person’s skin tone may vary slightly due to a number of factors, but the two main influences are health and emotion.
- the human visual system has been optimized to detect small changes in skin reflectivity due to blood flow and oxygenation.
- the viewing device is a multi-primary (e.g., RGBCMY) viewing device.
- the viewing device includes a cyan primary.
- the viewing device includes a yellow primary.
- the viewing device has a red primary with a longer wavelength than 615 nm. Flesh tones often appear yellowish or reddish after color correction. Additionally, skin often appears shiny after color correction.
- increasing a cyan component and/or a magenta component improves the color accuracy of the flesh tones and reduces the shiny appearance of skin.
- the present invention is used to ensure color fidelity of the imaging and/or the diagnostics.
- the system includes at least one chip chart with a plurality of colors and/or at least one reference to calibrate the system .
- a digital pathology scanner often incorporates at least one sensor, at least one light source, at least one lens, and at least one processor.
- the digital pathology scanner is calibrated using at least one reference slide with a plurality of known colors.
- tire at least one reference slide mimics at least one stained tissue sample and/or at least one fluorescent marker.
- An example of a reference slide is disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 10,241,310, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
- the digital pathology scanner is operable to scan the at least one reference slide and/or at least one sample as Yxy data and/or XYZ data.
- the digital pathology scanner is calibrated using at least one color patch.
- spectral transmittance of each of the at least one color patch is measured (e.g., using a spectroradiometer).
- scanning as Yxy data and/or XYZ data provides a larger gamut than RGB data. Color fidelity in scanning is very important, both for individual diagnostics and in conducting research studies across multiple sites. Additional information regarding colorimetry is included in ISO CIE 11664-6:2014 and ISO CIE 15076-1:2010, each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
- the present invention is used to ensure standardization of images captured for telemedicine regardless of the light source used in the image.
- the system includes at least one tele-med-chart with a plurality of colors and/or at least one reference to normalize and equalize various light sources and calibrate the at least one imager.
- the system is operable to digitally evaluate an image of the tele-med-chart that was captured by the at least one imager to characterize the overall light field within the image.
- the system is operable to use data from the captured image of the tele-med-chart along with data of the at least one imager to digitally standardize a captured image for the purpose of telemedicine.
- the tele- med-chart includes at least one UV fluorescent dye that emits in the visible spectrum.
- tire tele-med-chart is transparent such that different transparent dyes are selected to attenuate different wavelengths.
- a transparent tele-med-chart is operable to have a clear segment with no dye such that the clear segment is used as a reference.
- the at least one viewing device has a built-in calibrator to calibrate the individual primary channels of the at least one viewing device over time.
- the system is operable to calibrate die channels of the viewing device as the relative intensities of the individual primary channels drift over time.
- the system is operable to adjust the relative individual primary channel intensity ratios to a desired standard point.
- this improves the stability of the primaries of the viewing device overtime.
- FIG. 81 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of the invention illustrating a computer system, generally described as 800, having a network 810, a plurality of computing devices 820, 830, 840, a server 850, and a database 870.
- the server 850 is constructed, configured, and coupled to enable communication over a network 810 with a plurality of computing devices 820, 830, 840.
- the server 850 includes a processing unit 851 with an operating system 852.
- the operating system 852 enables the server 850 to communicate through network 810 with the remote, distributed user devices.
- Database 870 may house an operating system 872, memory 874, and programs 876.
- the system 800 includes a network 810 for distributed communication via a wireless communication antenna 812 and processing by at least one mobile communication computing device 830.
- wireless and wired communication and connectivity between devices and components described herein include wireless network communication such as WI-FI, WORLDWIDE INTEROPERABILITY FOR MICROWAVE ACCESS (WIMAX), Radio Frequency (RF) communication including RF identification (RFID), NEAR FIELD COMMUNICATION (NFC), BLUETOOTH including BLUETOOTH LOW ENERGY (BLE), ZIGBEE, Infrared (IR) communication, cellular communication, satellite communication. Universal Serial Bus (USB), Ethernet communications, communication via fiber-optic cables, coaxial cables, twisted pair cables, and/or any other type of wireless or wired communication.
- WI-FI WORLDWIDE INTEROPERABILITY FOR MICROWAVE ACCESS
- RF Radio Frequency
- RFID RF identification
- NFC NEAR FIELD COMMUNICATION
- BLUETOOTH including BLUETOOTH LOW ENERGY (BLE)
- ZIGBEE Infrared
- IR Infrared
- cellular communication
- the system 800 is a virtualized computing system capable of executing any or all aspects of software and/or application components presented herein on the computing devices 820, 830, 840.
- the computer system 800 may be implemented using hardware or a combination of software and hardware, either in a dedicated computing device, or integrated into another entity, or distributed across multiple entities or computing devices.
- the computing devices 820, 830, 840 are intended to represent various forms of electronic devices including at least a processor and a memory, such as a server, blade server, mainframe, mobile phone, personal digital assistant (PDA), smartphone, desktop computer, notebook computer, tablet computer, workstation, laptop, and other similar computing devices.
- PDA personal digital assistant
- the computing device 820 includes components such as a processor 860, a system memory 862 having a random access memory (RAM) 864 and a read-only memory (ROM) 866, and a system bus 868 that couples the memory 862 to the processor 860.
- the computing device 830 may additionally include components such as a storage device 890 for storing the operating system 892 and one or more application programs 894, a network interface unit 896, and/or an input/output controller 898. Each of the components may be coupled to each other through at least one bus 868.
- the input/output controller 898 may receive and process input from, or provide output to, a number of other devices 899, including, but not limited to, alphanumeric input devices, mice, electronic styluses, display units, touch screens, gaming controllers, joy sticks, touch pads, signal generation devices (e.g., speakers), augmented reality/virtual reality (AR/VR) devices (e.g., AR/VR headsets), or printers.
- the processor 860 may be a general-purpose microprocessor (e.g., a central processing unit (CPU)), a graphics processing unit (GPU), a microcontroller, a Digital Signal Processor (DSP), an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), a Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA), a Programmable Logic Device (PLD), a controller, a state machine, gated or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, or any other suitable entity or combinations thereof that can perform calculations, process instractions for execution, and/or other manipulations of information.
- CPU central processing unit
- multiple processors 860 and/or multiple buses 868 may be used, as appropriate, along with multiple memories 862 of multiple types (e.g., a combination of a DSP and a microprocessor, a plurality of microprocessors, one or more microprocessors in conjunction with a DSP core).
- multiple memories 862 of multiple types (e.g., a combination of a DSP and a microprocessor, a plurality of microprocessors, one or more microprocessors in conjunction with a DSP core).
- multiple computing devices may be connected, with each device providing portions of the necessary- operations (e.g., a server bank, a group of blade servers, or a multiprocessor system).
- a server bank e.g., a server bank, a group of blade servers, or a multiprocessor system.
- some steps or methods may be performed by circuitry- that is specific to a given function.
- the computer system 800 may operate in a networked environment using logical connections to local and/or remote computing devices 820, 830, 840 through a network 810.
- a computing device 830 may connect to a network 810 through a network interface unit 896 connected to a bus 868.
- Computing devices may communicate communication media through wired networks, direct-wired connections or wirelessly, such as acoustic, RF, or infrared, through an antenna 897 in communication with the network antenna 812 and the network interface unit 896, which may include digital signal processing circuitry when necessary.
- the network interface unit 896 may provide for communications under various modes or protocols.
- the instructions may be implemented in hardware, software, firmware, or any combinations thereof.
- a computer readable medium may provide volatile or non-volatile storage for one or more sets of instructions, such as operating systems, data structures, program modules, applications, or other data embodying any one or more of the methodologies or functions described herein.
- the computer readable medium may include the memory 862, tire processor 860, and/or the storage media 890 and may be a single medium or multiple media (e.g., a centralized or distributed computer system) that store the one or more sets of instructions 900.
- Non-transitory computer readable media includes all computer readable media, with the sole exception being a transitory, propagating signal per se.
- the instructions 900 may further be transmitted or received over the network 810 via the network interface unit 896 as communication media, which may include a modulated data signal such as a carrier wave or other transport mechanism and includes any deliver media.
- modulated data signal means a signal that has one or more of its characteristics changed or set in a manner as to encode information in the signal.
- Storage devices 890 and memoty 862 include, but are not limited to, volatile and non-volatile media such as cache, RAM, ROM, EPROM, EEPROM, FLASH memory, or other solid state memory technology, discs (e.g., digital versatile discs (DVD), HD-DVD, BLU-RAY, compact disc (CD), or CD-ROM) or other optical storage; magnetic cassettes, magnetic tape, magnetic disk storage, floppy disks, or other magnetic storage devices; or any other medium that can be used to store the computer readable instructions and which can be accessed by the computer system 800.
- volatile and non-volatile media such as cache, RAM, ROM, EPROM, EEPROM, FLASH memory, or other solid state memory technology
- discs e.g., digital versatile discs (DVD), HD-DVD, BLU-RAY, compact disc (CD), or CD-ROM
- CD-ROM compact disc
- magnetic cassettes magnetic tape
- magnetic disk storage floppy disks
- magnetic storage devices or any other medium that can
- the computer system 800 is within a cloud-based network.
- the server 850 is a designated physical server for distributed computing devices 820, 830, and 840.
- the server 850 is a cloud-based server platform.
- the cloud-based server platform hosts serverless functions for distributed computing devices 820, 830, and 840.
- the computer system 800 is within an edge computing network.
- the server 850 is an edge server
- the database 870 is an edge database.
- the edge server 850 and the edge database 870 are part of an edge computing platform.
- the edge server 850 and the edge database 870 are designated to distributed computing devices 820, 830, and 840.
- the edge server 850 and the edge database 870 are not designated for computing devices 820, 830, and 840.
- the distributed computing devices 820, 830, and 840 are connected to an edge server in the edge computing network based on proximity, availability, latency, bandwidth, and/or other factors.
- the computer system 800 may not include all of the components shown in FIG. 81 may include other components that are not explicitly shown in FIG. 81 or may utilize an architecture completely different than that shown in FIG. 81.
- the various illustrative logical blocks, modules, elements, circuits, and algorithms described in connection with the embodiments discussed herein may be implemented as electronic hardware, computer software, or combinations of both. To clearly illustrate the interchangeability of hardware and software, various illustrative components, blocks, modules, circuits, and steps have been described above generally in terms of their functionality. Whether such functionality is implemented as hardware or software depends upon the particular application and design constraints imposed on the overall system.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
- Processing Of Color Television Signals (AREA)
Abstract
The present invention includes systems and methods for a multi-primary color system for display. A multi-primary color system increases the number of primary colors available in a color system and color system equipment. Increasing the number of primary colors reduces metameric errors from viewer to viewer. One embodiment of the multi-primary color system includes Red, Green, Blue, Cyan, Yellow, and Magenta primaries. The systems of the present invention maintain compatibility with existing color systems and equipment and provide systems for backwards compatibility with older color systems.
Description
SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR A MULTI-PRIMARY WIDE GAMUT COLOR SYSTEM
CROSS REFERENCES TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
[0001] This application relates to and claims priority from the following application. This application claims priority from U.S. Application No. 17/976,347, filed October 28, 2022, which is incorporated herein by reference.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
[0002] 1 . Field of the Invention
[0003] The present invention relates to color systems, and more specifically to a wide gamut color system with an increased number of primary colors.
[0004] 2. Description of the Prior Art
[0005] It is generally known in the prior art to provide for an increased color gamut system within a display.
[0006] Prior art patent documents include the following:
[0007] U.S. Patent No. 10,2.2.2,2.63 for RGB value calculation device by inventor Yasuyuki Shigezane, filed February 6, 2017 and issued March 5, 2019, is directed to a microcomputer that equally divides the circumference of an RGB circle into 6xn (n is an integer of 1 or more) parts, and calculates an RGB value of each divided color. (2.55, 0, 0) is stored as a reference RGB value of a reference color in a ROM in the microcomputer. The microcomputer converts the reference RGB value depending on an angular difference of the RGB circle between a designated color whose RGB value is to be found and the reference color, and assumes the converted RGB value as an RGB value of the designated color.
[0008] U.S. Patent No. 9,373,305 for Semiconductor device, image processing system and program by inventor Hiorfumi Kawaguchi, filed May 29, 2015 and issued June 21, 2016, is directed to an image process device including a display panel operable to provide an input interface for receiving an input of an adjustmen t value of at least a part of color attribu tes of each vertex of n axes (n is an integer equal to or greater than 3) serving as adjustment axes in an RGB color space, and an adjustment data generation unit operable to calculate the degree of influence indicative of a following index of each of the n-axis vertices, for each of the n axes, on a basis of distance between each of the n-axis vertices and a target point which is an arbitrary lattice point in the RGB color space, and operable to calculate adj usted coordinates of the target point in the RGB color space.
[0009] U.S. Publication No. 20130278993 for Color-mixing bi-primary color systems for displays by inventors Heikenfeld, et al., filed September 1, 2011 and published October 24,
2013, is directed to a display pixel. The pixel includes first and second substrates arranged to define a channel. A fluid is located within the channel and includes a first colorant and a second colorant. The first colorant has a first charge and a color. The second colorant has a second charge that is opposite in polarity to the first charge and a color that is complimentary to the color of the first colorant. A first electrode, with a voltage source, is operably coupled to the fluid and configured to moving one or both of the first and second colorants within the fluid and alter at least one spectral property of the pixel.
[0010] U.S. Patent No. 8,599,226 for Device and method of data conversion for wide gamut displays by inventors Ben-Chorin, et al., filed February 13, 2012 and issued December 3, 2013, is directed to a method and system for converting color image data from a, for example, three-dimensional color space format to a format usable by an n-primary display, wherein n is greater than or equal to 3. The system may define a two-dimensional sub-space having a plurality of two-dimensional positions, each position representing a set of n primary color values and a third, scaleable coordinate value for generating an n-primary display input signal. Furthermore, the system may- receive a three-dimensional color space input signal including out-of range pixel data not reproducible by a three-primary additive display, and may convert the data to side gamut color image pixel data suitable for driving the wide gamut color display.
[0011] U.S. Patent No. 8,081,835 for Multiprimary color sub-pixel rendering with metameric filtering by inventors Elliott, et al., filed July 13, 2010 and issued December 20, 2011, is directed to systems and methods of rendering image data to multiprimary displays that adjusts image data across metamers as herein disclosed. The metamer filtering may be based upon input image content and may optimize sub-pixel values to improve image rendering accuracy or perception. The optimizations may be made according to many possible desired effects. One embodiment comprises a display system comprising: a display, said display capable of selecting from a set of image data values, said set comprising at least one metamer; an input image data unit; a spatial frequency detection unit, said spatial frequency detection unit extracting a spatial frequency characteristic from said input image data; and a selection unit, said unit selecting image data from said metamer according to said spatial frequency characteristic.
[0012] U.S. Patent No. 7,916,939 for High brightness wide gamut display by inventors Roth, et al., filed November 30, 2009 and issued March 29, 2011, is directed to a device to produce a color image, the device including a color filtering arrangement to produce at least
four colors, each color produced by a filter on a color filtering mechanism having a relative segment size, wherein the relative segment sizes of at least two of the primary colors differ. [0013] U.S. Patent No. 6,769,772 for Six color display apparatus having increased color gamut by inventors Roddy, et al., filed October 11, 2002 and issued August 3, 2004, is directed to a display system for digital color images using six color light sources or two or more multicolor LED arrays or OLEDs to provide an expanded color gamut. Apparatus uses two or more spatial light modulators, which may be cycled between two or more color light sources or LED arrays to provide a six-color display output. Pairing of modulated colors using relative luminance helps to minimize flicker effects.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
[0014] It is an object of this invention to provide an enhancement to the current RGB systems or a replacement tor them.
[0015] In one embodiment, the present invention provides a system for displaying a primary color system, including a set of image data including a set of primary color signals, wherein the set of primmy color signals corresponds to a set of values in an International Commission on Illumination (CIE) Yxy color space, wherein the set of values in the CIE Yxy color space includes a luminance (Y) and two colorimetric coordinates (x,y), wherein the set of image data includes medical image data, and an image data converter, wherein the image data converter includes a digital interface, and wherein the digital interface is operable to encode and decode the set of values in the CIE Yxy color space, wherein the encode and the decode includes transportation of processed data, wherein the processed data includes a first channel related to the luminance (Y >. a second channel related to a first colorimetric coordinate (x) of the two colorimetric coordinates (x,y), and a third channel related to the second colorimetric coordinate (y) of the two colorimetric coordinates (x,y), and wherein the image data converter is operable to convert the set of image data for display on at least one viewing device.
[0016] In another embodiment, the present invention provides a system for displaying a primary color system, including a set of image data including a set of primary color signals, wherein the set of primary color signals corresponds to a set of values in an International Commission on Illumination (CIE) Yxy color space, wherein the set of values in the CIE Yxy color space includes a luminance (Y) and two colorimetric coordinates (x,y), wherein the set of image data includes medical image data, at least one imager, wherein one or more of the at least one imager is operable to provide the medical image data, and an image data converter, wherein the image data converter includes a digital interface, and wherein the digital interface
is operable to encode and decode the set of values in the CIE ¥xy color space, wherein the encode and the decode includes transportation of processed data, wherein the processed data includes a first channel related to the luminance (Y), a second channel related to a first colorimetric coordinate (x) of the two colorimetric coordinates (x,y), and a third channel related to the second colorimetric coordinate (y) of the two colorimetric coordinates (x,y), wherein the one or more of the at least one imager is incorporated into at least one medical device, and wherein the image data converter is operable to convert the set of image data for display on at least one viewing device.
[0017] In yet another embodiment, the present invention provides a system for displaying a primary color system including a set of image data including a set of primary color signals, wherein the set of primary color signals corresponds to a set of values in an International Commission on Illumination (CIE) Yxy color space, wherein the set of values in the CIE Yxy color space includes a luminance (Y) and two colorimetric coordinates (x,y), wherein the set of image data includes medical image data, at least one imager, wherein one or more of the at least one imager is operable to provide the medical image data, an image data converter, wherein the image data converter includes a digital interface, and wherein the digital interface is operable to encode and decode the set of values in the CIE Yxy color space, and at least one viewing device, wherein the image data converter and the at least one viewing device are in communication, wherein the encode and the decode includes transportation of processed data, wherein the processed data includes a first channel related to the luminance (Y), a second channel related to a first colorimetric coordinate (x) of the two colorimetric coordinates (x,y), and a third channel related to the second colorimetric coordinate (y) of the two colorimetric coordinates (x,y), and wherein the image data converter is operable to convert the set of image data for display on the at least one viewing device.
[0018] These and other aspects of the present invention will become apparent to those skilled in the art after a reading of the folio-wing description of the preferred embodimen t when considered with the drawings, as they support the claimed invention.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
[0019] The patent or application file contains at least one drawing executed in color. Copies of this patent or patent application publication with color drawing(s) will be provided by the Office upon request and payment of the necessary fee.
[0020] FIG, 1 illustrates one embodiment of a six primary system including a red primary-, a green primary-, a blue primary, a cyan primary, a magenta primary-, and a yellow primary (“6P-B”) compared to ITU-R BT.709-6.
[0021] FIG. 2 illustrates another embodiment of a six primary system including a red primary, a green primary, a blue primary, a cyan primary, a magenta primary, and a yellow primary (“6P-C”) compared to Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (SMPTE) RP431-2 for a D60 white point,
[0022] FIG, 3 illustrates yet another embodiment of a six primary system including a red primary, a green primary, a blue primary, a cyan primary, a magenta primary, and a yellow primary (“6P-C”) compared to SMPTE RP431-2 for a D65 white point.
[0023] FIG. 4 illustrates Super 6Pa compared to 6P-C.
[0024] FIG. 5 illustrates Super 6Pb compared to Super 6Pa and 6P-C.
[0025] FIG. 6 illustrates an embodiment of an encode and decode system for a multi- primary color system.
[0026] FIG . 7 illustrates a sequential method where three color primaries are passed to the transport format as full bit level image data and inserted as normal (“System 2”).
[0027] FIG. 8 illustrates one embodiment of a system encode and decode process using a dual link method (“System 3”).
[0028] FIG. 9 illustrates one embodiment of an encoding process using a dual link method.
[0029] FIG, 10 illustrates one embodiment of a decoding process using a dual link method.
[0030] FIG. 11 illustrates one embodiment of a Yxy or Yu'v' encode with a non-linear transfer function (NLTF).
[0031] FIG. 12 illustrates one embodimen t of a Yxy or Yu'v' encode without an NLTF.
[0032] FIG. 13 illustrates one embodimen t of a Yxy or Yu'v' decode with an inverse non- linear transfer function (NLTF-1).
[0033] FIG, 14 illustrates one embodiment of a Yxy or Yu'v" decode without an NLTF-1.
[0034] FIG, 15A illustrates one embodiment of a 4:2:2 Yxy encode with an NLTF.
[0035] FIG. 15B illustrates one embodiment of a 4:2:2 Yxy encode without an NLTF.
[0036] FIG. 16A illustrates one embodiment of a 4:2:2 Yxy encode with an NLTF applied to all three channels and linear scaling of x and y.
[0037] FIG. 16B illustrates one embodiment of a 4:2:2 Yxy encode without an NLTF and with linear scaling of x and y.
[0038] FIG, 17A illustrates one embodiment of a 4:4:4 Yxy encode with an NLTF.
[0039] FIG. 17B illustrates one embodiment of a 4:4:4 Yxy encode without an NLTF.
[0040] FIG. ISA illustrates one embodiment of a 4:4:4 Yxy encode with an NLTF applied to all three channels and linear scaling of x and y.
[0041] FIG. 18B illustrates one embodiment of a 4:4:4 Yxy encode without an NLTF and with linear scaling of x and y.
[0042] FIG, 19 illustrates sample placements of Yxy system components for a 4:2:2 pixel mapping.
[0043] FIG. 20 illustrates sample placements of Yxy system components for a 4:2:0 pixel mapping.
[0044] FIG. 21 illustrates one embodiment of a SMPTE ST292 Yxy system mapping.
[0045] FIG. 22 illustrates one embodiment of a SMPTE ST2082 Yxy system mapping.
[0046] FIG. 23 illustrates one embodiment of Yxy inserted into a CTA 861 stream.
[0047] FIG . 24A illustrates one embodiment of a Yxy decode with an inverse non-linear transfer function (NLTF-1) applied only to the Y channel.
[0048] FIG. 24B illustrates one embodiment of a Yxy decode without an NLTF1 applied to any of the channels.
[0049] FIG. 25 A illustrates one embodiment of a Y xy decode with an NLTF-1 applied to all three channels and rescaling of x and y.
[0050] FIG, 25B illustrates one embodiment of a Yxy decode without an NLTF* applied to any of the channels and with rescaling applied to the x and y channels.
[0051] FIG. 26A illustrates one embodiment of an IPT 4:4:4 encode.
[0052] FIG. 26B illustrates one embodiment of an IPT 4:4:4 decode.
[0053] FIG. 27A illustrates one embodiment of an ICTCP 4:2:2 encode.
[0054] FIG. 27B illustrates one embodiment of an ICTCP 4:2:2 decode.
[0055] FIG. 28 illustrates one embodiment of a A gamma function.
[0056] FIG, 29 illustrates a graph of maximum quantizing error using the ‘A gamma function.
[0057] FIG. 30 illustrates one embodiment of a 1/3 gamma function.
[0058] FIG. 31 illustrates one embodiment of an encoder.
[0059] FIG. 32 illustrates one embodimen t of a decoder.
[0060] FIG. 33 illustrates one embodiment of a display engine operable to interact with a graphics processing unit (GPL!) according to the present invention.
[0061] FIG, 34 illustrates one embodiment of a process flow diagram to convert an image for display.
[0062] FIG. 35 illustrates one embodiment of a camera process flow.
[0063] FIG. 36 illustrates one embodiment of a display process flow.
[0064] FIG. 37 illustrates one embodiment of modifications to payload ID metadata as applied to SMPTE ST352.
[0065] FIG, 38A illustrates one embodiment of modifications to payload ID as applied to SMPTE ST352 and ST292.
[0066] FIG. 38B illustrates one embodiment of payload ID as applied to SMPTE ST352 and ST372.
[0067] FIG. 38C illustrates one embodiment of payload ID as applied to SMPTE ST352 and ST425.
[0068] FIG. 39 illustrates one embodiment of a System 4 Yxy 10-bit 4:2:2 encode as applied to SMPTE ST292.
[0069] FIG . 40A illustrates one embodiment of a first link for a System 4 Yxy 10-bit 4:4:4 YCBCR encode as applied to SMPTE ST372.
[0070] FIG. 40B illustrates one embodiment of a second link for a System 4 Yxy 10-bit 4:4:4 YCBCR encode as applied to SMPTE ST372.
[0071] FIG. 41A illustrates one embodiment of a first link for a System 4 Yxy 10-bit 4:4:4 RGB encode as applied to SMPTE ST372.
[0072] FIG, 41B illustrates one embodiment of a second link for a System 4 Yxy 1 O-bit 4:4:4 RGB encode as applied to SMPTE ST372.
[0073] FIG. 42A illustrates one embodiment of a first link for a System 4 Y xy 12-bit 4:4:4 YCBCR encode as applied to SMPTE ST372.
[0074] FIG. 42B illustrates one embodiment of a second link for a System 4 Yxy 12-bit 4:4:4 YCBCR encode as applied to SMPTE ST372.
[0075] FIG. 43A illustrates one embodiment of a first link for a System 4 12-bit Yxy 4:4:4 RGB encode as applied to SMPTE ST372.
[0076] FIG. 43B illustrates one embodiment of a second link for a System 4 Yxy 12-bit 4:4:4 RGB encode as applied to SMPTE ST372.
[0077] FIG. 44A illustrates one embodiment of a first data stream for a System 4 Yxy 10- bit 4:2:2 Level A encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
[0078] FIG. 44B illustrates one embodiment of a second data stream for a System 4 Yxy 10-bit 4:2:2 Level A encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
[0079] FIG, 45 A illustrates one embodiment of a first data stream for a Yxy System 4 10- bit 4:4:4 Level A encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
[0080] FIG. 45B illustrates one embodiment of a second data stream for a Yxy System 4 10-bit 4:4:4 Level A encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
[0081 ] FIG. 46A illustrates one embodiment of a first data stream for a Yxy System 4 12- bit 4:4:4 Level A encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
[0082] FIG, 46B illustrates one embodiment of a second data stream for a Yxy System 4 12-bit 4:4:4 Level A encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
[0083] FIG. 47A illustrates one embodiment of a first data stream for a System 4 Yxy 12- bit 4:2:2 Level A encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
[0084] FIG. 47B illustrates one embodiment of a second data stream for a System 4 Yxy 12-bit 4:2:2 Level A encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
[0085] FIG. 48A illustrates one embodiment of a first data stream for a System 4 Yxy Level B Multiplex Dual Stream (DS) encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
[0086] FIG. 48B illustrates one embodiment of a second data stream for a System 4 Yxy Level B Multiplex Dual Stream (DS) encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
[0087] FIG. 49A illustrates one embodiment of a first data link for a System 4 Yxy 10-bit Level B Multiplex Dual Link (DL) encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
[00881 FIG. 49B illustrates one embodiment of a second data link for a System 4 Yxy 10- bit Level B Multiplex Dual Link (DL) encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
[0089] FIG . 50A illustrates one embodiment of a first data link for a System 4 Yxy 12-bit Level B Multiplex Dual Link (DL) encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
[0090] FIG. 50B illustrates one embodiment of a second data link for a System 4 Yxy 12- bit Level B Multiplex Dual Link (DL) encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
[0091] FIG. 51 is a table illustrating modification of SMPTE ST2036-1 (2014) parameters to include System 4 (e.g., Yxy, Yu'v’).
[0092] FIG, 52. is a table illustrating modification of CTA 861 Table 6 - Colorimetry Transfer Characteristics to include System 4 (e.g., Yxy, Yu'v').
[0093] FIG. 53A is a table for Yxy 8-bit 4:2:2 encoding with 4 lanes.
[0094] FIG. 53B is a table for Yxy 8-bit 4:2:2. encoding with 2 lanes.
[0095] FIG. 53C is a table tor Yxy 8-bit 4:2:2 encoding with 1 lane.
[0096] FIG. 54A is a table for Yxy 10-bit 4:2:2 encoding with 4 lanes.
[0097] FIG. 54B is a table for Yxy 10-bit 4:2:2 encoding with 2 lanes.
[0098] FIG, 54C is a table for Yxy 10-bit 4:2:2 encoding with 1 lane.
[0099] FIG. 55A is a table for Yxy 12-bit 4:2:2 encoding with 4 lanes.
[00100] FIG. 55B is a table for Yxy 12-bit 4:2:2. encoding with 2 lanes.
[00101] FIG. 55C is a table for Yxy 12-bit 4:2:2. encoding with 1 lane.
[00102] FIG. 56A is a table for Yxy 16-brt 4:2:2 encoding with 4 lanes.
[00103] FIG. 56B is a table for Y xy 16-bit 4:2:2 encoding with 2 lanes.
[00104] FIG, 56C is a table for Yxy 16-bit 4:2:2 encoding with 1 lane.
[00105] FIG, 57A is a table for Yxy 10-bit 4:4:4 encoding with 4 lanes.
[00106] FIG. 57B is a table for Yxy 10-bit 4:4:4 encoding with 2 lanes.
[00107] FIG. 57C is a table for Yxy 10-bit 4:4:4 encoding with 1 lane.
[00108] FIG. 58A is atable for Yxy 12-bit 4:4:4 encoding with 4 lanes,
[00109] FIG. 58B is a table for Yxy 12-bit 4:4:4 encoding with 2 lanes.
[00110] FIG. 58C is a table for Yxy 12-bit 4:4:4 encoding with 1 lane.
[00111] FIG. 59A is atable for Yxy 16-bit 4:4:4 encoding with 4 lanes.
[00112] FIG, 59B is a table for Yxy 16-bit 4:4:4 encoding with 2 lanes.
[00113] FIG. 59C is a table for Yxy 16-bit 4:4:4 encoding with 1 lane.
[00114] FIG. 60 is table with auxiliary video information (AVI) for InfoFrame version 4.
[00115] FIG. 61 illustrates an RGB sampling transmission for a 4:4:4 sampling system.
[00116] FIG. 62 illustrates a RGBCYM sampling transmission for a 4:4:4 sampling system.
[00117] FIG, 63 illustrates an example of System 2 to RGBCYM 4:4:4 transmission .
[00118] FIG, 64 illustrates a Y Cb Cr sampling transmission using a 4:2:2 sampling system.
[00119] FIG. 65 illustrates a Y Cr Cb Cc Cy sampling transmission using a 4:2:2 sampling system.
[00120] FIG. 66 illustrates an example of a System 2 to Y Cr Cb Cc Cy 4:2:2 Transmission as non-constant luminance.
[00121] FIG, 67 illustrates a Y Cb Cr sampling transmission using a 4:2:0 sampling system ,
[00122] FIG. 68 illustrates a Y Cr Cb Cc Cy sampling transmission using a 4:2:0 sampling system.
[00123] FIG. 69 illustrates a dual stack LCD projection system for a, six-primary color system.
[00124] FIG. 70 illustrates one embodiment of a single projector.
[00125] FIG, 71 illustrates a six-primary color system using a single projector and reciprocal mirrors.
[00126] FIG. 72 illustrates a dual stack DMD projection system for a six-primary color system.
[00127] FIG. 73 illustrates one embodiment of a single DMD projector solution.
[00128] FIG, 74 illustrates one embodiment of a color filter array for a six-primary color system with a white OLED monitor.
[00129] FIG. 75 illustrates one embodiment of an optical filter array for a six-primary color system with a white OLED monitor.
[00130] FIG. 76 illustrates one embodiment of a matrix of an LCD drive for a six-primary color system with a backlight illuminated LCD monitor.
[00131] FIG. 77 illustrates one embodiment of an optical filter array for a six-primary color system with a backlight illuminated LCD monitor.
[00132] FIG. 78 illustrates an array for a Quantum Dot (QD) display device.
[00133] FIG. 79 illustrates one embodiment of an array for a six-primary color system for use with a direct emissive assembled display.
[00134] FIG. 80 illustrates one embodiment of a six-primary color system in an emissive display that does not incorporate color filtered subpixels.
[00135] FIG. 81 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of the invention illustrating a computer system ,
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
[00136] The present invention is generally directed to a multi-primary color system. [00137] In one embodiment, the present invention provides a system for displaying a primary color system, including a set of image data including a set of primary color signals, wherein the set of primary color signals corresponds to a set of values in an International Commission on Illumination (CIE) Yxy color space, wherein the set of values in the CIE Yxy color space includes a luminance (Y) and two colorimetric coordinates (x,y), wherein the set of image data includes medical image data, and an image data converter, wherein the image data converter includes a digital interface, and wherein the digital interface is operable to encode and decode the set of values in the CIE Yxy color space, wherein the encode and the decode includes transportation of processed data, wherein the processed data includes a first channel related to the luminance (Y), a second channel related to a first colorimetric coordinate (x) of the two colorimetric coordinates (x,y), and a third channel related to the second colorimetric coordinate (y) of the two colorimetric coordinates (x,y), and wherein the image data converter is operable to convert the set of image data for display on at least one viewing device. In one embodiment, the image data converter is operable to convert the set of
values in the CIE Yxy color space to a plurality of color gamuts. In one embodiment, the image data converter includes a look-up table. In one embodiment, the set of image data includes colors outside of an International Telecommunication Union Recommendation (ITU-R) BT.2020 color gamut. In one embodiment, the image data converter is operable to fully sample the processed data on the first channel and subsample the processed data on the second channel and the third channel. In one embodiment, the processed data on the first channel, the second channel, and the third channel are fully sampled. In one embodiment, the encode includes scaling of the two colorimetric coordinates (x,y), thereby creating a first scaled colorimetric coordinate and a second scaled colorimetric coordinate and/or the decode includes rescaling of data related to the first scaled colorimetric coordinate and data related to the second scaled colorimetric coordinate. In one embodiment, the encode includes converting the set of primary color signals to XYZ data and then converting the XYZ data to create the set of values in the CIE Yxy color space and/or the decode includes converting the processed data to XYZ data and then converting the XYZ data to a format operable to display on the at least one viewing device. In one embodiment, the system further includes at least one non-linear function, wherein the at least one non-linear function includes a data range reduction function with a value between about 0.25 and about 0.9 and/or an inverse data range reduction function with a value between about 1 .1 and about 4. In one embodiment, the system further includes at least one imager, wherein one or more of the at least one imager is operable to provide the medical image data. In one embodiment, the system is compatible with Digital Imaging Communication in Medicine standards for metadata. In one embodiment, the system further includes at least one processor coupled to at least one memory and at least one learning algorithm for image processing and comparison. In one embodiment, the set of image data further includes hyperspectral data, ultraviolet (UV) data, and/or infrared (I R ) data. In one embodiment, the image data converter is operable to create two different three-coordinate format elements, wherein the first three-coordinate format element is Y xy and the second three-coordinate format element includes a first coordinate related to the UV data, a second coordinate related to the IR data, and a third coordinate proportional to an intensity of the UV data and the IR data. In one embodiment, the system further includes at least one chip chart or at least one tele-med-chart with a plurality of colors and/or at least one reference to calibrate the system.
[00138] In another embodiment, the present invention provides a system for displaying a primary color system, including a set of image data including a set of primary color signals, wherein the set of primary color signals corresponds to a set of values in an International
Commission on Illumination (CIE) Yxy color space, wherein the set of values in the CIE Yxy color space includes a luminance (Y) and two colorimetric coordinates (x,y), wherein the set of image data includes medical image data, at least one imager, wherein one or more of the at least one imager is operable to provide the medical image data, and an image data converter, wherein the image data converter includes a digital interface, and wherein the digital interface is operable to encode and decode the set of values in the CIE Yxy color space, wherein the encode and the decode includes transportation of processed data, wherein the processed data includes a first channel related to the luminance O'), a second channel related to a first colorimetric coordinate (x) of the two colorimetric coordinates (x,y), and a third channel related to the second colorimetric coordinate (y) of the two colorimetric coordinates (x,y), wherein the one or more of the at least one imager is incorporated into at least one medical device, and wherein the image data converter is operable to convert the set of image data for display on at least one viewing device.
[00139] In yet another embodiment, tire present invention provides a system for displaying a primary color system including a set of image data including a set of primary color signals, wherein the set of primary color signals corresponds to a set of values in an International Commission on Illumination (CIE) Yxy color space, wherein the set of values in the CIE Yxy color space includes a luminance (Y) and two colorimetric coordinates (x,y), wherein the set of image data includes medical image data, at least one imager, wherein one or more of the at least one imager is operable to provide the medical image data, an image data converter, wherein the image data converter includes a digital interface, and wherein the digital interface is operable to encode and decode the set of values in the CIE Yxy color space, and at least one viewing device, wherein the image data converter and the at least one viewing device are in communication, wherein the encode and the decode includes transportation of processed data, wherein the processed data includes a first channel related to the luminance (Y), a second channel related to a first colorimetric coordinate (x) of the two colorimetric coordinates (x,y), and a third channel related to the second colorimetric coordinate (y) of the two colorimetric coordinates (x,y), and wherein the image data converter is operable to convert the set of image data for display on the at least one viewing device. In one embodiment, the at least one viewing device includes at least four primaries. In one embodiment, the at least one viewing device is operable to display colors outside of an International Telecommunication Union Recommendation (ITU-R) BT.2020 color gamut. In one embodiment, the at least one viewing device includes a headset configured for virtual reality, augmented reality, and/or mixed reality environments.
[00140] The present invention relates to color systems, A multitude of color systems are known, but they continue to suffer numerous issues. As imaging technology is moving forward, there has been a significant interest in expanding the range of colors that are replicated on electronic displays. Enhancements to the television system have expanded from the early CCIR 601 standard to ITU-R BT.709-6, to Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (SMPTE) RP431-2, and ITU-R BT.2020. Each one has increased the gamut of visible colors by expanding the distance from the reference white point to the position of the Red (R), Green (G), and Blue (B) color primaries (collectively known as “RGB”) in chromaticity space. While this approach works, it has several disadvantages. When implemented in content presentation, issues arise due to the technical methods used to expand the gamut of colors seen (typically using a more-narrow emissive spectrum) can result in increased viewer metameric errors and require increased power due to lower illumination source. These issues increase both capital and operational costs.
[00141] With the current available technologies, displays are limited in respect to their range of color and light output. There are many misconceptions regarding how viewers interpret the display output technically versus real-world sensations viewed with the human eye. The reason we see more than just the three emitting primary colors is because the eye combines the spectral wavelengths incident on it into the three bands. Humans interpret the radiant energy (spectrum and amplitude) from a display and process it so that an individual color is perceived. The display does not emit a color or a specific w avelength that directly relates to the sensation of color. It simply radiates energy at the same spectrum winch humans sense as light and color. It is the observer who interprets this energy as color.
[00142] When the CIE 2° standard observer was established in 1931 , common understanding of color sensation was that the eye used red, blue, and green cone receptors (James Maxwell & James Forbes 1855). Later with the Munsell vision model (Munsell 1915), Munsell described the vision system to include three separate components: luminance, hue, and saturation. Using RGB emitters or filters, these three primary colors are the components used to produce images on today’s modem electronic displays.
[00143] There are three primary physical variables that affect sensation of color. Those are the spectral distribution of radiant energy as it is absorbed into the retina, the sensitivity of the eye in relation to the intensity of light landing on the retinal pigment epithelium, and the distribution of cones within the retina. The distribution of cones (e.g., L cones, M cones, and S cones) varies considerably from person to person.
[00144] Enhancements in brightness have been accomplished through larger backlights or higher efficiency phosphors. Encoding of higher dynamic ranges is addressed using higher range, more perceptually uniform electro-optical transfer functions to support these enhancements to brightness technology, while wider color gamuts are produced by using narrow bandwidth emissions. Narrower bandwadth emitters result in the viewer experiencing higher color saturation. But there can be a disconnect between how saturation is produced and how it is controlled. What is believed to occur when changing saturation is that increasing color values of a color primary represents an increase to saturation. This is not true, as changing saturation requires the variance of a color primary spectral output as parametric. There are no variable spectrum displays available to date as the technology to do so has not been commercially developed, nor has the new infrastructure required to support this been discussed.
[00145] Instead, the method that a display changes for viewer color sensation is by changing color luminance. As data values increase, the color primary gets brighter. Changes to color saturation are accomplished by varying the brightness of all three primaries and taking advantage of the dominant color theory-.
[00146] Expanding color primaries beyond RGB has been discussed before. There have been numerous designs of multi -primary displays. For example, SHARP has attempted this with their four-color QUATTRON TV systems by adding a yellow color primary and developing an algorithm to drive it. Another four primary color display was proposed by Matthew Brennesholtz which included an additional cyan primary, and a six primary display was described by Yan Xiong, Fei Deng, Shan Xu, and Sufang Gao of the School of Physics and Optoelectric Engineering at the Yangtze University Jingzhou China. In addition, AU OPTRONICS has developed a five primary display technology. SONY has also recently disclosed a camera design featuring RGBCMY (red, green, blue, cyan, magenta, and yellow) and RGBCMYW (red, green, blue cyan, magenta, yellow, and white) sensors.
[00147] Actual working displays have been shown publicly as far back as the late 1990’s, including samples from Tokyo Polytechnic University, Nagoya City University, and Genoa Technologies. However, all of these systems are exclusive to their displays, and any additional color primary information is limited to the display ’s internal processing.
[00148] Additionally, the Visual Arts System for Archiving and Retrieval of Images (VASARI) project developed a colorimetric scanner system for direct digital imaging of paintings. The system provides more accurate coloring than conventional film, allowing it to replace film photography. Despite the project beginning in 1989, technical developments
have continued. Additional information is available at https://w'w-w'-.southampton.ac.uk/~km2/projs/vasari/ (last accessed March 30, 2020), which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
[00149] None of the prior art discloses developing additional color primary information outside of the display. Moreover, the system driving the display is often proprietary to the demonstration. In each of these executions, nothing in the workflow is included to acquire or generate additional color primary information. The development of a multi -primary color system is not complete if the only part of the system that supports the added primaries is within the display itself.
[00150] Referring now to the drawings in general, the illustrations are for the purpose of describing one or more preferred embodiments of the invention and are not intended to limit the invention thereto.
[00151 ] Additional details about multi-primary systems are available in U.S. Patent Nos. 10,607,527; 10,950,160; 10,950,161; 10,950,162; 10,997,896; 11,011,098; 11,017,708; 1 1 ,030,934; 11,037,480; 11,037,481; 11 ,037,482; 1 1,043,157; 11,049,431; 11 ,062,638; 11,062,639; 11,069,279; 11,069,280; and 1 1,100,838 and U.S. Publication Nos.
20200251039, 20210233454, and 20210209990, each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety,
[00152] Traditional displays include three primaries: red, green, and blue. The multi- primary- systems of the present invention include at least four primaries. The at least four primaries preferably include at least one red primary, at least one green primary, and/or at least one blue primary. In one embodiment, the at least four primaries include a cyan primary-, a magenta, primary-, and/or a. yellow- primary. In one embodiment, the at least four primaries include at least one white primary.
[00153] In one embodiment, the multi-primary system includes six primaries. In one preferred embodiment, the six primaries include a red (R) primary-, a green (G) primary-, a blue (B) primary-, a cyan (C) primary-, a magenta (M) primary-, and a yellow- (Y) primary-, often referred to as “RGBCMY”. How-ever, the systems and methods of the present invention are not restricted to RGBCMY, and alternative primaries are compatible with the present invention.
[00154] 6P-B
[00155] 6P-B is a color set that uses the same RGB values that are defined in the ITU-R
BT.709-6 television standard. The gamut includes these RGB primary colors and then adds
three more color primaries orthogonal to these based on the white point. The white point used in 6P-B is D65 (ISO 11664-2).
[00156] In one embodiment, the red primary has a dominant wavelength of 609nm, the yellow primary has a dominant wavelength of 571nm, the green primary has a dominant wavelength of 552nm, the cyan primary has a dominant wavelength of 491nm, and the blue primary has a dominant wavelength of 465nm as shown in Table 1. In one embodiment, the dominant wavelength is approximately (e.g., within ±10%) the value listed in the table below. Alternatively, the dominant wavelength is within ±5% of the value listed in the table below. In yet another embodiment, the dominant w avelength is w ithin ±2% of the value listed in the table below.
[00158] FIG . 1 illustrates 6P-B compared to ITU-RBT.709-6.
[00159] 6P-C
[00160] 6P-C is based on the same RGB primaries defined in SMPTE RP431-2 projection recommendation. Each gamut includes these RGB primary colors and then adds three more color primaries orthogonal to these based on the white point. The white point used in 6P-B is D65 (ISO 11664-2). Two versions of 6P-C are used. One is optimized for a D60 white point (SMPTE ST2065-1), and the other is optimized for a D65 white point. Additional information about white points is available in ISO 11664-2:2007 Colorimetry — Part 2: CIE standard illuminants” published in 2007 and "ST 2065-1 :2012 - SMPTE Standard - Academy Color Encoding Specification (ACES)," in ST 2065-1:2012, pp.1-23, 17 April 2012, doi: 10.5594/SMPTE.ST2065-1 .2012, each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
[00161] hi one embodiment, the red primary has a dominant wavelength of 615nm, the yellow' primary has a dominant wavelength of 570nm, the green primary has a dominant
wavelength of 545nm, the cyan primary has a dominant wavelength of 493nm, and the blue primary has a dominant wavelength of 465nm as showm in Table 2. In one embodiment, the dominant wavelength is approximately (e.g., within ±10%) the value listed in the table below'. Alternatively, the dominant wavelength is within ±5% of the value listed in the table below. In yet another embodiment, the dominant wavelength is within ±2% of the value listed in the table below'.
[00163] FIG. 2 illustrates 6P-C compared to SMPTE RP431-2 for a D60 white point. [00164] In one embodiment, the red primary has a dominant wavelength of 615mn, the yellow primary- has a dominant wavelength of 570nm, the green primary has a dominant wavelength of 545nm, the cyan primary has a dominant wavelength of 423nm, and the blue primary has a dominant wavelength of 465nm as shown in Table 3. In one embodiment, the dominant wavelength is approximately (e.g., within ±10%) the value listed in the table below. Alternatively, the dominant wavelength is within ±5% of the value listed in the table below. In yet another embodiment, the dominant wavelength is within ±2% of the value listed in the table below.
[00166] FIG. 3 illustrates 6P-C compared to SMPTE RP431 -2 for a. D65 white point.
[00167] SUPER 6P
[00168] One of the advantages of ITU-R BT.2020 is that it is operable to include all of the Pointer colors and. that increasing primary saturation in a six-color primary' design is also operable to do this. Pointer is described in ‘"The Gamut of Real Surface Colors”, M.R. Pointer, Published in Colour Research and Application Volume #5, Issue #3 (1980), which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. However, extending the 6P gamut beyond SMPTE RP431-2 (“6P-C”) adds two problems. The first problem is the requirement to narrow the spectrum of the extended primaries. The second problem is the complexity of designing a. backwards compatible system using color primaries that are not related to current standards. But in some cases, there is a need to extend the gamut beyond 6P-C and avoid these problems. If the goal is to encompass Pointer’s data set, then it is possible to keep most of the 6P-C sy stem and only change the cyan color primary position. In one embodiment, the cyan color primary position is located so that the gamut edge encompasses all of Pointer’s data set. In another embodiment, the cyan color primary position is a location that limits maximum saturation. With 6P-C, cyan is positioned as u' =0.096, v -0.454. In one embodiment of Super 6P, cyan is moved to u' =0.075, v -0.430 (" Super 6Pa” (S6Pa)). Advantageously, this creates a new gamut that covers Pointer’s data set. almost in its entirety. FIG. 4 illustrates Super 6Pa compared to 6P-C.
[00169] Table 4 is a table of values for Super 6Pa. The definition of x,y are described in ISO 11664 -3:2012/CIE S 014 Part 3, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety'. The definition of u',v' are described in ISO 11664-5: 2016/CIE S 014 Part 5, which is incorporated herein by reference m its entirety. λ ' defines each color primary as dominant color wavelength for RGB and. complementary wavelengths CMY.
[00171] In an alternative embodiment, the saturation is expanded on the same hue angle as 6P-C as shown in FIG. 5. Advantageously, this makes backward compatibility less complicated. However, this requires much more saturation (i.e., narrower spectra). In another embodiment of Super 6P, cyan is moved to u '=0.067, v -0.449 (‘"Super 6Pb” (S6Pb)). Additionally, FIG. 5 illustrates Super 6Pb compared to Super 6Pa and 6P-C.
[00172 ] Table 5 is a table of values for Super 6Pb. The definition of x,y are described in
ISO 1 1664 -3:2012/CIE S 014 Part 3 published m 2012, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. The definition of u',v' are described in ISO 11664-5: 2.016/CIE S 014 Part 5 published in 2016, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety, λ defines each color primary as dominant color wavelength for RGB and complementary wavelengths CMY.
[00174] In a preferred embodiment, a matrix is created from XYZ values of each of the primaries. As the XYZ values of the primaries change, the matrix changes. Additional details about the matrix are described below.
[00175] FORMATTING AND TRANSPORTATION OF MULTI-PRIMARY SIGNALS [00176] The present invention includes three different methods to format video for transport: System I, System 2, and System 3. System 1 is comprised of an encode and decode system, which is operable to be divided into base encoder and digitation, image data stacking, mapping into the standard data transport, readout, unstack, and finally image decoding. In one embodiment, the basic method of this system is to combine opposing color primaries within the three standard transport channels and identify them by their code value.
[00177] System 2 uses a sequential method where three color primaries are passed to the transport format as full bit level image data and inserted as normal. Tire three additional channels are delayed by one pixel and then placed into the transport instead of the first colors. This is useful in situations where quantizing artifacts is critical to image performance. In one embodiment, this system is comprised of the six primaries (e.g., RGB plus a method to delay the CMY colors for injection), image resolution identification to allow for pixel count synchronization, start of video identification, and RGB Delay.
[00178 ] System 3 utili zes a dual link method where two wires are used. In one embodiment, a first set of three channels (e.g., RGB) are sent to link A and a second set of three channels (e.g., CMY) is sent to link B. Once they arrive at the image destination, they are recombined.
[00179 ] To transport up to six color components (e.g., four, five, or six), System 1 , System
2, or System 3 is operable to be used as described. If four color components are used, two of the channels are set to 0. If five color components are used, one of the channels is set to 0. Advantageously, this transportation method works for all primary systems described herein that include up to six color components.
[00180] COMPARISON OF THREE SYSTEMS
[00181] Advantageously, System 1 fits within legacy SDI, CTA, and Ethernet transports. Additionally, System 1 has zero latency processing for conversion to an RGB display. However, System 1 is limited to 11-bit words.
[00182] System 2 is advantageously operable to transport 6 channels using 16-bit words with no compression. Additionally, System 2 fits within newer SDI, CTA, and Ethernet transport formats. However, System 2 requires double bit rate speed. For example, a 4K image requires a data rate for an 8K RGB image.
[00183] In comparison, System 3 is operable to transport up to 6 channels using 16-bit words with compression and at the same data required for a specific resolution. For example, a data rate for an RGB image is the same as for a 6P image using System 3. However, System 3 requires a twin cable connection within the video system.
[00184] NOMENCLATURE
[00185] In one embodiment, a standard video nomenclature is used to better describe each system.
[00186] R describes red data as linear light (e.g., without a non-linear function applied). G describes green data as linear light. B describes blue data as linear light. C describes cyan
data as linear light. M describes magenta data as linear light. P and/or Y describe yellow data as linear light.
[00187] R´ describes red data as non-linear light (e.g., with a non-linear function applied). G' describes green data as non-linear light. B' describes blue data as non-linear light. C' describes cyan data as non-linear light. M* describes magenta data as non-linear light. Yc' and/or Y' describe yellow data as non-linear light.
[00188] Y6 describes the luminance sum of RGBCMY data, YRGB describes a System 2 encode that is the linear luminance sum of the RGB data. YCMY describes a System 2 encode that is the linear luminance sum of the CMY data.
[00189] CR describes the data value of red after subtracting linear image luminance. CB describes the data value of blue after subtracting linear image luminance. Cc describes the data value of cyan after subtracting linear image luminance. Cy describes the data value of yellow after subtracting linear image luminance.
[00190] Y´RGB describes a System 2 encode that is the nonlinear luminance sum of the RGB data. 7 CMY describes a System 2 encode that is the nonlinear luminance sum of the CMY data. -Y describes the sum of RGB data subtracted from Y6.
[00191] C'R describes the data value of red after subtracting nonlinear image luminance.
C'B describes the data value of blue after subtracting nonlinear image luminance. C'c describes the data value of cyan after subtracting nonlinear image luminance. C'y describes the data value of yellow after subtracting nonlinear image luminance.
[00192] B+Y Y describes a System 1 encode that includes either blue or yellow data. G+M describes a System 1 encode that includes either green or magenta data. R+C describes a System 1 encode that includes either green or magenta data.
[00193] CR+CC describes a System 1 encode that includes either color difference data. CB+CY describes a System 1 encode that includes either color difference data.
[00194] 4:4:4 describes full bandwidth sampling of a color in an RGB system. 4:4:4:4:4:4 describes full sampling of a color in an RGBCMY system. 4:2:2 describes an encode where a full bandwidth luminance channel (7) is used to carry image detail and the remaining components are half sampled as a Cb Cr encode. 4:2:2:2:2 describes an encode where a full bandwidth luminance channel (7) is used to cany image detail and the remaining components are half sampled as a Cb Cr Cy Cc encode. 4:2:0 describes a component system similar to 4:2:2, but where Cr and Cb samples alternate per line. 4:2:0:2:0 describes a component system similar to 4:2:2, but where Cr, Cb, Cy, and Cc samples alternate per line.
[00195] Constant luminance is the signal process where luminance (7) values are calculated in linear light. Non-constant luminance is the signal process where luminance (7) values are calculated in nonlinear light.
[00196] DERIVING COLOR COMPONENTS
[00197] When using a color difference method (4: 2:2), several components need specific processing so that they are operable to be used in lower frequency transports. These are derived as:
[00198]
[00201]
[00203] The ratios for Cr, Cb, Cc, and Cy are also valid in linear tight calcuations.
[00204] Magenta is operable to be calculated as follows:
[00206] SYSTEM 1
[00207] In one embodiment, the multi-primary color system is compatible with legacy systems. A backwards-compatible multi-primary color system is defined by a sampling method. In one embodiment, the sampling method is 4:4:4. In one embodiment, the sampling method is 4:2:2. In another embodiment, the sampling method is 4:2:0. In one embodiment of a backwards compatible multi-primary color system, new encode and decode systems are divided into tire steps of performing base encoding and digitization, image data stacking, mapping into the standard data transport, readout, unstacking, and image decoding (“System 1"’). In one embodiment, System 1 combines opposing color primaries within three standard transport channels and identifies them by their code value. In one embodiment of a backwards-compatible multi-primary color system, the processes are analog processes. In another embodiment of a backwards compatible multi-primary color system, the processes are digital processes.
[00208] In one embodiment, the sampling method for a multi-primary color system is a 4:4:4 sampling method. Black and white bits are redefined. In one embodiment, putting black at midlevel within each data word allows the addition of CMY color data.
[00209] FIG. 6 illustrates an embodiment of an encode and decode system for a multiprimary color system. In one embodiment, the multi-primary color encode and decode system is divided into a base encoder and digitation, image data stacking, mapping into the standard data transport, readout, unstack, and finally image decoding (“System 1”). In one embodiment, the method of this system combines opposing color primaries within the three standard transport channels and identifies them by their code value. In one embodiment, the encode and decode for a multi-primary color system are analog-based. In another embodiment, the encode and decode for a multi-primary color system are digital-based. System 1 is designed to be compatible with lower bandwidth systems and allows a maximum of 11 bits per channel and is limited to sending only three channels of up to six primaries at a time. In one embodiment, it does this by using a stacking system where either the color channel or the complementary- channel is decoded depending on tire bit level of that one channel.
[00210] SYSTEM 2
[00211] FIG. 7 illustrates a sequential method where three color primaries are passed to the transport format as foil bit level image data and inserted as normal (“System 2”). The three additional channels are delayed by one pixel and then placed into the transport instead of the first colors. This method is useful in situations where quantizing artifacts is critical to image performance. In one embodiment, this system is comprised of six primaries (RGBCMY), a method to delay the CMY colors for injection, image resolution identification to all for pixel count synchronization, start of video identification, RGB delay, and for YCCCCC systems, logic to select the dominant color primary. The advantage of System 2 is that foil bit level video is operable to be transported, but at double the normal data rate.
[00212] SYSTEM 2A
[00213] System 2 sequences on a pixel-to-pixel basis. However, a quadrature method is also possible (“System 2 A”) that is operable to transport six primaries in stereo or twelve primary image information. Each quadrant of the frame contains three color primary data sets. These are combined in the display. A first set of three primaries is displayed in the upper left quadrant, a second set of three primaries is displayed in the upper right quadrant, a third set of primaries is displayed in the lower left quadrant, and a fourth set of primaries is displayed in lower right quadrant. In one embodiment, the first set of three primaries, the second set of three primaries, the third set of three primaries, and the fourth set of three primaries do not contain any overlapping primaries (i.e., twelve different primaries).
Alternatively, the first set of three primaries, the second set of three primaries, the third set of
three primaries, and the fourth set of three primaries contain overlapping primaries (i.e., at least one primary is contained in more than one set of three primaries). In one embodiment, the first set of three primaries and the third set of three primaries contain the same primaries and the second set of three primaries and the fourth set of three primaries contain the same primaries.
[00214] SYSTEM 3
[00215] FIG. 8 illustrates one embodiment of a system encode and decode process using a dual link method (“System 3”). System 3 utilizes a dual link method where two wires are used. In one embodiment, RGB is sent to link A and CMY is sent to link B. After arriving at the image destination, the two links are recombined. Alternative primaries are compatible with the present invention.
[00216] System 3 is simpler and more straight forward than Systems 1 and 2. The advantage with this system is that adoption is simply to format non-RGB primaries (e.g., CMY) on a second link. In one example, for an SDI design, RGB is sent on a standard SDI stream just as it is currently done. There is no modification to the transport and this link is operable to be sent to any RGB display requiring only the compensation for the luminance difference because the non-RGB (e.g., CMY) components are not included. Data for the nonRGB primaries (e.g., CMY data) is transported in the same manner as RGB data. This data is then combined in the display to make up a 6P image. The downside is that the system requires two wires to move one image. This system is operable to work with most any format including SMPTE ST292, 424, 2082, and 2110. It also is operable to work with dual High- Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI)/CTA connections. In one embodiment, the system includes at least one transfer function (e.g., OETF, EOTF).
[00217] FIG. 9 illustrates one embodiment of an encoding process using a dual link method. Alternative numbers of primaries and alternative primaries are compatible with the present invention.
[00218] FIG. 10 illustrates one embodiment of a decoding process using a dual link method. Alternative numbers of primaries and alternative primaries are compatible with the present invention.
[00219] SYSTEM 4
[00220] Color is generally defined by three component data levels (e.g., RGB, YCbCr). A serial data stream must accommodate a word for each color contributor (e.g., R, G, B). Use of more than three primaries requires accommodations to fit this data based on an RGB concept. This is why System 1, System 2, and System 3 use stacking, sequencing, and/or dual links.
Multiple words are required to define a single pixel, which is inefficient because not all values are needed. In one embodiment, System 4 includes, but is not limited to, Yxy, L*a*b*, ICTCp, YCbCr, YUV, Yu'v', YPbPr, YIQ, OkLab, LMS, Mlm, and/or XYZ. The previously mentioned color spaces are all based on a set of three human spectral response functions. [00221] In a preferred embodiment, color is defined as a colorimetric coordinate. Thus, every color is defined by three words. Serial systems are already based on three color contributors (e.g., RGB, YCbCr). System 4 preferably uses XYZ or Yxy as the three color contributors. System 4 more preferably uses Yxy as the three color contributors. In another preferred embodiment, System 4 uses Yu'v' as the three color contributors. System 4 preferably uses two colorimetric coordinates and a luminance or a luma. In a preferred embodiment, System 4 uses color formats described in CIE and/or ISO colorimetric standards. In a preferred embodiment, System 4 uses color contributors that are independent of a white point and/or a reference white value. Alternatively, System 4 uses color contributors that are not independent of a white point and/or a reference white value (e.g., YCbCr, L*a*b*). In another embodiment, System 4 uses color contributors that require at least one known primary.
[00222] Advantageously, Yxy does not require reference to a white point and/or at least one known primary. While YUV and/or L*a*b are plausible solutions, both are based on the CIE 1931 standard observer and would require additional processing with no gain in accuracy or gamut coverage when compared to Yxy. While XYZ is the basis for YUV and L*a*b, both require additional mathematical conversions beyond those required by Yxy. For example, x and y must be calculated before calculating a*b*. Additionally, YUV requires converting back to RGB and then converting to YUV via a known white point and color primaries. The reliance on a known white point also requires additional processing (e.g., chromatic adaptation) if the display white point is different from the encoded white point. Further, the 3x3 matrix used in the conversion of RGB to YUV has negative values that impact the chrominance because the values are centered around 0 and can have positive and negative values, while luminance can only be positive. In comparison, although Yxy is derived from XYZ, it advantageously only deals with positive coefficients. In addition, because luminance is only in Y, as brightness is reduced, chrominance is not affected. However, in YUV, the chrominance gets less contrast as brightness is reduced. Because Y is independent, it does not have to be calculated within xy because these are just data points for color, and not used for calculating luminance.
[00223] In yet another embodiment, L*C*h or other non-rectangular coordinate systems (e.g., cylindrical, polar) are compatible with the present invention. In one embodiment, a polar system is defined fiom Yxy by converting x,y to a hue angle (e.g., 0 = arctan(y/x)) and a magnitude vector (e.g., r) that is similar to C* in an L*C*h polar system. However, when converting Yxy to a polar system, 9 is restricted fiom 0 to 90 degrees because x and y are always non-negative. In one embodiment, the 0 angle is expanded by applying a transform (e.g., an affine transform) to x, y data wherein the x, y values of the white point of the system (e.g., D65) are subtracted from the x, y data such that the x, y data includes negative values. Thus, 0 ranges from 0 to 360 degrees and the polar plot of the Yxy data is operable to occupy more than one quadrant.
[00224] XYZ has been used in cinema for over 10 years. The Digital Cinema Initiative (DCI) defined the file format for distribution to theaters using an XYZ format. The reason for adopting XYZ was specifically to allow adaptation of new display technologies of the future. By including every color possible within a 3D space, legacy content would be compatible with any new display methods. This system has been in place since 2005.
[00225] While XYZ works very well within the closed infrastructure of digital cinema, it has drawbacks once it is used in other applications (e.g., broadcast, streaming). The reason for this is that many applications have limits on signal bandwidth. Both RGB and XYZ contain luminance in all three channels, which requires a system where each subpixel uses discrete image information. To get around this, a technology is employed to spread color information over several pixel areas. The logic behind this is that (1) image detail is held in the luminance component of the image and (2) resolution of the color areas is operable to be be much lower without an objectionable loss of picture quality. Therefore, methods such as YPBPR, YCBCR, and YCTCp are used to move images. Using color difference encoding with image subsampling allows quality images to be moved at lower signal bandwidths. Thus, RGB or XYZ only utilize a 4:4:4 sampling system, while YCBCR is operable be implemented as a 4:4:4, 4:2:2, 4: 1: 1, or a 4:2:0 sampled system.
[00226] There is a long-standing, unmet need for a system operable to describe more than an RGB image. In a preferred embodiment, the present invention advantageously uses Yxy or Yuv to describe images outside of an RGB gamut. Further, the Yxy or Yuv system is operable to transmit data using more than three primaries (e.g., more than RGB). The Yxy or Yuv system advantageously provides for all color possibilities to be presented to the display. Further, the Yxy or Yuv system bridges the problems between scene referred and display referred imaging. In an end-to-end system, with a defined white point and EOTF, image data
from a camera or graphics generator must conform to the defined display. With the advent of new displays and the use of High Dynamic Range displays, this often requires that the source image data (e.g., scene referred) be re-authored for the particular display (e.g., display referred). A scene-referred workflow refers to manipulating an image prior to its transformation from camera color space to display color space. The ease with which XYZ or ACES 0 are operable to be used to color time, then move to Yxy or Yu'v' to meet the display requirements, allows for a smoother approach to the display not losing any of the color values and keeping the color values as positive values. This is an advantage of Yxy or Yu'v', even if an image is only manipulated after it has been transformed from camera color space to display color space as displayed referred imaging. The Yxy or Yu'v' system is agnostic to both the camera data and the display characteristics, thus simplifying the distribution of electronic images. The Yxy or Yu'v' system of the present invention additionally does not increase data payloads and is operable to be substituted into any RGB file or transport system. Additionally, xy or u'v' information is operable to be subsampled, allowing for 4:2:2, 4:1: 1, and 4:2:0 packaging. The present invention also does not require specific media definitions to address limits in a display gamut. Displays with different color primaries (e.g., multi-primary display) are operable to display the same image if the color falls within the limits of that display using the Yxy or Yu'v' system of the present invention. The Yxy or Yu'v' system also allows for the addition of more primaries to fill the visual spectrum, reducing metameric errors. Color fidelity is operable to extend beyond the prior art R+G+B=W model. Displays with any number of color primaries and various white points are operable to benefit from the use of a Yxy or Yu'v' approach to define one media source encode for all displays. Conversion from wide gamut cameras to multi-primary displays is operable to be accomplished using a multiple triad conversion method, which is operable to reside in the display, thereby simplifying transmission of image data.
[00227] Out of gamut information is operable to be managed by the individual display, not by the media definitions. Luminance is described only in one channel (Y), and because xy or u'v' do not contain any luminance information, a change in Y is independent of hue or chroma, making conversions between SDR and HDR simpler. Any camera gamut is operable to be coded into a Yxy or Yu'v' encode, and only minor modifications are required to implement a Yxy or Yu'v' system. Conversion from Yxy or Yu'v' to RGB is simple, with minimal latency processing and is completely compatible with any legacy RGB system. [00228] There is also a long-standing, unmet need for a system that replaces optically- based gamma functions with a code efficient non-linearity method (e.g., data range reduction
(DRR)). DRR is operable to optimize data efficiency and simplify image display. Further, DRR is not media or display specific. By using a data efficient non-linearity instead of a representation of an optical gamma, larger data words (e.g., 16-bit float) are operable to be preserved as 12-bit, 10-bit, or 8-bit integer data words.
[00229] As previously described, the addition of primaries is simplified by the Yxy or
Yu'v' process. Further, the brightness of the display is advantageously operable to be increased by adding more primaries. When brightness is delivered in a range from 0 to 1, the image brightness is operable to be scaled to any desired display brightness using DRR.
[00230] XYZ needs 16-bit float and 32-bit float encode or a miniminn of 12 bits for gamma or log encoded images for better quality. Transport of XYZ must be accomplished using a 4:4:4 sample system. Less than a 4:4:4 sample system causes loss of image detail because Y is used as a coordinate along with X and Z and carries color information, not a value. Further, X and Z are not orthogonal to Y and, therefore, also include luminance information. Advantageously, converting to Yxy or Yu'v* concentrates the luminance in Y only, leaving two independent and pure chromaticity values. In a preferred embodiment, X, Y, and Z are used to calculate x and y. Alternatively, X, Y, and Z are used to calculate u' and v'.
[00231] However, if Y or an equivalent component is used as a luminance value with two independent colorimetric coordinates (e.g., x and y, u' and v', u and v, etc.) used to describe color, then a system using subsampling is possible because of differing visual sensitivity to color and luminance. In one embodiment, 1 or L* components are used instead of Y. In one embodiment, I and/or L* data is created from XYZ via a matrix conversion to LMS values. In one embodiment, L* has a non-linear form that uses a power function of 1/3. In one embodiment, I has a non-linear curve applied (e.g., PQ, HLG). For example, and not limitation, in the case of ICtCp, in one embodiment, I has a power function of 0.43 applied (e.g., in the case of FTP). The system is operable to use any two independent colorimetric coordinates with similar properties to x and y, u' and v', and/or u and v. In a preferred embodiment, the two independent colorimetric coordinates are x and y and the system is a Yxy system. In another preferred embodiment, the two colorimetric coordinates are u' and V and the system is a Yu'v' system. Advantageously, the two independent colorimetric coordinates (e.g., x and y, u' and v') are independent of a white point. Further, this reduces the complexity of the system when compared to XYZ, which includes a luminance value for all three channels (i.e., X, Y, and Z). Further, this also provides an advantage for subsampling (e.g., 4:2:2, 4:2:0 and 4:1:1). In one embodiment, other systems (e.g., ICTCp and L*a*b*)
require a white point in calculations. However, a conversion matrix using the white point of [1,1,1] is operable to be used for ICTCp and L*a*b*, which would remove the white point reference. The white point reference is operable to then be recaptured because it is the white point of [1,1,1] in XYZ space. In a preferred embodiment, the image data includes a reference to at least one white point.
[00232] Current technology uses components derived from the legacy National Television System Committee (NTSC). Encoding described in SMPTE, International Telecommunication Union (ITU), and CTA standards includes methods using subsampling as 4:2:2, 4:2:0, and 4:1:1. Advantageously, this allows for color transportation of more than three primaries, including, but not limited to, at least four primaries, at least five primaries, at least six primaries, at least seven primaries, at least eight primaries, at least nine primaries, at least ten primaries, at least eleven primaries, and/or at least twelve primaries (e.g., through a SMPTE ST292 or an HDMI 1.2 transport). In one embodiment, color transportation of more than three primaries occurs through SMPTE defined Serial Digital Interfeces (SDI), HDMI, or Display Port digital display interfeces. In one embodiment, color transportation of more than three primaries occurs through an imaging serial data stream format.
[00233] System 1, System 2, and System 3 use a YCbCr expansion to transport six color primary data sets, and the same transport (e.g., a YCbCr expansion) is operable to accommodate the image information as Yxy where Y is the luminance information and x,y describe CIE 1931 color coordinates in the half sample segments of the data stream (e.g., 4:2:2). The same transport (e.g., a YCbCr expansion) is also operable to accommodate the image information as Yu'v', where Y is the luminance information and u' and v' describe CIE 1976 color coordinates in the half sample segments of the data stream (e.g., 4:2:2).
Alternatively, x,y or u',v' are fully sampled (e.g., 4:4:4). In yet another embodiment, the sampling rate is 4:2:0 or 4: 1 : 1. In still another embodiment, the same transport is operable to accommodate the information as luminance and colorimetric coordinates other than x,y (e.g., u',v'). In one embodiment, the same transport is operable to accommodate data set using one channel of luminance data and two channels of colorimetric data. Alternatively, the same transport is operable to accommodate the image information as Yu'v' with foil sampling (e.g., 4:4:4) or partial sampling (e.g., 4:2:2, 4:2:0, 4: 1 : 1 ). In one embodiment, the same transport is used with full sampling (e.g., XYZ).
[00234] Advantageously, there is no need to add more channels, nor is there any need to separate the luminance information from the color components. Further, for example, x,y have no reference to any primaries because x,y are explicit colorimetric positions. In the Yxy
space, x and y are chromaticity coordinates such that x and y are operable to be used to define a gamut of visible color. Similarly, in the Yu'v' space, u' and v' are explicit colorimetric positions. It is possible to define a gamut of visible color in other formats (e.g., L*a*b*, ICTCp, YCbCr), but it is not always trivial. For example, while L*a*b* and ICTCp are colorimetric and are operable to describe any visible color, YCbCr is constrained to the available colors within the RGB primary color triad. Further, ICTCp requires a gamut limitation/description before it is operable to encode color information.
[00235] To determine if a color is visible in Yxy space, it must be determined if the sum of x and y is greater than or equal to zero. If not, the color is not defined. If the x,y point is within the CIE x,y locus (CIE horseshoe), the color is visible. If not, the color is not visible. Similarly, if a u',v' point is within the CIE u',v' locus (CIE horseshoe), the color is visible. The Yxy chromaticity diagram is non-linear, such that there is not a vector of unit magnitude operable to represent the difference between two chromaticities that is uniformly visible. Advantageously, Yu'v' reduces non-uniformity present in Yxy systems and is perceptually more uniform than Yxy.
[00236] The Y value plays a role especially in a display. In one embodiment, the display is operable to reproduce an x,y color within a certain range of Y values, wherein the range is a function of the primaries. In another embodiment, the display is operable to reproduce a u',v' color within a certain range of Y values, wherein the range is a function of the primaries. Another advantage is that an image is operable to be sent as linear data (e.g., without a non- linear function applied) with a non-linear fimction (e.g., electro-optical transfer function (EOTF)) added after the image is received, rather than requiring a non-linear function (e.g., OETF) applied to the signal. This allows for a much simpler encode and decode system. In one embodiment, only Y, L*, or I are altered by a non-linear function. Alternatively, Y, L*, or I are sent linearly (e.g., without a non-linear function applied). In a preferred embodiment, a non-linear fimction is applied to all three channels (e.g., Yxy, Yu'v'). Advantageously, applying the non-linear function to all three channels provides data compression.
[00237] FIG. 11 illustrates one embodiment of a Yxy or Yu'v' encode with a non-linear transfer function (NLTF). Image data is acquired in any format (e.g., RGB, RGBCMY, CMYK) operable to be converted to XYZ linear data. The XYZ data is then converted to Yxy or Yu'v' data, and the Yxy or Yu'v' data is processed through an NLTF. The processed Yxy or Yu'v' data is then converted to a standardized transportation format for mapping and readout. Advantageously, in one embodiment, x and y remain as independent colorimetric coordinates and the non-linear transfer function is only applied to Y, thus providing simpler decoding of x
and y values. In one embodiment, u' and v' remain as independent colorimetric coordinates and the non-linear transfer function is only applied to Y, thus providing simpler decoding of u' and v* values. In another embodiment, advantageously, application of the NLTF to all three channels provides compression in the system. In one embodiment, the NLTF is described in
ITU-R BT.2100 or ITU-R BT.1886. Advantageously, Y is orthogonal to x and y, and remains orthogonal to x and y even when a non-linear function is applied. Y is also orthogonal to u' and v', and remains orthogonal to u* and v' even when a non-linear function is applied.
Although the example shown includes Yxy and Yu'v* data, System 4 is compatible with a plurality of data formats including data formats using one luminance coordinate and two colorimetric coordinates.
[00238] There are many different RGB sets so the matrix used to convert the image data from a set of RGB primaries to XYZ will involve a specific solution given the RGB values:
[00239] In an embodiment where the image data is 6P-B data, the following equation is used to convert to XYZ data:
[00240] In an embodiment where the image data is 6P-C data with a D60 white point, the following equation is used to convert to XYZ data:
[00241] In an embodiment where the image data is 6P-C data with a D65 white point, the following equation is used to convert to XYZ data:
[00245] In one embodiment, LMS data is transformed to a projected representation using the following equations:
[00246] In contrast with Yxy and Yu’v’, where the Y is the tristimulus relative luminance, the M channel, which is the closest to the Y response is not exactly Y. The projected representation is operable to be used analogous to Yxy as Mlm. Alternatively, the projected representation is operable to be used as Yim where 1ms is operable to be transformed back to
XYZ via a 3 x3 matrix.
[00247] In one embodiment, to convert XYZ data to LMS data with equal-energy illuminants, the following equation is used:
[00248] In one embodiment, to convert XYZ data to LMS data normalized to D65, the following equation is used:
[00249] In one embodiment, to convert LMS data to XYZ data, the Hunt-Pointer-Estevez matrix is used as shown below:
The XYZ data from the above equation is operable to be rescaled by using a ratio of Yoriginal to Ymatrix using the following equation:
[00250] FIG. 12 illustrates one embodiment of a Yxy or Yu'v' encode without an NLTF.
Image data is acquired in any format (e.g., RGB, RGBCMY, CMYK) operable to be converted to XYZ data. The XYZ data is then converted to Yxy or Y u'v' data, and then converted to a standardized transportation format for mapping and readout. Although the example in FIG. 12 shows a Yxy or Yu'v' encode, System 4 is operable to be used with a plurality of data formats.
[00251] FIG. 13 illustrates one embodiment of a Yxy or Yu'v' decode with an inverse nonlinear transfer function (NLTF-1). After mapping and readout, the data is processed through an NLTF"1 to yield the Yxy or Yu'v' data. The Yxy or Yu'v' data is then converted back to the
XYZ data. The XYZ data is operable to be converted to multiple data formats including, but not limited to, RGB, CMYK, 6P (e.g., 6P-B, 6P-C), and gamuts including at least four primaries through at least twelve primaries. Although the example in FIG. 13 shows a Yxy or
Yu'v' decode, System 4 is operable to be used with a plurality of data formats.
[00252] Finally, the XYZ data must converted to the correct standard color space. In an embodiment where the color gamut used is a 6P-B color gamut, the following equations are used:
[00253] In an embodiment where the color gamut used is a 6P-C color gamut with a D60 white point, the following equations are used:
[00254] In another embodiment where the color used is a 6P-C color gamut with a D65 white point, the following equations are used:
[00255] In an embodiment where the color gamut used is an ITU-R BT709.6 color gamut, the matrices are as follows:
[00256] In an embodiment where the color gamut used is a SMPTE RP431-2 color gamut, the matrices are as follows:
[00257] In an embodiment where the color gamut used is an ITU-R BT.2020/2100 color gamut, the matrices are as follows:
[00260] FIG. 14 illustrates one embodiment of a Yxy or Yu'v' decode without an NLTF.
After mapping and readout, the Yxy or Yu'v' data is then converted to the XYZ data. The
XYZ data is operable to be converted to multiple data formats including, but not limited to.
RGB, CMYK, 6P (e.g., 6P-B, 6P-C), and gamuts including at least four primaries through at least twelve primaries. Although the example in FIG. 14 shows a Yxy or Yu'v' encode,
System 4 is operable to be used with a plurality of data formats.
[00261] FIG. 15A illustrates one embodiment of a 4:2:2 Yxy encode with an NLTF. A full bandwidth luminance channel (1) is used to carry image detail and the remaining color coordinate components (e.g., x,y) are half sampled. In the example shown in FIG. 15A, the
Yxy data undergoes a 4:2:2 encode. Other encoding methods (e.g., 4:4:4, 4:2:0, 4:1:1) are
compatible with the present invention. Other quantization methods and bit depths are also compatible with the present invention. In one embodiment, the bit depth is 8 bits, 10 bits, 12 bits, 14 bits, and/or 16 bits. In one embodiment, the Yxy values are sampled as floats (e.g., 16-bit floating point representation, 32-bit floating point representation). For example, and not limitation, the floats include IEEE 754 defined floats. Although the example in FIG. 15A shows a Yxy decode, System 4 is operable to be used with a plurality of data formats.
[00262] In one embodiment, the NLTF is a DRR function between about 0.25 and about 0.9. In another embodiment, the NLTF is a DRR function between about 0.25 and about 0.7. In one embodiment, the NLTF is a DRR function including a value between about 0.41 and about 0.7. In one embodiment, the NLTF is a 1/3 DRR function including a value between about 0.25 and about 0.499.
[00263] FIG. 15B illustrates one embodiment of a 4:2:2 Yxy encode without an NLTF. In the example shown in FIG. 15B, the Yxy data undergoes a 4:2:2 encode. Other encoding methods (e.g., 4:4:4, 4:2:0, 4: 1 : 1) are compatible with the present invention. Although the example in FIG. 15B show's a Yxy encode, System 4 is operable to be used with a plurality of data formats.
[00264] FIG. 16A illustrates one embodiment of a 4:2:2 Yxy encode with an NLTF applied to all three channels and linear scaling of x,y. A full bandwidth luminance channel (Y) is used to carry image detail and the remaining color coordinate components (e.g., x,y) are half sampled. In the example shown in FIG. 16A, the Yxy data undergoes a 4:2:2 encode. Other encoding methods (e.g., 4:4:4, 4:2:0, 4: 1: 1) are compatible with the present invention. Other quantization methods and bit depths are also compatible with the present invention. In one embodiment, the bit depth is 8 bits, 10 bits, 12 bits, 14 bits, and/or 16 bits. In one embodiment, the Yxy values are sampled as floats (e.g., 16-bit floating point representation, 32-bit floating point representation). For example, and not limitation, the floats include IEEE 754 defined floats. Although the example in FIG. 16A shows a Yxy decode, System 4 is operable to be used with a plurality of data formats.
[00265] FIG. 16B illustrates one embodiment of a 4:2:2 Yxy encode without an NLTF and with linear scaling of x,y. In the example shown in FIG. 16B, the Yxy data undergoes a 4:2:2 encode. Other encoding methods (e.g., 4:4:4, 4:2:0, 4: 1: 1) are compatible with the present invention. Although the example in FIG. 16B shows a Yxy encode, System 4 is operable to be used with a plurality of data formats.
[00266] FIG. 17A illustrates one embodiment of a 4:4:4 Yxy encode with an NLTF. A full bandwidth luminance channel (f) is used to carry image detail and the remaining color
coordinate components (e.g., x,y) are also fully sampled. In the example shown in FIG. 17A, the Yxy data undergoes a 4:4:4 encode. Other encoding methods (e.g., 4:2:2, 4:2:0, 4: 1 : 1) are compatible with the present invention. Although the example in FIG. 17A shows a Yxy encode, System 4 is operable to be used with a plurality of data formats.
[00267] FIG. 17B illustrates one embodiment of a 4:4:4 Yxy encode without an NLTF. In the example shown in FIG. 17B, the Yxy data undergoes a 4:4:4 encode. Other encoding methods (e.g., 4:2:2, 4:2:0, 4: 1 : 1) are compatible with the present invention. Although the example in FIG. 17B show's a Yxy encode, System 4 is operable to be used with a plurality of data formats.
[00268] FIG. 18A illustrates one embodiment of a 4:4:4 Yxy encode with an NLTF applied to all three channels and linear scaling of x,y. A foil bandwidth luminance channel (f) is used to carry image detail and the remaining color coordinate components (e.g., x,v) are also folly sampled. In the example shown in FIG. 18A, the Yxy data undergoes a 4:4:4 encode. Other encoding methods (e.g., 4:2:2, 4:2:0, 4: 1: 1) are compatible with the present invention. Although the example in FIG. 18A shows a Yxy encode, System 4 is operable to be used with a plurality of data formats.
[00269] FIG. 18B illustrates one embodiment of a 4:4:4 Yxy encode without an NLTF and with linear scaling of x,y. In the example shown in FIG. 18B, the Yxy data undergoes a 4:4:4 encode. Other encoding methods (e.g., 4:2:2, 4:2:0, 4: 1 : 1) are compatible with the present invention. Although the example in FIG. 18B shows a Yxy encode, System 4 is operable to be used with a plurality of data formats.
[00270] FIG. 19 illustrates sample placements of Yxy system components for a 4:2:2 pixel mapping. A plurality of pixels (e.g., P00-P35) is shown in FIG. 19. The first subscript number refers to a row number and the second subscript number refers to a column number. For pixel Poo, W'INT00 is the luma and the color components are xINT0 0”d YINT00. For pixel P01, is the luma. For pixel P10, Y'INT10 is the luma and the color components are xINT10 and YINT10 For pixel P11, W'INT11 is the luma. In one embodiment, the luma and the color components (e.g., the set of image data) corresponding to a particular pixel (e.g., Poo) is used to calculate color and brightness of subpixels. Although the example shown in FIG. 19 includes luma, it is equally possible that the data is sent linearly as luminance (e.g., YINT00). Further, although the example in FIG. 19 includes Yxy system components, System 4 is operable to be used with a plurality' of data formats. While prior art systems often use x,y coordinates to map a gamut, the present invention is operable to provide pixel mapping data as Yxy data and
transport data as a Y channel, a first colorimetric coordinate channel (e.g., x), and a second colorimetric coordinate channel (e.g., y).
[00271] FIG. 20 illustrates sample placements of Yxy system components for a 4:2:0 pixel mapping. A plurality of pixels (e.g., P00-P35) is shown in FIG. 20. The first subscript number refers to a row number and the second subscript number refers to a column number. For pixel Poo, is the luma and the color components are xINTQQ and YINT00- For pixel P01,
is the luma. For pixel Pio,
is the luma. For pixel P11,
is the luma. In one embodiment, the luma and the color components corresponding to a particular pixel (e.g., Poo) is used to calculate color and brightness of subpixels. Although the example shown in FIG. 20 includes luma, it is equally possible that the data is sent linearly as luminance (e.g., YINTOO). Further, Although the example in FIG. 20 includes Yxy system components, System 4 is operable to be used with a plurality of data formats.
[00272] In one embodiment, the set of image data includes pixel mapping data. In one embodiment, the pixel mapping data includes a subsample of the set of values in a color space. In a preferred embodiment, the color space is a Yxy color space (e.g., 4:2:2). In one embodiment, the pixel mapping data includes an alignment of the set of values in the color space (e.g., Yxy color space, Yu'v' colorspace).
[00273] Table 6 illustrates mapping to SMPTE ST2110 for 4:2: 2 sampling of Yxy and Yu'v data. Table 7 illustrates mapping to SMPTE ST2110 for 4:4:4 linear and non-linear sampling of Yxy and Yu'v data. The present invention is compatible with a plurality of data formats and not restricted to Yxy and Yu'v data.
00276] FIG. 21 illustrates one embodiment of a SMPTE ST292 Yxy system mapping. To fit a Yxy system into a SMPTE ST292 stream involves the following substitutions:
is placed in the Y data segments, xINT is placed in the Cr data segments, and yiNT is placed in the Cb data segments. In a preferred embodiment, luminance or luma is placed in the Y data segments, a first colorimetric coordinate is placed in the Cr data segments, and a second colorimetric coordinate is placed in the Cb data segments. Although the example in FIG. 21 shows a Yxy system mapping, System 4 is operable to be used with a plurality of data formats.
[00277] FIG. 22 illustrates one embodiment of a SMPTE ST2082 Yxy system mapping.
To fit a Yxy system into a SMPTE ST292 stream involves the following substitutions: Y]NT is placed in the G data segments, xINT is placed in the R data segments, and is placed in the B data segments. In a preferred embodiment, luminance or luma is placed in the G data segments, a first colorimetric coordinate is placed in the R data segments, and a second colorimetric coordinate is placed in the B data segments. Although the example in FIG. 22 shows a Yxy system mapping, System 4 is operable to be used with a plurality of data formats.
[00278] FIG. 23 illustrates one embodiment of Yxy inserted into a CTA 861 data stream. Although the example in FIG. 23 shows a Yxy system mapping, System 4 is operable to be used with a plurality of data formats.
[00279] FIG. 24A illustrates one embodiment of a Yxy decode with an NLTF1 applied only to the Y channel. In one embodiment, a non-linear function (e.g., NLTF1) is applied to the luma. The non-linear function is not applied to the two colorimetric coordinates.
Although the example in FIG. 24A shows a Yxy decode, System 4 is operable to be used with a plurality of data formats.
[00280] In one embodiment, the NLTF1 is an inverse DRR function with a value between about 1.1 and about 4. In one embodiment, the NLTF1 is an inverse DRR function with a value between about 1.4 and about 4. In one embodiment, the NLTF1 is an inverse DRR function with a value between about 1.4 and about 2.4. In one embodiment, the NLTF1 is an inverse DRR function with a value between about 2 and about 4.
[00281 ] FIG. 24B illustrates one embodiment of a Yxy decode without an NLTF1 applied to any of the channels. In one embodiment, data is sent linearly as luminance. A non-linear function (e.g., an NLTF'1) is not applied to the luminance or the two colorimetric coordinates. Although the example in FIG. 24B shows a Yxy decode, System 4 is operable to be used with a plurality of data formats.
[00282] FIG. 25 A illustrates one embodiment of a Yxy decode with an NLTF* applied to all three channels and rescaling of x and y. In one embodiment, a non-linear function (e.g., an NLTF1) is applied to the luma and to the two colorimetric coordinates. Although the example in FIG. 25 A shows a Yxy decode. System 4 is operable to be used with a plurality of data formats.
[00283] FIG. 25B illustrates one embodiment of a Yxy decode without an NLTF1 applied to any of the channels and with rescaling applied to the x,y channels. In one embodiment, data is sent linearly as luminance. A non-linear function (e.g., an NLTF1) is not applied to
the luminance or the two colorimetric coordinates. Although the example in FIG. 25B shows a Yxy decode, System 4 is operable to be used with a plurality of data formats (e.g., Yu'V). [00284] Advantageously, XYZ is used as the basis of ACES for cinematographers and allows for the use of colors outside of the ITU-R BT.709 and/or the P3 color spaces, encompassing all of the CIE color space. Colorists often work in XYZ, so there is widespread familiarity with XYZ. Further, XYZ is used for other standards (e.g., JPEG 2000, Digital Cinema Initiatives (DCI)), which could be easily adapted for System 4. Additionally, most color spaces use XYZ as the basis for conversion, so the conversions between XYZ and most color spaces are well understood and documented. Many professional displays also have XYZ option as a color reference function.
[00285] In one embodiment, the image data converter includes at least one processor coupled to at least one memory. In one embodiment, the image data converter includes at least one look-up table (LUT). In one embodiment, the at least one look-up table maps out- of-gamut colors to zero. In one embodiment, the at least one look-up table maps out-of-gamut colors to a periphery of visible colors. In one embodiment, an out-of-gamut color is mapped to the periphery along a straight line between the out-of-gamut color in its original location and a white point of the system (e.g., D65). In one embodiment, the luminance and/or luma value is maintained, and only die colorimetric coordinates are affected by the mapping. In one embodiment, gamma transforms and/or scaling are added after mapping. In one embodiment, the mapping is used to convert Yxy to XYZ and back. Alternatively, the mapping is used to convert Y'xy to X’Y'Z* and back. In one embodiment, a gamma function and/or a scaling is maintained throughout the conversion. As a non-limiting example, a 2.6 gamma function is used to scale x by 0.74 and y by 0.84. Alternatively, the gamma and/or the scaling are removed after conversion of gamut colors to zero. In one embodiment, the at least one look-up table maps out of gamut colors to a periphery of visible colors.
[00286] In one embodiment, the image data converter includes at least one look-up table (LUT). In one embodiment, the at least one look-up table maps out-of-gamut colors to zero. In one embodiment, the at least one look-up table maps out-of-gamut colors to a periphery of visible colors. In one embodiment, an out-of-gamut color is mapped to the periphery along a straight line between the out-of-gamut color in its original location and a white point of the system (e.g., D65). In one embodiment, the luminance and/or luma value is maintained, and only the colorimetric coordinates are affected by the mapping. In one embodiment, gamma transforms and/or scaling are added after mapping. In one embodiment, the mapping is used to convert Yxy to XYZ and back. Alternatively, the mapping is used to convert Y'xy to
XY'Z´ and back. In one embodiment, a gamma function and/or a scaling is maintained throughout the conversion. As a non-limiting example, a 2.6 gamma function is used to scale x by 0.74 and y by 0.84. Alternatively, the gamma and/or the scaling are removed after conversion.
[00287] Additional details regarding System 4 are available in U.S. Patent Application No. 17/727,372, filed April 22, 2022, and U.S. Patent Application No. 17/849,220, filed June 24, 2022, each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
[00288] TRANSFER FUNCTIONS
[00289] The system design minimizes limitations to use standard transfer functions for both encode and/or decode processes. Current practices used in standards include, but are not limited to, ITU-R BT.1886, ITU-R BT.2020, SMPTE ST274, SMPTE ST296, SMPTE ST2084, and ITU-R BT.2100. These standards are compatible with this system and require no modification.
[00290] Encoding and decoding multi-primary (e.g., 6P, RGBC) images is formatted into several different configurations to adapt to image transport frequency limitations. The highest qualify transport is obtained by keeping all components as multi-primary (e.g., RGBCMY) components. This uses the highest sampling frequencies and requires the most signal bandwidth. An alternate method is to sum the image details in a luminance channel at full bandwidth and then send the color difference signals at half or quarter sampling (e.g., Y Cr Cb Cc Cy). This allows a similar image to pass through lower bandwidth transports.
[00291] An IPT system is a similar idea to the Yxy system with several exceptions. An IPT system or an ICTCp system is still an extension of XYZ and is operable to be derived from RGB and multiprimary (e.g., RGBCMY, RGBC) color coordinates. An IPT color description is operable to be substituted within a 4:4:4 sampling structure, but XYZ has already been established and does not require the same level of calculations. For an ICTCp transport system, similar substitutions are operable to be made. However, both substitution systems are limited in that a non-linear function (e.g., OOTF) is contained in all three components. Although the non-linear function is operable to be removed for IPT or ICTCp, the derivation is still based on a set of RGB primaries with a white point reference. Removing the non-linear function may also alter the bit depth noise and compressibility.
[00292] For transport, simple substitutions are operable to be made using the foundation of what is described with transport of XYZ for the use of IPT in current systems as well as the current standards used for ICTCp.
[00293] FIG. 26A illustrates one embodiment of an IPT 4:4:4 encode.
[00294] FIG. 26B illustrates one embodiment of an IPT 4:4:4 decode.
[00295] FIG. 27A illustrates one embodiment of an ICTCp 4:2:2 encode.
[00296] FIG. 27B illustrates one embodiment of an ICTCp 4:2:2 decode.
[00297] Transfer functions used in systems 1, 2, and 3 are generally framed around two basic implementations. For images displaying using a standard dynamic range, the transfer functions are defined within two standards. The OETF is defined in ITU-R BT.709-6, table 1, row 1.2. The inverse function, the EOTF, is defined in ITU-R BT.1886. For high dynamic range imaging, the perceptual quantizer (PQ) and hybrid log-gamma (HLG) curves are described in ITU-R BT.2100-2: 2018, table 4.
[00298] Prior art involves the inclusion of a non-linearity based on a chosen optical performance. As imaging technology has progressed, different methods have evolved. At one time, computer displays were using a simple 1.8 gamma, while television assumed an inverse of a .045 gamma. When digital cinema was established, a 2.6 gamma was used, and complex HDR solutions have recently been introduced. However, because these are embedded within the RGB structure, conversion between formats is operable to be very complicated and requires vast amounts of processing. Advantageously, a Yxy or Yu'v' system does not require complicated conversion or large amounts of processing.
[00299] Reexamination of the use of gamma and optical based transfer curves for data compression led to the development of the Data Range Reduction (DRR) technique. While the form of DRR is similar to the use of gamma, the purpose of DRR is to maximize the efficiency of the number of bits available to the display. The advantage is that DRR is operable to transfer to and/or from any OOTF system using a simple conversion method, such that any input transform is operable to be displayed using any output transform with minimal processing.
[00300] By using the DRR process, the image is operable to be encoded within the source device. The use of a common non-linearity allows faster and more accurate conversion. The design of this non-linearity is for data transmission efficiency, not as an optical transform function. This only works if certain parameters are set for the encode. Any pre-process is acceptable, but it must ensure an accurate 16-bit linear result.
[00301] Two methods are available for decode: (1) applying the inverse DRR to the input data and converting to a linear data format or (2) a difference between the DRR value and the desired display gamma is operable to be used to directly map the input data to the display for simple display gammas.
[00302] Another requirement is that the calculation be simple. By using DRR, processing is kept to a minimum, which reduces signal latency. The non-linearity (e.g., DRR) is applied based on bit levels, not image intensity.
[00303] System 4 is operable to use any of the transfer functions, which are operable to be applied to the Y component. However, to improve compatibility and to simplify conversion between standard transfer functions, a new method has been developed: a Vi DRR function. Advantageously, the 1/2 DRR function allows for a single calculation from the luminance (e.g., Y) component of the signal (e.g., Yxy signal, Yu'v' signal) to the display.
Advantageously, the 1/2 DRR function is designed for data efficiency, not as an optical transform function. In one embodiment, the 1/2 DRR function is used instead of a non-linear fonction (e.g., OETF or EOTF). In one embodiment, signal input to the 1/2 DRR function is assumed to be linear and constrained between values of 0 and 1. In one embodiment, the 1/2 DRR function is optimized for 10-bit transport and/or 12-bit transport. Alternatively, the 1/2 DRR function is optimized for 14-bit transport and/or 16-bit transport. In an alternative embodiment, the 1/2 DRR fonction is optimized for 8-bit transport. A typical implementation applies an inverse of the 1/2 DRR fonction, which linearizes the signal. A conversion to a display gamut is then applied.
[00304] FIG. 28 illustrates one embodiment of a 1/2 DRR fonction.
[00305] In one embodiment, a DRR is applied to source media as n = L 1/τ and an inverse DRR (DRR'1) is applied to a display (or sink) as L = nT, where T represents the exponent of the inverse non-linearity. In one embodiment, the system incorporates both the source gamma (e.g., OETF) and the display gamma (e.g., EOTF). For example, the following equation for a DRR is used:
where the DRR value in this equation is the conversion factor from linear to non-linear. An inverse DRR (DRR-1) is the re-expansion coefficient from the non-linear to the linear.
[00306] Advantageously, using the Vi DRR function with the OOTF gamma combines the functions into a single step rather than utilizing a two-step conversion process. In one embodiment, at least one tone curve is applied after the ‘/z DRR function. The 1/2 DRR function advantageously provides ease to convert to and from linear values. Given that all color and tone mapping has to be done in the linear domain, having a simple to implement conversion is desirable and makes the conversion to and from linear values easier and simpler.
[00307] FIG. 29 illustrates a graph of maximum quantizing error using the Vi DRR function. The maximum quantizing error from an original 16-bit image to a 10-bit (blue trace) signal is shown in the graph. In the embodiment shown in the graph, the maximum quantizing error is less than 0.05% (e.g., 0.047%) for 16-bit to 10-bit conversion using the 1/2 DRR function. The graph also shows the maximum quantizing error from the original 16-bit image to a 12-bit (orange trace) signal and a 14 -bit (gray trace) signal.
[00308] While a Vi DRR is ideal for converting images with 16-bit (e.g., 16-bit float) values to 12 -bit (e.g., 12-bit integer) values, for other data sets a 1/3 DRR provides equivalent performance in terms of peak signal-to-noise ratio (PSNR). For HDR content, which has a wider luminance dynamic range (e.g., up to 1000 cd/m2), the 1/3 DRR conversion from 16-bit float maintains the same performance as 1/2 DRR In one embodiment, an equation for finding an optimum value of tau is:
[00309] In one embodiment, the Minimum Float Value is based on the IEEE Standard for Floating-Point Arithmetic (IEEE 754) (July 2019), which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. In one embodiment, the range of image values is normalized to between 0 and 1. The range of image values is preferably normalized to between 0 and 1 and then the DRR function is applied.
[00310] For example, for an HDR system (e.g., with a luminance dynamic range of 1000- 4000 cd/m2), the above equation becomes:
[00311] FIG. 30 illustrates one embodiment of a 1/3 DRR function.
[00312] In one embodiment, the DRR value is preferably between 0.25 and 0.9. Table 8 illustrates one embodiment of an evaluation of DRR vs. bit depth vs. foil 16-bit float (equivalent to 24 f-stops). Table 9 illustrates one embodiment of a recommended application of DRR. Table 10 illustrates one embodiment of DRR functions optimized for 8 bits, 10 bits, and 12 bits, based on tire desired dynamic range as indicted in f-stops. Each f-stop represents a doubling of light values. The f-stops provide a range of tones over which the noise, measured in f-stops (e.g., the inverse of the perceived signal-to-noise ratio, PSNR) remains under a specified maximum value. The lower the maximum noise, or the higher the PSNR, the better the image quality. In one embodiment, no DRR is applied to Yxy or Y u'v' 16-bit data. In one embodiment, the Yxy or Yu'v' 16-bit data covers 24 f-stops. In one embodiment,
a 0.6 DRR is applied to Yxy or Yu'v' 12-bit data, a 0.5 DRR is applied to Yxy or Yu'v' 10-bit data, and/or a 0.4 DRR is applied to Yxy or Yu'v' 8-bit data. In one embodiment, the Yxy or Y u'v' 12-bit data, the Yxy or Y u'v' 10-bit data, and/or the Yxy or Y u'v' 8-bit data cover 20 f- stops.
[00316] ENCODER AND DECODER
[00317] In one embodiment, the multi-primary system includes an encoder operable to accept image data input (e.g., RAW, SDI, HDMI, DisplayPort, ethemet). In one embodiment, the image data input is from a camera, a computer, a processor, a flash memory card, a network (e.g., local area network (LAN)), or any other file storage or transfer medium operable to provide image data input. The encoder is operable to send processed image data (e.g., Yxy, XYZ, Yu'v') to a decoder (e.g., via wired or wireless communication). The decoder is operable to send formatted image data (e.g., SDI, HDMI, Ethemet, DisplayPort, Yxy, XYZ, Yu'v', legacy RGB, multi-primary data (e.g., RGBC, RGBCMY, etc.)) to at least one viewing device (e.g., display, monitor, projector) for display (e.g., via wired or wireless communication). In one embodiment, the decoder is operable to send formatted image data to at least two viewing devices simultaneously. In one embodiment, two or more of the at least two viewing devices use different color spaces and/or formats. In one example, the decoder sends formatted image data to a first viewing device in HDMI and a second viewing device in SDI. In another example, the decoder sends formatted image data as multi-primary (e.g., RGBCMY, RGBC) to a first viewing device and as legacy RGB (e.g., Rec. 709) to a second viewing device. In one embodiment, the Ethemet formatted image data is compatible with SMPTE ST2022. Additionally or alternatively, the Ethemet formatted image data is compatible with SMPTE ST2110 and/or any internet protocol (IP)-based transport protocol for image data.
[00318] The encoder and the decoder preferably include at least one processor. By way of example, and not limitation, the at least one processor is be a general-purpose microprocessor (e.g., a central processing unit (CPU)), a graphics processing unit (GPU), a microcontroller, a Digital Signal Processor (DSP), an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), a Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA), a Programmable Logic Device (PLD), a controller, a state machine, gated or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, or any other suitable entity or combinations thereof that can perform calculations, process instructions for execution, and/or other manipulations of information. In one embodiment, one or more of the at least one processor is operable to run predefined programs stored in at least one memory' of the encoder and/or the decoder.
[00319] The encoder and/or the decoder include hardware, firmware, and/or software. In one embodiment, the encoder and/or the decoder is operable to be inserted into third party software (e.g., via a dynamic-link library (DLL)). In one embodiment, functionality and/or features of the encoder and/or the decoder are combined for efficiency.
[00320] FIG. 31 illustrates one embodiment of an encoder. The encoder includes at least one encoder input (e.g., SDI, HDMI, SMPTE ST2110, SMPTE ST2022, DisplayPort, fiber, ethemet) and at least one encoder output (e.g., SDI, HDMI, SMPTE ST2110, SMPTE ST2022, Yxy SDI, Yxy HDMI, Yu'v* SDI, Yu'v' HDMI, DisplayPort, fiber, ethemet). The encoder preferably includes an encoder operations programming port operable to provide updates to firmware and/or software on the encoder. For example, the encoder operations programming port is operable to update library functions, internal formatting, camera demosaicing (e.g., DeBayer) pattern algorithms, and/or look-up tables in the encoder. In one embodiment, the encoder includes a metadata input. In one embodiment, the encoder includes an encoder configuration central processing unit (CPU) operable to interface with at least one encoder memory. The encoder further includes an encoder equalizer, at least one encoder serial to parallel (S/P) converter (e.g., SDI S/P converter, HDMI S/P, Ethemet S/P converter), at least one encoder flash card reader, at least one Ethemet port, a demosaicing (e.g., DeBayer) engine, a linear converter, a scaler (e.g., 0-1), at least one custom encoder LUT, a color channel-to-XYZ converter (e.g., RGB in Rec. 709, P3, Rec. 2020; 6P; multi-primary; ACES; custom), an XYZ-to-Y xy converter, an XYZ-to-Y u'v' converter, a DRR function (e.g., */i DRR), an xy scaler, a u'v' scaler, a sampling selector (e.g., 4:4:4, 4:2:2, 4:2:0), a metadata decoder, an encoder metadata formatter, at least one encoder parallel to serial (P/S) converter (e.g., SDI P/S converter, HDMI P/S converter, Ethemet P/S converter), at least one encoder formatter (e.g., SDI formatter, HDMI formatter, Ethemet formatter), and/or a watermark engine. In one embodiment, the input data is operable to bypass any combination of processing stages and/or components in the encoder.
[00321] The at least one encoder input includes, but is not limited to, an SDI input, an HDMI input, a DisplayPort input, an ethemet input, and/or a SMPTE ST2110 input. The SDI input preferably follows a modified version of SMPTE ST352 payload identification (ID) standard. In one embodiment, the SDI input is SMPTE ST292, SMPTE ST425, and/or SMPTE ST2082. In one embodiment, a video signal from the SDI input is then sent to the encoder equalizer to compensate for cable type and length. In one embodiment, the HDMI input is decoded with a standard HDMI receiver circuit. In one embodiment, the HDMI input is converted to a parallel format. In one embodiment, the HDMI input is defined within the CTA 861 standard. In another embodiment, the at least one encoder input includes image data (e.g., RAW data) from a flash device. The configuration CPU identifies a format on the flash card and/or a file type, and has software operable to read the image data and make it available to the encoder.
[00322] In one embodiment, the encoder operations port is operable to connect to an encoder control system (e.g., via a micro universal serial bus (USB) or equivalent). In one embodiment, the encoder control system is operable to control the at least one encoder memory that holds tables for the decmosaidng (e.g., DeBayer) engine, load modifications to the linear converter and/or scaler, select the at least one input, loads a table for the at least one custom encoder LUT, bypass one or more of the at least one custom encoder LUT, bypass the demosaicing (e.g., DeBayer) engine, add or modify conversion tables for the RGB to XYZ converter, modify the DRR function (e.g., a Vi DRR function), turn the watermark engine on or off, modify a digital watermark for the watermark engine, and/or perform functions for the flash memory player (e.g., play, stop, forward, first forward, rewind, fest rewind, frame selection).
[00323] In one embodiment, the metadata decoder is operable to decode Extended Display Identification Data (EDID) (e.g., for HDMI inputs), SDP parameters (SMPTE ST 2110), payload ID, and/or ancillary information (e.g., vertical ancillary data (VANC)). The encoder configuration CPU is operable to process data from the metadata decoder. Further, the encoder configuration CPU is operable to select particular settings and/or deliver selected data to the encoder metadata formatter. The metadata input is operable to insert additional data and/or different data values, which are also operable to be sent to the encoder metadata formatter. The encoder metadata formatter is operable to take information from the encoder configuration CPU and arrange the information to be reinserted into the output of the process. In one embodiment, each encoder output formatter then takes this formatted data and times it to be used in tire serial stream.
[00324] In one embodiment, the at least one S/P converter is up to n bit for improved processing efficiency. The at least one S/P converter preferably formats the processed image data so that the encoder and/or the decoder is operable to use parallel processing. Advantageously, parallel processing keeps processing fast and minimizes latency.
[00325] The at least one encoder formatter is operable to organize the serial stream as a proper format. In a preferred embodiment, the encoder includes a corresponding encoder formatter for each of the at least one encoder output. For example, if the encoder includes at least one HDMI output in the at least one encoder output, the encoder also includes at least one HDMI formatter in the at least one encoder formatter; if the encoder includes at least one SDI output in the at least one encoder output, the encoder also includes at least one SDI formatter in the at least one encoder formatter; if the encoder includes at least one Ethernet
output in the at least one encoder output, the encoder also includes at least one Ethernet formatter in the at least one encoder formatter; and so forth.
[00326] There is an advantage of inputting a RAW camera image to take advantage of the extended dynamic range and wider color gamut versus using a standard video input. In one embodiment, the demosaicing (e.g., DeBayer) engine is operable to convert RAW image data into a raster image. In one embodiment, the raster image is a 3-channel image (e.g., RGB). In one embodiment, the demosaicing (e.g., DeBayer) engine is bypassed for data that is not in a RAW image format. In one embodiment, the demosaicing (e.g., DeBayer) engine is configured to accommodate at least three primaries (e.g., 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, etc.) in the Bayer or stripe pattern. To handle all of the different demosaicing (e.g., DeBayer) options, the operations programming port is operable to load a file with code required to adapt a specific pattern (e.g., Bayer). For images that are not RAW, a bypass path is provided and switched to and from using the encoder configuration CPU. In one embodiment, the encoder is operable to recognize the image data format and select the correct path automatically. Alternatively, the image data format is included in metadata.
[00327] The encoder configuration CPU is operable to recognize an input non-linearity value and provide an inverse value to the linear converter to linearize the image data. The scaler is operable to map out of gamut values into in gamut values.
[00328] In one embodiment, the at least one custom encoder LUT is operable to transform an input (e.g., a standard from a manufacturer) to XYZ, Yxy, or Yu'v*. Examples of the input include, but are not limited to, RED Log3G10, ARR1 log C, ACEScc, SONY S-Log, CANON Log, PANASONIC V Log, PANAVISION Panalog, and/or BLACK MAGIC CinemaDNG. In one embodiment, the at least one custom encoder LUT is operable to transform the input to an output according to artistic needs. In one embodiment, the encoder does not include the color channel-to-XYZ converter or the XYZ-to-Y xy converter, as this functionality is incorporated into the at least one custom encoder LUT. In one embodiment, the at least one custom encoder LUT is a 65-cube look-up table. The at least one custom encoder LUT is preferably compatible with ACES Common LUT Format (CLF) - A Common File Format for Look-Up Tables S-2014-006, which was published July 22, 2021 and which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. In one embodiment, the at least one custom encoder LUT is a multi-column LUT. The at least one custom encoder LUT is preferably operable to be loaded through the operations programming port. If no LUT is required, the encoder configuration CPU is operable to bypass the at least one custom encoder LUT.
[00329] In one embodiment, RGB or multi-primary (e.g., RGBCMY, RGBC) data is converted into XYZ data using the color channel-to-XYZ converter. In a preferred embodiment, a white point value for the original video data (e.g., RGB, RGBCMY) is stored in one or more of the at least one encoder memory. The encoder configuration CPU is operable to provide an adaption calculation using the white point value. The XYZ-to-Yxy converter is operable to convert XYZ data to Yxy data. Advantageously, the Yxy image data is segmented into a luminance value and a set of colorimetric values, the relationship between Y and x,y is operable to be manipulated to use lower data rates. Similarly, the XYZ-to-Yu'v1 converter is operable to convert XYZ data to Yu'v' data, and the conversion is operable to be manipulated to use lower data rates. Any system with a luminance value and a set of colorimetric values is compatible with the present invention. The configuration CPU is operable to set the sample selector to fit one or more of the at least one encoder output. In one embodiment, the sampling selector sets a sampling structure (e.g., 4:4:4, 4:2:2, 4:2:0, 4:1:1). The sampling selector is preferably controlled by the encoder configuration CPU. In a preferred embodiment, the sampling selector also places each component in the correct serial data position as shown in Table 8.
[00331] The watermark engine is operable to modify an image from an original image to include a digital watermark. In one embodiment, the digital watermark is outside of tire ITU- R BT.2020 color gamut. In one embodiment, the digital watermark is compressed, collapsed, and/or mapped to an edge of the smaller color gamut such that it is not visible and/or not detectable when displayed on a viewing device with a smaller color gamut than ITU-R BT.2020. In another embodiment, the digital watermark is not visible and/or not detectable when displayed on a viewing device with an ITU-R BT.2020 color gamut. In one embodiment, tire digital watermark is a watermark image (e.g., logo), alphanumeric text (e.g., unique identification code), and/or a modification of pixels. In one embodiment, the digital watermark is invisible to the naked eye. In a preferred embodiment, the digital watermark is perceptible when decoded by an algorithm. In one embodiment, the algorithm uses an
encryption key to decode the digital watermark. In another embodiment, the digital watermark is visible in a non-obtrusive manner (e.g., at the bottom right of the screen). The digital watermark is preferably detectable after size compression, scaling, cropping, and/or screenshots. In yet another embodiment, the digital watermark is an imperceptible change in sound and/or video. In one embodiment, the digital watermark is a pattern (e.g., a random pattern, a fixed pattern) using a luminance difference (e.g., 1 bit luminance difference). In one embodiment, the pattern is operable to change at each flame. The digital watermark is a dynamic digital watermark and/or a static digital watermark. In one embodiment, the dynamic digital watermark works as a full frame rate or a partial frame rate (e.g., half frame rate). The watermark engine is operable to accept commands from the encoder configuration CPU.
[00332] In an alternative embodiment, the at least one encoder input already includes a digital watermark when input to the encoder. In one embodiment, a camera includes the digital watermark on an image signal that is input to the encoder as the at least one encoder input.
[00333] The at least one encoder output includes, but is not limited to SDI, HDMI, DisplayPort, and/or ethemet. In one embodiment, at least one encoder formatter formats the image data to produce the at least one encoder output. The at least one encoder formatter includes, but is not limited to, an SDI formatter, an SMPTE ST2110, and/or an HDMI formatter. In one embodiment, the SDI formatter formats the serial video data into an SDI package as a Yxy or Yu'v' output. The SMPTE ST2110 formatter formats the serial video data into an ethemet package as a Yxy or Yu'v' output. The HDMI formatter formats the serial video data into an HDMI package as a Yxy or Yu'v' output.
[00334] FIG. 32 illustrates one embodiment of a decoder. The decoder includes at least one decoder input (e.g., SDI, HDMI, Ethernet, Yxy SDI, Yxy' HDMI, Yxy Ethernet, Yu'v' SDI, Yu'v' HDMI, Yu'v' Ethemet, DisplayPort, fiber) and at least one decoder output (e.g., Yxy SDI, Yu'v' SDI, at least one SDI, XY'Z', HDMI, Ethernet, DisplayPort, fiber). In one embodiment, the decoder includes a decoder configuration central processing unit (CPU) operable to interface with at least one decoder memory. The decoder preferably includes a decoder operations programming port operable to provide updates to firmware and/or software on the decoder. The decoder further includes a decoder equalizer, at least one decoder serial to parallel (S/P) converter (e.g., SDI S/P converter, HDMI S/P converter, Ethemet S/P converter), a watermark detection engine, a watermark subtraction engine, a DRR-to-linear converter (e.g., Vi DRR-to-linear converter), an xy de-scaler, a u'v' de-scaler,
at least one sampling converter (e.g., 4:2:2 or 4:2:0 to 4:4:4 converter), at least one Yxy-to- XYZ converter, at least one Yu'v'-to-XYZ converter, a gamma library' (e.g., linear, 2.2, 2.35, 2.4, 2.6, HLG, PQ, custom), an XYZ-to-color channel library (e.g., RGB (e.g., Rec. 709, P3, Rec. 2020); multi-primary data), a color channel-to-YUV library (e.g., RGB (e.g.. Rec. 709, P3, Rec. 2020); multi-primary data), at least one sample selector, at least one transfer function, at least one custom decoder LUT, a metadata reader, a decoder metadata formatter, at least one decoder parallel to serial (P/S) converter (e.g., SDI XY'Z', at least one SDI, HDMI), and/or at least one decoder formatter (e.g., SDI X’Y'Z* formatter, SDI RGB formatter, SDI CMY formatter, HDMI formatter). In one embodiment, X’Y'Z' output includes a non-linear function (e.g., gamma, PQ, HLG) applied to XYZ data. In one embodiment, the processed image data is operable to bypass any combination of processing stages and/or components in the decoder.
[00335] In one embodiment, the decoder operations port is operable to connect to a decoder control system (e.g., via a micro universal serial bus (USB) or equivalent). In one embodiment, the decoder control system is operable to select the at least one decoder input, perform functions for the flash memory player (e.g., play, stop, forward, fast forward, rewind, fest rewind, frame selection), turn watermark detection on or off, add or modify the gamma library and/or look-up table selection, add or modify the XYZ-to-RGB library and/or look-up table selection, load data to the at least one custom decoder LUT, select bypass of one or more of the custom decoder LUT, and/or modify the Ethernet SDP. The gamma library preferably takes linear data and applies at least one non-linear function to the linear data. The at least non-linear function includes, but is not limited to, at least one standard gamma (e.g., those used in standard dynamic range (SDR) and high definition range (HDR) formats) and/or at least one custom gamma. In one embodiment, the at least one standard gamma is defined in ITU BT.709 or ITU BT.2100.
[00336] In one embodiment, the output of the gamma library is fed to the XYZ-to-RGB library, where tables are included to map the XYZ data to a standard RGB or YCbCr output format. In another embodiment, the output of the gamma library bypasses the XYZ-to-RGB library. This bypass leaves an output of XYZ data with a gamma applied. The selection of the XYZ-to-RGB library or bypass is determined by the configuration CPU. If the output format selected is YCbCr, then the XYZ-to-RGB library flags which sampling method is desired and provides that selection to the sampling selector. The sampling selector then formats the YCbCr data to a 4:2:2, 4:2:0, or 4: 1 : 1 sampling structure.
[00337] In one embodiment, an input to the decoder does not include full pixel sampling (e.g., 4:2:2, 4:2:0, 4: 1 : 1). The at least one sampling converter is operable to take subsampled images and convert the subsampled images to full 4:4:4 sampling. In one embodiment, the 4:4:4 Yxy image data is then converted to XYZ using the at least one Yxy-to-XYZ converter. In another embodiment, the 4:4:4 Yu'v* image data is then converted to XYZ using the Yu'v' using the at least one Yu'v'-to-XYZ converter. Image data is then converted from a parallel form to a serial stream.
[00338] The metadata reader is operable to read Extended Display Identification Data (EDID) (e.g., for HDMI inputs), SDP parameters (SMPTE ST 2110), payload ID, and/or ancillary' information (e.g., vertical ancillary data (VANC)). The decoder configuration CPU is operable to process data from the metadata reader. Further, the decoder configuration CPU is operable to select particular settings and/or deliver selected data to the decoder metadata formatter. The decoder metadata formatter is operable to take information from the decoder configuration CPU and arrange the information to be reinserted into the output of the process. In one embodiment, each decoder output formatter then takes this formatted data and times it to be used in the serial stream.
[00339] In one embodiment, the at least one SDI output includes more than one SDI output. Advantageously, this allows for output over multiple links (e.g., System 3). In one embodiment, the at least one SDI output includes a first SDI output and a second SDI output. In one embodiment, the first SDI output is used to transport a first set of color channel data (e.g., RGB) and the second SDI output is used to transport a second set of color channel data (e.g., CMY).
[00340] The watermark detection engine detects the digital watermark. In one embodiment, a pattern of the digital watermark is loaded to the decoder using the operations programming port. In one embodiment, the decoder configuration CPU is operable to turn the watermark detection engine on and off. The watermark subtraction engine removes the digital watermark from image data before formatting for display on the at least one viewing device. In one embodiment, the decoder configuration CPU is operable to allow bypass of the watermark subtraction engine, which will leave the digital watermark on an output image. In a preferred embodiment, the decoder requires the digital watermark in the processed image data sent from the encoder to provide the at least one decoder output. Thus, the decoder does not send color channel data to the at least one viewing device if the digital watermark is not present in the processed image data. In an alternate embodiment, the decoder is operable to provide the at least one decoder output without the digital watermark in the processed image
data sent from the encoder. If the digital watermark is not present in the processed image data, an image displayed on the at least one viewing device preferably includes a visible watermark.
[00341] In one embodiment, output from the watermark subtraction process includes data including a non-linearity (e.g., Vi DRR). Non-linear data is converted back to linear data using an inverse non-linear transfer fimction (e.g., NLTF"1) for the Y channel and the xy or u'v' channels. The xy or u'v' channels are rescaled and undergo sampling conversion.
[00342] In one embodiment, the at least one custom decoder LUT includes a 9-column LUT. In one embodiment, the 9-column LUT includes 3 columns for a legacy RGB output (e.g., Rec. 709, Rec. 2020, P3) and 6 columns for a 6P multi-primary display (e.g., RGBCMY). Other numbers of columns (e.g., 7 columns) and alternative multi-primary displays (e.g., RGBC) are compatible with the present invention. In one embodiment, the at least one custom decoder LUT (e.g., the 9-column LUT) is operable to produce output values using tetrahedral interpolation. Advantageously, tetrahedral interpolation uses a smaller volume of color space to determine the output values, resulting in more accurate color channel data. In one embodiment, each of the tetrahedrons used in the tetrahedral interpolation includes a neutral diagonal. Advantageously, this embodiment works even with having less than 6 color channels. For example, a 4P output (e.g., RGBC) or a 5P output (e.g., RGBCY) using an FPGA is operable to be produced using tetrahedral interpolation. Further, this embodiment allows for an encoder to produce legacy RGB output in addition to multiprimary output. In an alternative embodiment, the at least one custom decoder LUT is operable to produce output value using cubic interpolation. The at least one custom decoder LUT is preferably operable to accept linear XYZ data. In one embodiment, the at least one custom decoder LUT is a multi-column LUT. The at least one custom decoder LUT is preferably operable to be loaded through the operations programming port. If no LUT is required, the decoder configuration CPU is operable to bypass the at least one custom decoder LUT.
[00343] In one embodiment, the at least one custom decoder LUT is operable to be used for streamlined HDMT transport. In one embodiment, the at least one custom decoder LUT is a 3D LUT. In one embodiment, the at least one custom decoder LUT is operable to take in a 3-column input (e.g., RGB, XYZ) and produce an output of greater than three columns (e.g., RGBC, RGBCY, RGBCMY). Advantageously, this system only requires 3 channels of data as the input to the at least one custom decoder LUT. In one embodiment, the at least one custom decoder LUT applies a non-linear fimction (e.g., inverse gamma) and/or a curve to
produce a linear output. In another embodiment, the at least one custom decoder LUT is a trimming LUT.
[00344] The at least one decoder formatter is operable to organize a serial stream as a proper format for the at least one output. In a preferred embodiment, the decoder includes a corresponding decoder formatter for each of the at least one decoder output. For example, if the decoder includes at least one HDMI output in the at least one decoder output, the decoder also includes at least one HDMI formatter in the at least one decoder formatter; if the decoder includes at least one SDI output in the at least one decoder output, the decoder also includes at least one SDI formatter in the at least one decoder formatter; if the decoder includes at least one Ethernet output in the at least one decoder output, the decoder also includes at least one Ethernet formatter in the at least one decoder formatter; and so forth.
[00345] The encoder and/or the decoder are operable to generate, insert, and/or recover metadata related to an image signal. The metadata includes, but is not limited to, a color space (e.g., 6P-B, 6P-C), an image transfer function (e.g., DRR, gamma, PQ, HLG, 1/2 DRR), a peak white value, a white point (e.g., D65, D60, DCI), an image signal range (e.g., narrow (SMPTE) or full), sampling structure (e.g., 4:4:4, 4:2:2, 4:2:0, 4:1:1), bit depth, (e.g., 8, 10, 12, 16), and/or a signal format (e.g., RGB, Yxy, Yu'v', multi-primary (e.g., RGBCMY, RGBC)). In one embodiment, the metadata is inserted into SDI or ST2110 using ancillary (ANC) data packets. In another embodiment, the metadata is inserted using Vendor Specific InfoFrame (VSIF) data as part of the CTA 861 standard. In one embodiment, the metadata is compatible with SMPTE ST 2110-10:2017, SMPTE ST 2110-20:2017, SMPTE ST 2110- 40:2018, SMPTE ST 352:2013, and/or SMPTE ST 352:2011, each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
[00346] Additional details about the multi-primary system and the display are included in
U.S. Application Nos. 17/180,441 and 17/209,959, and U.S. Patent Publication Nos. 20210027693, 20210020094, 20210035487, and 20210043127, each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
[00347] DISPLAY ENGINE
[00348] In one embodiment, the present invention provides a display engine operable to interact with a graphics processing unit (GPU) and provide Yxy, XYZ, YUV, Yu'v', RGB, YCrCb, and/or ICiCp configured outputs. In one embodiment, the display engine and the GPU are on a video card. Alternatively, the display engine and the GPU are embedded on a motherboard or a central processing unit (CPU) die. The display engine and the GPU are preferably included in and/or connected to at least one viewing device (e.g., display, video
game console, smartphone, etc.). Additional information related to GPUs are disclosed in U.S. Patent Nos. 9,098,323; 9,235,512; 9,263,000; 9,318,073; 9,442,706; 9,477,437; 9,494,994; 9,535,815; 9,740,611; 9,779,473; 9,805,440; 9,880,851; 9,971,959; 9,978,343; 10,032,244; 10,043,232; 10,114,446; 10,185,386; 10,191,759; 10,229,471; 10,324,693; 10,331,590; 10,460,417; 10,515,611; 10,521,874; 10,559,057; 10,580,105; 10,593,011; 10,600,141; 10,628,909; 10,705,846; 10,713,059; 10,769,746; 10,839,476; 10,853,904; 10,867,362; 10,922,779; 10,923,082; 10,963,299; and 10,970,805 and U.S. Patent Publication Nos. 20140270364, 20150145871, 20160180487, 20160350245, 20170178275, 20170371694, 20180121386, 20180314932, 20190034316, 20190213706, 20200098082, 20200183734, 20200279348, 20200294183, 20200301708, 20200310522, 20200379864, and 20210049030, each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
[00349] In one embodiment, the GPU includes a render engine. In one embodiment, the render engine includes at least one render pipeline (RP), a programmable pixel shader, a programmable vector shader, a vector array processor, a curvature engine, and/or a memory cache. The render engine is operable to interact with a memory controller interface, a command CPU, a host bus (e.g., peripheral component interconnect (PCI), PCI Express (PCIe), accelerated graphics port (AGP)), and/or an adaptive foil frame anti-aliasing. The memory controller interface is operable to interact with a display memory (e.g., double data rate (DDR) memory), a pixel cache, the command CPU, the host bus, and a display engine. The command CPU is operable to exchange data with the display engine.
[00350] FIG. 33 illustrates one embodiment of a display engine operable to interact with a graphics processing unit (GPU) according to the present invention. In a preferred embodiment, tire display engine operable to interact with the GPU is included on a video card. The video card is operable to interface with a computer. In a preferred embodiment, the video card is operable to be inserted into a connector (e.g., PCIe connector, PCI connector, accelerated graphics port (AGP) connector, etc.) located within a computer. The computer includes a command central processing unit (CPU). The command CPU is dedicated to communication between the video card and the computer core. The command CPU is preferably operable to input instractions from an application programming interface (API). The command CPU is further operable to distribute appropriate commands to components in the video card. The video card further includes a memory controller interface. The memory controller interface is preferably a bus including hardware operable to manage which data is allowed on the bus and where the data is routed.
[00351] In one embodiment, the video card includes a plurality of video cards linked together to allow scaling of graphics processing. In one embodiment, the plurality of video cards is linked with a PCIe connector. Other connectors are compatible with the plurality of video cards. In one embodiment, each of the plurality of video cards has the same technical specifications. In one embodiment, the API includes methods for scaling the graphics processing, and the command CPU is operable to distribute the graphics processing across the plurality of video cards. The command CPU is operable to scale up the graphics processing as well as scale down the graphics processing based on processing demands and/or power demands of the system.
[00352] The display engine is operable to take rendered data from the GPU and convert the rendered data to a format operable to be displayed on at least one viewing device. The display engine includes a raster scaler, at least one video display controller (e.g., XYZ video display controller, RGB video display controller, ICrCp video display controller), a color channel-to-XYZ converter, a linear converter, a scaler and/or limiter, a multi-column LUT with at least three columns (e.g., three-dimensional (3D) LUT (e.g., 1293 LUT)), an XYZ-to- Yxy converter, an XYZ-to-Yu'v' converter, a non-linear function and/or tone curve applicator (e.g., */i DRR), a sampling selector, a video bus, and/or at least one output formatter and/or encoder (e.g., ST 2082, ST 2110, DisplayPort, HDMI). In one embodiment, the color channel-to-XYZ converter includes an RGB-to-XYZ converter. Additionally or alternatively, the color channel-to-XYZ converter includes a Yu'v'-to-XYZ converter, an ICTCp-to-XYZ converter and/or an ACES-to-XYZ converter. The video bus is operable to receive input from a graphics display controller and/or at least one input device (e.g., a cursor, a mouse, a joystick, a keyboard, a videogame controller, etc.).
[00353] The video card is operable to connect through any number of lanes provided by hardware on the computer. The video card is operable to communicate through a communication interface including, but not limited to, a PCIe Physical Layer (PHY) interface. In one embodiment, the communication interface is an API supported by the computer (e.g., OpenGL, Direct3D, OpenCL, Vulkan). Image data in the form of vector data or bitmap data is output from the communication interface into the command CPU. The communication interface is operable to notify the command CPU when image data is available. The command CPU opens the bus bidirectional gate and instructs the memory' controller interface to transmit the image data to a double data rate (DDR) memory. The memory controller interface is operable to open a path from the DDR memory to allow the
image data to pass to the GPU for rendering. After rendering, the image data is channeled back to the DDR for storage pending output processing by the display engine.
[00354] After the image data is rendered and stored in the DDR memory, the command CPU instructs the memory controller interface to allow rendered image data to load into the raster scaler. The command CPU loads the raster scaler with framing information. The foaming information includes, but is not limited to, a start of file (SOF) identifier, an end of file (EOF) identifier, a pixel count, a pixel order, multi-primary data (e.g., RGBCMY data), and/or a frame rate. In one embodiment, the framing information includes HDMI and/or Display Port (e.g., CTA 861 format) information. In one embodiment, Extended Display Identification Data (EDID) is operable to override specifications in the API. The raster scaler provides output as image data formatted as a raster in the same format as the file being read (e.g., RGB, XYZ, Yxy, Yu'v'). In one embodiment, the output of the raster scaler is RGB data, XYZ data, or Yxy data. Alternatively, the output of the raster scaler is Yu'v' data, ICTCp data, or ACES data.
[00355] In one embodiment, the output of the raster scaler is sent to a graphics display controller. In one embodiment, the graphics display controller is operable to provide display information for a graphical user interface (GUI). In one embodiment, the RGB video controller and the XYZ video controller block image data from entering the video bus. Raster data includes, but is not limited to, synchronization data, an SOF, an EOF, a frame rate, a pixel order, multi-primary data (e.g., RGBCMY data), and/or a pixel count. In one embodiment, the raster data is limited to an RGB output that is operable to be transmitted to the at least one output formatter and/or encoder.
[00356] For common video display, a separate path is included. The separate path is operable to provide outputs including, but not limited to, SMPTE SDI, Ethernet, DisplayPort, and/or HDMI to the at least one output formatter and/or encoder. The at least one video display controller (e.g., RGB video display controller) is operable to limit and/or optimize video data for streaming and/or compression. In one embodiment, the RGB video display controller and the XYZ video display controller block image data from entering the video bus.
[00357] In a preferred embodiment, image data is provided by the raster scaler in the format provided by the file being played (e.g., RGB, multi-primary (e.g., RGBCMY), XYZ, Yxy, Yu'v'). In one embodiment, the raster scaler presets the XYZ video display controller as the format provided and contained within the raster size to be displayed. In one embodiment, non-linear information (e.g., OOTF) sent from the API through the command CPU is sent to
the linear converter. The linear converter is operable to use the non-linear information. For example, if the image data was authored using an OETF, then an inverse of the OETF is operable to be used by the linear converter, or, if the image information already has an EOTF applied, the inverse of the EOTF is operable to be used by the linear converter. In one embodiment, the linear converter develops an EOTF map to linearize input data (e.g., when EOTF data is available). In one embodiment, the linear converter uses an EOTF when already available. After linear data is loaded and a summation process is developed, the XYZ video display controller passes the image data in its native format (e.g., RGB, multi-primary data (e.g., RGBCMY), XYZ, Yxy, Yu'v'), but without a non-linearity applied to the luminance (e.g., Y) component. The color channel -to-XYZ converter is operable to accept a native format (e.g., RGB, multi-primary data (e.g., RGBCMY), XYZ, Yxy, Yu'v') and convert to an XYZ format. In one embodiment, the XYZ format includes at least one chromatic adaptation (e.g., D60 to D65). For RGB, the XYZ video display controller uses data supplied from the command CPU, which obtains color gamut and white point specifications from the API to convert to an XYZ output. For a multi-primary system, a corresponding matrix or a look-up table (LUT) is used to convert from the multi-primary system to XYZ. In one embodiment, the multi-primary system is RGBCMY (e.g., 6P-B, 6P-C, S6Pa, S6Pb). For a Yxy system, the color channel-to-XYZ converter formats the Yxy data back to XYZ data. For a Yu'v' system, the color channel-to-XYZ converter formats the Yu'v' data back to XYZ data. In another embodiment, the color channel-to-XYZ converter is bypassed. For example, the color channel-to-XYZ converter is bypassed if there is a requirement to stay within a multi-primary system. Additionally, the color channel-to-XYZ converter is bypassed for XYZ data.
[00358] In one embodiment, the input to the scaler and/or limiter is XYZ data or multiprimary data. In one embodiment, the multi-primary data includes, but is not limited to, RGBCMY (e.g., 6P-B, 6P-C, S6Pa, S6Pb), RGBC, RG1G2B, RGBCW, RGBCY, RG1G2BW, RGBWRWGWB, or R1R2G1G2B1B2. Other multi-primary data formats are compatible with the present invention. The scaler and/or limiter is operable to map out of gamut values (e.g., negative values) to in gamut values (e.g., out of gamut values developed in the process to convert to XYZ). In one embodiment, the scaler and/or limiter uses a gamut mapping algorithm to map out of gamut values to in gamut values.
[00359] In one embodiment, the input to the scaler and/or limiter is multi-primary data and all channels are optimized to have values between 0 and 1. For example, if the input is RGBCMY data, all six channels are optimized to have values between 0 and 1. In one embodiment, the output of the scaler and/or limiter is operable to be placed into a three-
dimensional (3-D) multi-column LUT. In one embodiment, the 3-D multi-column LUT includes one column for each channel. For example, if the output is RGBCMY data, the 3-D multi-column LUT includes six columns (i.e., one for each channel). Within the application feeding the API, each channel is operable to be selected to balance out the white point and/or shade the image toward one particular color channel. In one embodiment, the 3-D multi- column LUT is bypassed if the output of the scaler and/or limiter is XYZ data. The output of the 3-D multi-column LUT is sent to the XYZ-to-Yxy converter, where a simple summation process is used to make the conversion. Alternatively, the output of the 3-D multi-column LUT is sent to the XYZ-to-Yu'v' converter. In one embodiment, if the video data is RGBCMY, the XYZ-to-Yxy converter or XYZ-to-Yu'v' converter process is bypassed. [00360] Because the image data is linear, any tone curve is operable to be added to the luminance (e.g., Y). The advantage to the present invention using, e.g., Yxy data or YuV data, is that only the luminance needs a tone curve modification. L*a*b* has a 1/3 gamma applied to all three channels. 1PT and ICTCp operate with a gamma in all three channels. The tone curve is operable to be added to the luminance (e.g., Y) only, with the colorimetric coordinates (e.g., x and y channels, u* and v* channels) remaining linear. The tone curve is operable to be anything (e.g., a non-linear function), including standard values currently used. In one embodiment, the tone curve is an EOTF (e.g., those described for television and/or digital cinema). Additionally or alternatively, the tone curve includes HDR modifications. In another embodiment, a non-linear transfer function is added to all three channels (e.g., Yxy or Yu'v').
[00361] In one embodiment, the output is handled through this process as three to six individual components (e.g., three components for Yxy, Yu'v', or XYZ, six components for RGBCMY, etc.). Alternative number of primaries and components are compatible with the present invention. However, in some serial formats, this level of payload is too large. In one embodiment, the sampling selector sets a sampling structure (e.g., 4:4:4, 4:2:2, 4:2:0, 4: 1 : 1). In one embodiment, the sampling selector is operable to subsample processed image data. The sampling selector is preferably controlled by the command CPU. In one embodiment, the command CPU gets its information from the API and/or the display EDID. In a preferred embodiment, the sampling selector also places each component in the correct serial data position as shown in Table 11 (supra).
[00362] The output of the sampling select is fed to the main video bus, which integrates
SOF and EOF information into the image data. It then distributes this to the at least one output formatter and/or encoder. In one embodiment, the output is RGBCMY. In one
embodiment, the RGBCMY output is configured as 4:4:4:4:4:4 data. The format to the at least one viewing device includes, but is not limited to, SMPTE ST2082 (e.g., 3, 6, and 12G serial data output), SMPTE ST2110 (e.g., to move through ethemet), and/or CTA 861 (e.g., DisplayPort, HDMI). The video card preferably has the appropriate connectors (e.g., DisplayPort, HDMI) for distribution through any external system (e.g., computer) and connection to at least one viewing device (e.g., monitor, television, etc.). The at least one viewing device includes, but is not limited to, a smartphone, a tablet, a laptop screen, a light emitting diode (LED) display, an organic light emitting diode (OLED) display, a miniLED display, a microLED display, a liquid crystal display (LCD), a quantum dot display, a quantum nano emitting diode (QNED) device, a personal gaming device, a virtual reality (VR) device and/or an augmented reality (AR) device, an LED wall, a wearable display, and at least one projector. In one embodiment, the at least one viewing device is a single viewing device.
[00363] FIG. 34 illustrates one embodiment of a process flow diagram to convert an image for display. An image from an image source undergoes linear conversion and/or scaling (e.g., 0 to 1 scaling) to produce a processed image. The processed image undergoes RGB to XYZ conversion and XYZ to Yxy conversion. Alternatively, the processed image undergoes XYZ to Yu'v' conversion. At least one non-linear transfer function (NLTF) (e.g., Yi DRR) is applied to the luminance (Y) to create a luma (Y1). In a preferred embodiment, the x and y colorimetric coordinates are scaled and then have the at least one NLTF applied. Alternatively, the u' and v' colorimetric coordinates are scaled and then have the at least one NLTF applied. The colorimetric coordinates (x and y, u' and v') are folly sampled or subsampled. The luma and the colorimetric coordinates (e.g., folly sampled, subsampled) are formatted with an output formatter (e.g., ST 2082, ST 2110, DisplayPort, HDMI) before signal transport, thereby creating formatted luma and colorimetric coordinates. The formatted luma and colorimetric coordinates are decoded by using an inverse of the at least one function (e.g., inverse Vi DRR), rescaling of the colorimetric coordinates (x and y, u' and v'), and sampling reconstruction, thereby creating decoded image data. The decoded image data undergoes Yxy to XYZ conversion or Yu'v' to XYZ conversion and XYZ to gamut (e.g., RGB, ITU-R BT.709, SMPTE RP431, ITU-R BT.2020, ACES, custom, multi-primary) conversion before a gamma function is applied, thereby creating image data. The image data is operable to be sent to a display (e.g., operable to display the gamut). In one embodiment, the image data undergoes further processing in the display.
[00364] The top of the diagram shows the process that typically resides in the camera or image generator. The bottom of the diagram shows the decode process typically located in the display. The image is acquired from a camera or generated from an electronic source. Typically, a gamma has been applied and needs to be removed to provide a linear image. After the linear image is acquired, the linear image is scaled to values between 0 and 1. this allows scaling to a desired brightness on the display. The source is operable to detail information related to the image including, but not limited to, a color gamut of the device and/or a white point used in acquisition. Using adaptation methods (e.g., chromatic adaptation), an accurate XYZ conversion is possible. After the image is coded as XYZ, it is operable to be converted to Yxy. The components are operable to be split into a Y path and an xy path or a Y path and a u'v' path. A non-linearity (e.g., DRR) is applied to the Y component. In one embodiment, the non-linearity (e.g., DRR) is also applied to the scaled xy or u'v' components. The xy or u'v' components are operable to be subsampled, if required, e.g., to fit into the application without loss of luminance information. These are recombined and input to a format process that formats the signal for output to a transport (e.g., SDI, IP packet).
[00365] After the signal arrives at the receiver, it is decoded to output the separate Yxy or Yu'v' components. The Y channel preferably has an inverse non-linearity (e.g., inverse DRR) applied to restore the Y channel to linear space. If the xy or u'v' channels had a non-linearity applied, the xy or u'v' channels preferably have the inverse non-linearity (e.g., inverse DRR) applied to restore the image data (i.e., Yxy, Yu'v') to linear space and then re-scaled to their original values. The xy or u'v' channels are brought back to full sub-pixel sampling. These are then converted from Yxy to XYZ or Yu'v' to XYZ. XYZ is operable to converted to the display gamut (e.g., RGB). Because a linear image is used, any gamma is operable to be applied by the display. This advantageously puts the limit of the image not in the signal, but at the maximum performance of the display.
[00366] With this method, images are operable to match between displays with different gammas, gamuts, and/or primaries (e.g., multi-primary). Colorimetric information and luminance are presented as linear values. Any white point, gamma, and/or gamut is operable to be defined, e.g., as a scene referred set of values or as a display referred set. Furthermore, dissimilar displays are operable to be connected and set to match if the image parameters fall within the limitations of the display. Advantageously, this allows accurate comparison without conversion.
[00367] In any system, the settings of the camera and the capabilities of the display are known. Current methods take an acquired image and confirm it to an assumed display specification. Even with a sophisticated system (e.g., ACES), the final output is conformed to a known display specification. The design intent of a Yxy or Yu'v' system is to avoid these processes by using a method of image encoding that allows the display to maximize performance while maintaining creative intent.
[00368] The system is operable to be divided into simpler parts for explanation: (1) camera/acquisition, (2) files and storage, (3) transmission, and (4) display. Most professional cameras have documentation describing the color gamut that is possible, the OETF used by the camera, and/or a white point to which the camera was balanced. In an RGB system, these parameters must be tracked and modified throughout the workflow.
[00369] However, in a Yxy or Yu'v' system, in one embodiment, these conversions are enabled by the camera as part of the encode process because image parameters are known at the time of acquisition. Thus, the Yxy or Yu'v' system has the intrinsic colorimetric and luminance information without having to cany along additional image metadata. Alternatively, the conversions are operable to be accomplished outside the camera in a dedicated encoder (e.g., hardware) or image processing (e.g., software) in a post-production application.
[00370] FIG. 35 illustrates one embodiment of a camera process flow. An image sensor (e.g., RGB sensor) in a camera is operable to obtain image data. In one embodiment, the image data is processed by the camera (e.g., via a camera manufacturer's proprietary process), thereby creating processed camera data. The image data or the camera data undergoes linear conversion and/or scaling (e.g., 0 to 1 scaling) to produce a processed image. In one embodiment, the processed image undergoes conversion from an acquisition gamut (e.g., RGB) to Yxy or Yu'v1. In one embodiment, a non-linear transfer function (NLTF) (e.g., DRR) is applied to Y (e.g., to create luma) and xy. In another embodiment, an NLTF (e.g., DRR) is applied to Y (e.g., to create luma) and u'v'. The luma and the colorimetric coordinates (e.g., fully sampled, subsampled) are formatted with an output formatter (e.g., ST 2082, ST 2110, DisplayPort, HDMI) to provide output data. In one embodiment, the output data is transmitted to a display and/or a decoder. Although the example shown in FIG. 35 uses Yxy or Yu'v* data, the system is operable to be used with a plurality of formats.
[00371] Images are acquired in a specific process designed by a camera manufacturer. Instead of using RAW output format, the process starts with the conversion of the RGB
channels to a linear (e.g., 16 -bit) data format, wherein the RGB data is normalized to 1. In one embodiment, this linear image is then converted from RGB to XYZ (e.g., via a conversion matrix) and then processed to produce the Yxy or Y u'v' data stream. Y continues as a folly sampled value, but xy or u'v' are operable to be subsampled (e.g., 4:2:2, 4:2:0). A DRR value is applied to Yxy or Yu'v' and scaled x and y or u' and v' values prior to being sent as a serial data stream or is stored in a suitable file container.
[00372] The biggest advantage that the Yxy or Yu'v' system provides is the ability to send one signal format to any display and achieve an accurate image. The signal includes all image information, which allows for the display design to be optimized for best performance. Issues (e.g., panel, backlight accuracy) are operable to be adjusted to the conformed image gamut and luminance based on the Yxy or Yu'v' data.
[00373] Prior art displays use a specific gamut. Typically, the specific gamut is an RGB gamut (e.g., Rec. 2020, P3, Rec. 709). Comparing different displays using a Yxy or Yu'v' input offers a significant advantage. Images displayed on a BT.709 monitor matches a P3 monitor and a BT.2020 monitor for all colors that fell within a gamut of the BT.709 monitor. Colors outside that gamut are controlled by the individual monitor optimized for that device. Images with gamuts felling within the P3 color space will match on the P3 monitor and the BT.2020 monitor until the image gamut exceeds the capability of tire P3 monitor.
[00374] The display input process is like an inverted camera process. However, the output of this process is operable to be adapted to any display parameters using the same image data. [00375] FIG. 36 illustrates one embodiment of a display process flow. In one embodiment, a Yxy or Yu'v1 signal is input as a digital signal. In one embodiment, the digital signal undergoes equalization. The formatted luma and colorimetric coordinates are decoded by using an inverse of at least one non-linear function (e.g., inverse 14 DRR), thereby creating decoded image data. In one embodiment, the decoded image data undergoes Yxy to XYZ or Yu'v' or XYZ conversion to create XYZ data. The XYZ data is operable to converted to a gamut (e.g., RGB, ITU-R BT.709, SMPTE RP431, ITU-R BT.2020, ACES, custom, multiprimary) using an XYZ to gamut library', thereby creating gamut data. In one embodiment, a gamma library is operable to apply at least one function (e.g., linear, 2.2, 2.35, 2.4, 2.6 gamma functions, HLG, PQ, custom) to the gamut data. In one embodiment, the gamut data (e.g., with or without the at least one function applied) undergoes a calibration process (e.g., using a LUT) before being transmitted to a display panel and/or modulator. Although FIG. 36 illustrates a Yxy or Yu'v' signal, the system is compatible with a plurality of data formats.
[00376] Most image file formats are based on storing the RGB data, and typically only accommodate three sets of data. Advantageously, the Yxy or Yu'v' implementation only requires three sets of data, which simplifies substitutions into any file format.
[00377] The ability to move Yxy or Yu’v’ coded image content in real time through transmission systems commonly used in production, broadcast, and streaming applications is essential, the requirements call for a simple system using minimal changes to current infrastructure. The Yxy or Yu'v' encoding of image data allows for a simple substitution with a modification to any payload data that is used to identify the type of encode.
[00378] The design of an RGB system uses information obtained from the camera and builds a replicating electrical representation formatted within signal. This means that each signal fed to a process or display must be formatted or reformatted to be viewed correctly. Yxy or Yu'v' redefine this and advantageously move the formatting into the acquiring device and the display, leaving a consistent signal available for differing devices. Connection in the system is simplified as connections and display setup are agnostic to the signal format.
[00379] SYSTEM 4 SUBSTITUTIONS
[00380] For SMPTE and CTA serial data streams as well as SMPTE ethemet streams, the substitution of Yxy or Yu'v* into each format preferably follows that shown in Table 12.
00382] In a preferred embodiment, payload ID identifies Yxy or Yu'v' at Byte 4 as shown in FIG. 37. FIG. 38A illustrates one embodiment of payload ID per SMPTE ST352:2013 and ST292:2018. FIG. 38B illustrates one embodiment of payload ID per SMPTE ST352:2013 and ST372:2017. FIG. 38C illustrates one embodiment of payload ID per SMPTE ST352:2013 and ST425:2017.
[00383] FIG. 39 illustrates one embodiment of a System 4 Yxy 10-bit 4:2:2 encode as applied to SMPTE ST292 (e.g., SMPTE ST292-L2018).
[00384] FIGS. 40A-40B illustrate one embodiment of a System 4 Yxy 10-bit 4:4:4 YCBCR encode as applied to SMPTE ST372 (e.g., SMPTE ST372:2017). In one embodiment, the encode utilizes a first link (e.g., Link A) and a second link (e.g., Link B). FIG. 40A illustrates one embodiment of a first link for a System 4 Yxy 10-bit 4:4:4 YCBCR encode as applied to
SMPTE ST372. FIG. 40B illustrates one embodiment of a second link for a System 4 Yxy 10-bit 4:4:4 YCBCR encode as applied to SMPTE ST372.
[00385] FIGS. 41A-41B illustrate one embodiment of a System 4 10-bit 4:4:4 Yxy RGB encode as applied to SMPTE ST372 (e.g., SMPTE ST372:2017). In one embodiment, the encode utilizes a first link (e.g., Link A) and a second link (e.g., Link B). FIG. 41A illustrates one embodiment of a first link for a System 4 Yxy 10-bit 4:4:4 RGB encode as applied to SMPTE ST372. FIG. 41B illustrates one embodiment of a second link for a System 4 Yxy 10-bit 4:4:4 RGB encode as applied to SMPTE ST372.
[00386] FIGS. 42A-42B illustrate one embodiment of a System 4 12-bit 4:4:4 Yxy YCBCR encode as applied to SMPTE ST372 (e.g., SMPTE ST372:2017). In one embodiment, the encode utilizes a first link (e.g., Link A) and a second link (e.g., Link B). FIG. 42A illustrates one embodiment of a first link for a System 4 Yxy 12-bit 4:4:4 YCBCR encode as applied to SMPTE ST372. FIG. 42B illustrates one embodiment of a second link for a System 4 Yxy 12-bit 4:4:4 YCBCR encode as applied to SMPTE ST372.
[00387] FIGS. 43A-43B illustrate one embodiment of a System 4 12-bit 4:4:4 Yxy RGB encode as applied to SMPTE ST372 (e.g., SMPTE ST372:2017). In one embodiment, the encode utilizes a first link (e.g., Link A) and a second link (e.g., Link B). FIG. 43A illustrates one embodiment of a first link for a System 4 Yxy 12-bit 4:4:4 RGB encode as applied to SMPTE ST372. FIG. 43B illustrates one embodiment of a second link for a System 4 Yxy 12-bit 4:4:4 RGB encode as applied to SMPTE ST372.
[00388] FIGS. 44A-44B illustrate one embodiment of a System 4 10-bit 4:2:2 Yxy Level A encode as applied to SMPTE ST425 (e.g., SMPTE ST425-1 :2017) (“Mapping Structure 1”). FIG. 44A illustrates one embodiment of a first data stream for a System 4 Yxy 10-bit 4:2:2 Level A encode as applied to SMPTE ST425. FIG. 44B illustrates one embodiment of a second data stream for a System 4 Yxy 10-bit 4:2:2 Level A encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
[00389] FIGS. 45A-45B illustrate one embodiment of a System 4 10-bit 4:4:4 Yxy Level A encode as applied to SMPTE ST425 (e.g., SMPTE ST425-1 :2017) (“Mapping Structure 2”). FIG. 45 A illustrates one embodiment of a first data stream for a System 4 Yxy 10-bit 4:4:4 Level A encode as applied to SMPTE ST425. FIG. 45B illustrates one embodiment of a second data stream for a System 4 Yxy 10-bit 4:4:4 Level A encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
[00390] FIGS. 46A-46B illustrate one embodiment of a System 4 Yxy 12-bit 4:4:4 Level A encode as applied to SMPTE ST425 (e.g., SMPTE ST425-L2017) (“Mapping Structure
3”). FIG. 46A illustrates one embodiment of a first data stream for a System 4 Yxy 12-bit 4:4:4 Level A encode as applied to SMPTE ST425. FIG. 46B illustrates one embodiment of a second data stream for a System 4 Yxy 12-bit 4:4:4 Level A encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
[00391] FIGS. 47A-47B illustrate one embodiment of a System 4 12-bit 4:2:2 Yxy Level A encode as applied to SMPTE ST425 (e.g., SMPTE ST425-L2017) (“Mapping Structure 4”). FIG. 47A illustrates one embodiment of a first data stream for a System 4 Yxy 12-bit 4:2:2 Level A encode as applied to SMPTE ST425. FIG. 47B illustrates one embodiment of a second data stream for a System 4 Yxy 12-bit 4:2:2 Level A encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
[00392] FIGS. 48A-48B illustrate one embodiment of a System 4 Yxy Level B Multiplex Dual Stream (DS) encode as applied to SMPTE ST425 (e.g., SMPTE ST425-L2017). FIG. 48A illustrates one embodiment of a first data stream for a System 4 Yxy Level B Multiplex Dual Stream (DS) encode as applied to SMPTE ST425. FIG. 48B illustrates one embodiment of a second data stream for a System 4 Yxy Level B Multiplex Dual Stream (DS) encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
[00393] FIGS. 49A-49B illustrate one embodiment of a System 4 Yxy 10-bit Level B
Multiplex Dual Link (DL) encode as applied to SMPTE ST425 (e.g., SMPTE ST425- 1:2017). FIG. 49 A illustrates one embodiment of a first data link for a System 4 Yxy 10-bit Level B Multiplex Dual Link (DL) encode as applied to SMPTE ST425. FIG. 49B illustrates one embodiment of a second data link for a System 4 Yxy 10-bit Level B Multiplex Dual Link (DL) encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
[00394] FIGS. 50A-50B illustrate one embodiment of a System 4 Yxy 12-bit Level B Multiplex Dual Link (DL) encode as applied to SMPTE ST425 (e.g., SMPTE ST425- 1:2017). FIG. 50A illustrates one embodiment of a first data link for a System 4 Yxy 12-bit Level B Multiplex Dual Link (DL) encode as applied to SMPTE ST425. FIG. SOB illustrates one embodiment of a second data link for a System 4 Yxy 12-bit Level B Multiplex Dual Link (DL) encode as applied to SMPTE ST425.
[00395] In one embodiment, the formatting is compatible with SMPTE ST2022-6 (2012). Advantageously, there is no need to add any identification because the Yxy or Yu'v* identification is included in the mapped payload ID. SMPTE ST2022 does not describe any modifications to mapping, so mapping to Ethernet simply follows the appropriate SDI standard. In one embodiment, map code 0x00 uses Level A direct mapping from SMPTE ST292 or SMPTE ST425. In one embodiment, map code 0x01 uses Level B direct mapping
formatted as SMPTE ST372 DL. In one embodiment, map code 0x02 uses Level B direct mapping formatted as SMPTE ST292 DS.
[00396] FIG. 51 is a table illustrating modification of SMPTE ST2036-1 (2014) parameters to include System 4 (e.g., Yxy, Yu'v').
[00397] Table 13 illustrates construction of 4:4:4 pgroups. Table 14 illustrates construction of 4:2:2 pgroups. Table 15 illustrates construction of 4:2:0 pgroups.
[00401] In one embodiment, SDP parameters are defined using SMPTE ST2110-20 (2017). In one embodiment, a Yxy or YuV system uses CIE S 014-3:2011 as a colorimetry standard. Table 16 illustrates one embodiment of SDP colorimetry flag modification.
[00403] In one example, the SDP parameters for a Yxy system are as follows: m = video 30000 RTP/AVP 112, a = rtpmap: 112 raw/90000, a = fintp: 112, sampling = YCbCr-4:2:2, width = 1280, height = 720, exactfiamerate = 60000/1001, depth = 10, TCS (Transfer Characteristic System) = SDR, colorimetry = Yxy, PM = 2110GPM, SSN = ST2110- 20:2017.
[00404] FIG. 52 is a table illustrating modification of CTA 861 Table 6 - Colorimetry Transfer Characteristics to include System 4 (e.g., Yxy, Yu'v'). In one embodiment, CTA 861 standards conform to CTA 861-H (2021), which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
[00405] FIG. 53 A is a table for Yxy 8-bit 4:2:2 encoding with 4 lanes. FIG. 53B is a table for Yxy 8-bit 4:2:2 encoding with 2 lanes. FIG. 53C is a table for Yxy 8-bit 4:2:2 encoding with 1 lane.
[00406] FIG. 54A is a table for Yxy 10-bit 4:2:2 encoding with 4 lanes. FIG. 54B is a table for Yxy 10-bit 4:2:2 encoding with 2 lanes. FIG. 54C is a table for Yxy 10-bit 4:2:2 encoding with 1 lane.
[00407] FIG. 55A is a table for Yxy 12-bit 4:2:2 encoding with 4 lanes. FIG. 55B is a table for Yxy 12-bit 4:2:2 encoding with 2 lanes. FIG. 55C is a table for Yxy 12-bit 4:2:2 encoding with 1 lane.
[00408] FIG. 56A is a table for Yxy 16-bit 4:2:2 encoding with 4 lanes. FIG. 56B is a table for Yxy 16-bit 4:2:2 encoding with 2 lanes. FIG. 56C is a table for Yxy 16-bit 4:2:2 encoding with 1 lane.
[00409] FIG. 57A is a table for Yxy 10-bit 4:4:4 encoding with 4 lanes. FIG. 57B is a table for Yxy 10-bit 4:4:4 encoding with 2 lanes. FIG. 57C is a table for Yxy 10-bit 4:4:4 encoding with 1 lane.
[00410] FIG. 58A is a table for Yxy 12-bit 4:4:4 encoding with 4 lanes. FIG. 58B is a table for Yxy- 12-bit 4:4:4 encoding with 2 lanes. FIG. 58C is a table for Yxy 12-bit 4:4:4 encoding with 1 lane.
[00411] FIG. 59A is a table for Yxy 16-bit 4:4:4 encoding with 4 lanes. FIG. 59B is a table for Yxy 16-bit 4:4:4 encoding with 2 lanes. FIG. 59C is a table for Yxy 16-bit 4:4:4 encoding with 1 lane.
[00412] The identification of a Yxy or Yu'v' formatted connection is preferably provided in the auxiliary video information (AVI) (e.g., for CTA 861). In one embodiment, the AVI is provided according to InfoFrame version 4 as shown in FIG. 60. Additional information is available in ANS1/CTA-861-H-2021, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. See, e.g., ANSI/CTA-861-H-2021 Section 6.2. In one embodiment, location of the identification is in data byte 14 (e.g., ACE3, ACE2, ACEl, ACEO). In one embodiment, ACE3 = 0, ACE2 = 0, ACEl = 1, and ACEO = 1 identifies a Yxy 4:4:4 formatted image without a DRR applied; ACE3 = 0, ACE2 = 1, ACEl = 0, and ACEO = 0 identifies a Yxy 4:2:2 formatted image without a DRR applied; ACE3 = 0, ACE2 = 1, ACEl = 0, and ACEO = 1 identifies a Yxy 4:2:0 formatted image without a DRR applied; ACE3 = 0, ACE2 = 1, ACEl = 1, and ACEO = 0 identifies a Yxy 4:4:4 formatted image with a DRR applied; ACE3 = 0, ACE2 = 1, ACEl = 1, and ACEO = 1 identifies a Yxy 4:2:2 formatted image with a DRR applied; ACE3 = 1, ACE2 = 0, ACEl = 0, and ACEO = 0 identifies a Yxy 4:2:0 formatted image with a DRR applied; ACE3 = 1, ACE2 = 0, ACEl = 0, and ACEO = 1 identifies a Yu'v' 4:4:4 formatted image without a DRR applied; ACE3 = 1, ACE2 = 0, ACEl = 1, and ACEO = 0 identifies a Yu'v' 4:2:2 formatted image without a DRR applied; ACE3 = 1, ACE2 = 0, ACEl = 1, and ACEO = 1 identifies a Yu'v' 4:2:0 formatted image without a DRR applied; ACE3 = 1, ACE2 = 1, ACEl = 0, and ACEO = 0 identifies a Yu'v' 4:4:4 formatted image with a DRR applied; ACE3 = 1 , ACE2 = 1 , ACEl = 0, and ACEO = 1 identifies a Yu'v' 4:2:2 formatted image with a DRR applied; and ACE3 = 1, ACE2 = 1, ACEl = 1, and ACEO = 0 identifies a Yu'v' 4:2:0 formatted image with a DRR applied. In another embodiment, ACE3 = 0, ACE2 = 0, ACEl = 1, and ACEO = 1 identifies a Yxy 4:4:4 formatted image; ACE3 = 0, ACE2 = 1, ACEl = 0, and ACEO = 0 identifies a Yxy 4:2:2 formatted image; and ACE3 = 0, ACE2 = 1, ACEl = 0, and ACEO = 1 identifies a Yxy 4:2:0 formatted image. In one embodiment, data byte 2 (Cl, CO) reads as Cl = 1 and CO = 1 and data byte 3 (EC2, ECI, ECO) reads as EC2 = 1, ECI = 1, and ECO = 1. Table 17 illustrates values for data byte 2. Table 18 illustrates values for data byte 3. Table 19 illustrates values for data byte 14.
[00413] TABLE 17
[00416] SESSION DESCRIPTION PROTOCOL (SDP) MODIFICATION FOR A SIX- PRIMARY COLOR SYSTEM
[00417] SDP is derived flora IETF RFC 4566 which sets parameters including, but not limited to, bit depth and sampling parameters. IETF RFC 4566 (2006) is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. In one embodiment, SDP parameters are contained within the RTP payload. In another embodiment, SDP parameters are contained within the media format and transport protocol. This payload information is transmitted as text. Therefore, modifications for the additional sampling identifiers requires the addition of new parameters for the sampling statement. SDP parameters include, but are not limited to, color channel data, image data, framerate data, a sampling standard, a flag indicator, an active picture size code, a timestamp, a clock frequency, a frame count, a scrambling indicator, and/or a video format indicator. For non-constant luminance imaging, the additional parameters include, but are not limited to, RGBCMY-4:4:4, YBRCY-4:2:2, and YBRCY -4:2:0. For constant luminance signals, tire additional parameters include, but are not limited to, CLYBRCY-4:2:2 and CLYBRCY-4:2:0.
[00418] Additionally, differentiation is included with the colorimetry identifier in one embodiment. For example, 6PB 1 defines 6P with a color gamut limited to ITU-R BT.709 formatted as System 1, 6PB2 defines 6P with a color gamut limited to ITU-R BT.709 formatted as System 2, 6PB3 defines 6P with a color gamut limited to ITU-R BT.709 formatted as System 3, 6 PC I defines 6P with a color gamut limited to SMPTE RP 431-2 formatted as System 1, 6PC2 defines 6P with a color gamut limited to SMPTE RP 431-2 formatted as System 2, 6PC3 defines 6P with a color gamut limited to SMPTE RP 431-2
formatted as System 3, 6PS 1 defines 6P with a color gamut as Super 6P formatted as System 1, 6PS2 defines 6P with a color gamut as Super 6P formatted as System 2, and 6PS3 defines 6P with a color gamut as Super 6P formatted as System 3.
[00419] Colorimetry is also operable to be defined between a six-primary color system using the ITU-R BT.709-6 standard and the SMPTE ST431-2 standard, or colorimetry is operable to be left defined as is standard for the desired standard. For example, the SDP parameters for a 1920x1080 six-primary color system using the ITU-R BT.709-6 standard with a 10-bit signal as System 1 are as follows: m = video 30000 RTP/AVP 112, a = rtpmap: 112 raw/90000, a = fintp: 112, sampling = YBRCY -4:2:2, width = 1920, height = 1080, exactframerate = 30000/1001, depth = 10, TCS = SDR, colorimetry = 6PB1, PM = 2110GPM, SSN = ST2110-20:2017.
[00420] In one embodiment, the six-primary color system is integrated with a Consumer Technology Association (CTA) 861-based system. CTA-861 establishes protocols, requirements, and recommendations for the utilization of uncompressed digital interfaces by consumer electronics devices including, but not limited to, digital televisions (DTVs), digital cable, satellite or terrestrial set-top boxes (STBs), and related peripheral devices including, but not limited to, DVD players and/or recorders, and other related Sources or Sinks.
[00421] These systems are provided as parallel systems so that video content is parsed across several line pairs. This enables each video component to have its own transition- minimized differential signaling (TMDS) path. TMDS is a technology for transmitting highspeed serial data and is used by the Digital Visual Interface (DVI) and High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HD MI) video interfaces, as well as other digital communication interfaces. TMDS is similar to low-voltage differential signaling (LVDS) in that it uses differential signaling to reduce electromagnetic interference (EMI), enabling faster signal transfers with increased accuracy. In addition, TMDS uses a twisted pair for noise reduction, rather than a coaxial cable that is conventional for carrying video signals. Similar to LVDS, data is transmitted serially over the data link. When transmitting video data, and using HDMI, three TMDS twisted pairs are used to transfer video data.
[00422] In such a system, each pixel packet is limited to 8 bits only. For bit depths higher than 8 bits, fragmented packs are used. This arrangement is no different than is already described in the current CTA-861 standard.
[00423] Based on CTA extension Version 3, identification of a six-primary color transmission is performed by the sink device (e.g., the monitor). Adding recognition of the additional formats is flagged in the CTA Data Block Extended Tag Codes (byte 3). Since
codes 33 and above are reserved, any two bits are operable to be used to identify that the format is RGB, RGBCMY, Y Cb Cr, or Y Cb Cr Cc Cy and/or identify System 1 or System 2. Should byte 3 define a six-primary sampling format, and where the block 5 extension identifies byte 1 as 1TU-R BT.709, then logic assigns as 6P-B. However, should byte 4 bit 7 identify colorimetry as DCI-P3, the color gamut is assigned as 6P-C.
[00424] In one embodiment, the system alters the Auxiliary Video Information (AVI) Infoframe Data to identify content. AVI Infoframe Data is shown in Table 10 of CTA 861-G. In one embodiment, Y2=l, Yl=0, and Y0=0 identifies content as 6P 4:2:0:2:0. In another embodiment, Y2=l, Yl=0, and Y0=l identifies content as Y Cr Cb Cc Cy. In yet another embodiment, Y2=l, Yl=l, and Y0=0 identifies content as RGBCMY.
[00425] Byte 2 Cl=l, C0=l identifies extended colorimetry in Table 11 of CTA 861-G. Byte 3 EC2, ECI, ECO identifies additional colorimetry extension valid in Table 13 of CTA 861-G. Table 14 of CTA 861-G reserves additional extensions. In one embodiment, ACE3=1, ACE2=0, ACEl=0, and ACE0=X identifies 6P-B. In one embodiment, ACE3=0, ACE2=1, ACEl=0, and ACE0=X identifies 6P-C. In one embodiment, ACE3=0, ACE2=0, ACE1=1, and ACE0=X identifies System 1. In one embodiment, ACE3=1, ACE2=1, ACEl=0, and ACE0=X identifies System 2.
[00426] FIG. 61 illustrates the current RGB sampling structure for 4:4:4 sampling video data transmission. For HDMI 4:4:4 sampling, video data is sent through three TMDS line pairs. FIG. 62 illustrates a six-primary color sampling structure, RGBCMY, using System 1 for 4:4:4 sampling video data transmission. In one embodiment, the six-primary color sampling structure complies with CTA 861-G, November 2016, Consumer Technology Association, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. FIG. 63 illustrates an example of System 2 to RGBCMY 4:4:4 transmission. FIG. 64 illustrates current Y Cb Cr 4:2:2 sampling transmission as non-constant luminance. FIG. 65 illustrates a six-primary color system (System 1) using Y Cr Cb Cc Cy 4:2:2 sampling transmission as non-constant luminance. FIG. 66 illustrates an example of a System 2 to Y Cr Cb Cc Cy 4:2:2 Transmission as non-constant luminance. In one embodiment, the Y Cr Cb Cc Cy 4:2:2 sampling transmission complies with CTA 861-G, November 2016, Consumer Technology Association. FIG. 67 illustrates current Y Cb Cr 4:2:0 sampling transmission. FIG. 68 illustrates a six-primary color system (System 1) using Y Cr Cb Cc Cy 4:2:0 sampling transmission.
[00427] HDMI sampling systems include Extended Display Identification Data (EDID) metadata. EDID metadata describes the capabilities of a display device to a video source. The
data format is defined by a standard published by the Video Electronics Standards Association (VESA). The EDID data structure includes, but is not limited to, manufacturer name and serial number, product type, phosphor or filter type, timings supported by the display, display size, luminance data, and/or pixel mapping data. The EDID data structure is modifiable and modification requires no additional hardware and/or tools.
[00428] EDID information is transmitted between the source device and the display through a display data channel (DDC), which is a collection of digital communication protocols created by VESA. With EDID providing the display information and DDC providing the link between the display and the source, the two accompanying standards enable an information exchange between the display and source.
[00429] In addition, VESA has assigned extensions for EDID. Such extensions include, but are not limited to, timing extensions (00), additional time data black (CEA EDID Timing Extension (02)), video timing block extensions (VTB-EXT (10)), EDID 2.0 extension (20), display information extension (DI-EXT (40)), localized string extension (LS-EXT (50)), microdisplay interface extension (MI-EXT (60)), display ID extension (70), display transfer characteristics data block (DTCDB (A7, AF, BF)), block map (F0), display device data block (DDDB (FF)), and/or extension defined by monitor manufacturer (FF).
[00430] In one embodiment, SDP parameters include data corresponding to a payload identification (ID) and/or EDID information.
]00431] MULTI-PRIMARY COLOR SYSTEM DISPLAY
[00432] FIG. 69 illustrates a dual stack LCD projection system for a six-primary color system. In one embodiment, the display is comprised of a dual stack of projectors. This display uses two projectors stacked on top of one another or placed side by side. Each projector is similar, with the only difference being the color filters in each unit. Refresh and pixel timings are synchronized, enabling a mechanical alignment between the two units so that each pixel overlays the same position between projector units. In one embodiment, the two projectors are Liquid-Crystal Display (LCD) projectors. In another embodiment, the two projectors are Digital Light Processing (DLP) projectors. In yet another embodiment, the two projectors are Liquid-Crystal on Silicon (LCOS) projectors. In yet another embodiment, the two projectors are Light-Emitting Diode (LED) projectors.
[00433] In one embodiment, the display is comprised of a single projector. A single projector six-primary color system requires the addition of a second cross block assembly for the additional colors. One embodiment of a single projector (e.g., single LCD projector) is shown in FIG. 70. A single projector six-primary color system includes a cyan dichroic
minor, an orange dichroic minor, a blue dichroic mirror, a red dichroic mirror, and two additional standard mirrors. In one embodiment, the single projector six-primary color system includes at least six minors. In another embodiment, the single projector six-primary color system includes at least two cross block assembly units.
[00434] FIG. 71 illustrates a six-primary color system using a single projector and reciprocal minors. In one embodiment, the display is comprised of a single projector unit working in combination with at first set of at least six reciprocal mirrors, a second set of at least six reciprocal mirrors, and at least six LCD units. Light from at least one light source emits towards the first set of at least six reciprocal mirrors. The first set of at least six reciprocal mirrors reflects light towards at least one of the at least six LCD units. The at least six LCD units include, but are not limited to, a Green LCD, a Yellow LCD, a Cyan, LCD, a Red LCD, a Magenta LCD, and/or a Blue LCD. Output from each of the at least six LCDs is received by the second set of at least six reciprocal minors. Output from the second set of at least six reciprocal minors is sent to the single projector unit. Image data output by the single projector unit is output as a six-primary color system. In another embodiment, there are more than two sets of reciprocal minors. In another embodiment, more than one projector is used. [00435] In another embodiment, the display is comprised of a dual stack Digital Microminor Device (DMD) projector system. FIG. 72 illustrates one embodiment of a dual stack DMD projector system. In this system, two projectors are stacked on top of one another. In one embodiment, the dual stack DMD projector system uses a spinning wheel filter. In another embodiment, the dual stack DMD projector system uses phosphor technology. In one embodiment, tire filter systems are illuminated by a xenon lamp. In another embodiment, the filter system uses a blue laser illuminator system. Filter systems in one projector are RGB, while the second projector uses a CMY filter set. The wheels for each projector unit are synchronized using at least one of an input video sync or a projector to projector sync, and timed so that the inverted colors are output of each projector at the same time.
[00436] In one embodiment, the projectors are phosphor wheel systems. A yellow phosphor wheel spins in time with a DMD imager to output sequential RG. The second projector is designed the same, but uses a cyan phosphor wheel. The output from this projector becomes sequential BG. Combined, the output of both projectors is YRGGCB. Magenta is developed by synchronizing the yellow and cyan wheels to overlap the flashing DMD.
[00437] In another embodiment, the display is a single DMD projector solution. A single DMD device is coupled with an RGB diode light source system. In one embodiment, the
DMD projector uses LED diodes. In one embodiment, the DMD projector includes CMY diodes. In another embodiment, the DMD projector creates CMY primaries using a double flashing technique. FIG. 73 illustrates one embodiment of a single DMD projector solution. [00438] FIG. 74 illustrates one embodiment of a six-primary color system using a white OLED display. In yet another embodiment, the display is a white OLED monitor. Current emissive monitor and/or television designs use a white emissive OLED array covered by a color filter. Changes to this type of display only require a change to pixel indexing and new six color primary filters. Different color filter arrays are used, placing each subpixel in a position that provides the least light restrictions, color accuracy, and off axis display. [00439] FIG. 75 illustrates one embodiment of an optical filter array for a white OLED display.
[00440] FIG. 76 illustrates one embodiment of a matrix of an LCD drive for a six-primary color system with a backlight illuminated LCD monitor. In yet another embodiment, the display is a backlight illuminated LCD display. The design of an LCD display involves adding the CMY subpixels. Drives for these subpixels are similar to the RGB matrix drives. With the advent of 8K LCD televisions, it is technically feasible to change the matrix drive and optical filter and have a 4K six-primary color TV.
[00441] FIG. 77 illustrates one embodiment of an optical filter array for a six-primary' color system with a backlight illuminated LCD monitor. The optical filter array includes the additional CMY subpixels.
[00442] In yet another embodiment, the display is a direct emissive assembled display. The design for a direct emissive assembled display includes a matrix of color emitters grouped as a six-color system. Individual channel inputs drive each Quantum Dot (QD) element illuminator and/or micro LED element.
[00443] FIG. 78 illustrates an array for a Quantum Dot (QD) display device.
[00444] FIG. 79 illustrates one embodiment of an array for a six-primary color system for use with a direct emissive assembled display.
[00445] FIG. 80 illustrates one embodiment of a six-primary' color system in an emissive display that does not incorporate color filtered subpixels. For LCD and WOLED displays, this is operable to be modified for a six-primary color system by expanding the RGB or WRGB filter arrangement to an RGBCMY matrix. For WRGB systems, the white subpixel is operable to be removed as the luminance of the three additional primaries will replace it. SDI video is input through an SDI decoder. In one embodiment, the SDI decoder outputs to a Y CrCbCcCy-RGBCMY converter. The converter outputs RGBCMY data, with the luminance
component (Y) subtracted. RGBCMY data is then converted to RGB data. This RGB data is sent to a scale sync generation component, receives adjustments to image controls, contrast, brightness, chroma, and saturation, is sent to a color correction component, and output to the display panel as LVDS data. In another embodiment the SDI decoder outputs to an SDI Y-R switch component. The SDI Y-R switch component outputs RGBCMY data. The RGBCMY data is sent to a scale sync generation component, receives adjustments to image controls, contrast, brightness, chroma, and saturation, is sent to a color correction component, and output to a display panel as LVDS data.
[00446] In one embodiment, the display is further operable to display super saturated colors, which are described in U.S. Application No. 17/748,655, filed May 19, 2022, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
[00447] SINGLE DEVICE IMAGE CAPTURE AND DISPLAY
[00448] In one embodiment, the present invention includes a device wherein the device is operable to acquire image data, process image data, and/or display image data. The device includes, but is not limited to, a camera (e.g., digital video camera, still camera), a mobile device (e.g., a smartphone), a tablet, a computer (e.g., desktop computer, laptop computer), a monitor, a wearable device, a personal digital assistant (PDA), an electronic book reader, a digital media player, a video gaming device, a video teleconferencing device, a video streaming device, and/or an augmented reality/virtual reality (AR/VR) device (e.g., a headset, a pair of goggles, smart lenses). The device does not require transport of data between separate components via a wireless connection. Additionally, the device does not require transport of data over longer wired and/or cable connections (e.g., HDMI cables, SDI cables). Advantageously, wired connections of the device (e.g., soldered connections) are operable to be shorter because the wired connections are within a single device. Thus, the device streamlines the process of acquiring and displaying image data.
[00449] In one embodiment, the device includes at least one imager for acquiring image data. The at least one imager preferably includes at least one lens and at least one image sensor (e.g., a camera, a video camera, a camcorder, a slow-motion camera, and/or a highspeed camera). Charge-coupled device (CCD) image sensors, complementary metal-oxide- semiconductor (CMOS) image sensors (e.g., active-pixel sensors (APS), hybrid CCD/CMOS image sensors, n-type metal -oxide-semiconductor (NMOS) image sensors, and quanta image sensors are compatible with the present invention. In one embodiment, the at least one imager is a single imager with a striped filter system. Alternatively, the at least one imager includes a red imager, a green imager, and a blue imager. The at least one lens directs light towards the
at least one image sensor. The at least one lens includes, but is not limited to, at least one convex lens and/or at least one concave lens. In one embodiment, the at least one image sensor is a wide gamut image sensor, e.g., a wide gamut camera. In one embodiment, the at least one image sensor is a single-pixel image sensor. In one embodiment, the at least one image sensor does not include a detector array. In one embodiment, the at least one image sensor is a plurality of image sensors. In one embodiment, one or more of the at least one imager is interchangeable such that the device is compatible with a plurality of imagers. Advantageously, this modular design enables the at least one imager to be upgraded or swapped out depending on varying image acquisition needs and/or technological developments.
[00450] In one embodiment, the at least one imager includes a plurality of lenses for a plurality of image sensors. In one embodiment, the plurality of lenses creates different focal lengths for each of the plurality of image sensors. In one embodiment, the device is operable to change the focal lengths, e.g., by zooming. Alternatively, the device is operable to interpolate signals from the plurality of image sensors with different focal lengths to create hybrid sensor data. The device is operable to combine sensor data from each of the plurality of image sensors into a single set of image data. In one embodiment, the device includes a stabilizer, e.g., a gyroscope system, an electronic stabilization system. The at least one imager is preferably located on the stabilizer and the stabilizer moves the at least one imager to counteract movements that would result in blurry images. In one embodiment, the at least one imager includes a lens mount, e.g., a screw mount, a bayonet mount, a breech lock, a tab lock, a double bayonet, Z, X, Electro-Focus (EF), EF-M, EF-S, AF, E, L, RF, G, M, SA, A, K, F, S, PL, T, C, H, and/or 645 mounts.
[00451] In one embodiment, the at least one imager includes at least one filter (e.g., optical filter). In one embodiment, the at least one filter is overlaid atop a photosite on the at least one image sensor. In one embodiment, the at least one filter is an absorptive filter. Alternatively, the at least one filter is an interference filter or a dichroic filter. In one embodiment, the at least one filter has at least one cut-off wavelength and passes or blocks light based on the at least one cut-off wavelength (e.g., a long-pass filter, a short-pass filter, a bandpass filter, a multi-bandpass filter, a notch filter). In an alternative embodiment, the at least one filter modifies the intensity of all wavelengths equally, e.g., a neutral density filter. In one embodiment, the at least one filter includes at least one color filter array, e.g., a Bayer filter, a Quad Bayer filter, a diamond pattern color filter array, a Y amanaka color filter array, a vertical stripe color filter array, a diagonal stripe color filter array, a pseudo-random color
filter array, and/or a human visual system-based color filter array. Filter colors compatible with the present invention include, but are not limited to, RGB, CYGM, RGBE (red, green, blue, emerald), and/or CMY. The at least one filter is operable to be modified. As a nonlimiting example, a Bayer filter is modified to include a magenta filter. Alternatively, the size of the elements in the Bayer filter are adjusted to increase sensitivity of the at least one image sensor. In yet another alternative embodiment, one or more of the at least one filter is operable to be rotated. In one embodiment, the at least one filter includes a plurality' of filter layers. In one embodiment, the at least one filter includes at least one filter for light outside of the visible wavelength range, e.g., ultraviolet (UV) filters, infrared (IR) filters. In one embodiment, the device is operable to convert light captured through non-visible wavelength filters into visible light for visual effects such as UV/blacklight simulation. The at least one filter includes any number of color filters. In one embodiment, the at least one filter includes inverse colors to increase a sensitivity of the at least one imager.
[00452] SINGLE DEVICE ACQUISITION
[00453] In one embodiment, the device is operable to acquire raw image data as a raw image file. A raw image file is considered unprocessed and thus cannot be edited or printed. Raw image files include image data as well as metadata and a header. The metadata includes, but is not limited to, image sensor parameters, imager parameters, timecodes, frame data, HDR metadata, colorimetric metadata, an aspect ratio, dimensions (e.g., pixel dimensions), and/or lens information (e.g., a focal length, an aperture, a shutter speed, an exposure time, a sensitivity, a white balance). Raw image formats include, but are not limited to. Digital Negative Raw (DNG), ISO 12234-2 (TIFF/EP), NIKON NEF, CANON Raw v2 (CR2), CR3, and/or REDCODE Raw (R3D) files. In one embodiment, the device is operable to store the raw image file before processing. The device is then operable to render the raw image data into rendered image data, wherein the rendered image data is operable to be viewed and/or edited. Rendering includes, but is not limited to, decoding, demosaicing (e.g., removing the effects of a Bayer filter), pixel removal (e.g., of defective pixels), interpolation (e.g., to replace removed pixels), white balancing, noise reduction, color translation, tone reproduction, optical correction, contrast manipulation, resizing, splitting, cropping, and/or compression. Alternatively, the device does not compress the raw image data. In one embodiment, the device is operable to render the image data as a pipeline process, wherein each step is performed in succession. The order of the steps is operable to be changed. Alternatively, the device is operable to render the image data in parallel steps. In yet another alternative embodiment, the device is operable to render the image data by solving a single
optimization problem. The device is operable to save image prior data and/or image variation data and use the image prior data and/or the image variation data in rendering, processing, and/or displaying the image data.
[00454] In one embodiment, an acquisition color gamut is identical to a display color gamut. In one embodiment, both the acquisition color gamut and the display color gamut are expanded color gamuts and/or include at least four primaries, e.g., 6P-B, 6P-C. Alternatively, the display color gamut (e.g., RGBCMY) has a larger volume than the acquisition color gamut (e.g., RGB). In yet another alternative embodiment, the display color gamut (e.g., RGB) has a smaller volume than the acquisition color gamut (e.g., RGBCMY). The device is preferably operable to convert image data from the acquisition color gamut to the display color gamut.
[00455] In one embodiment, rendering includes converting the raw image data into a color space, e.g., CIE 1931, ITU-R BT.2020. In a preferred embodiment, the device is operable to render the image data in a three-coordinate format wherein a first coordinate is a luminance or a luma value and a second and third coordinate are both colorimetric (chroma). As a nonlimiting example, the three-coordinate format is Yxy, wherein Y is a luminance coordinate and wherein x and y are orthogonal colorimetric coordinates. The device is also operable to apply a transformation (e.g., a gamma compression) to the luminance coordinate to create a luma coordinate (e.g., Y'). Relative luminance values are also compatible. Alternative three- coordinate formats include, but are not limited to, L*a*b*, ICtCp, YCbCr, YUV, Yu’v’, YPbPr, and/or YIQ. Alternatively, the device is operable to render the image data as XYZ data. In one embodiment, the device includes a user interface for accepting user input. In one embodiment, tire raw image data is rendered based on the user input. In one embodiment, the device is operable to apply an opto-electronic transfer function (OETF) and an electro-optical transfer function (EOTF) to the image data. Alternatively, the device is operable to apply at least one non-linear function (e.g., an OOTF) to the image data. In one embodiment, the device includes at least one look-up table (LUT). The LUT is operable to be implemented in hardware (e.g., in an FPGA) and/or in software. In one embodiment, rendering includes compressing the image data, e.g., using 4:2:2 sampling, 4:2:0 sampling. In one embodiment, rendering includes applying color gamut constraints for a target color gamut. Alternatively, the image data is not compressed (4:4:4 sampling).
[00456] In one embodiment, rendering further includes HDR processing to create a larger visible range of luminance in image data. Displaying HDR images typically requires application of at least one transfer function, e.g., PQ, hybrid log-gamma (HLG). In one
embodiment, the device includes a PQ-compatible display and/or an HLG-compatible display to display HDR image data with the at least one transfer function applied. In one embodiment, the device is further operable to apply at least one tone mapping curve to image data, e.g., an S-curve, to preserve highlight and shadow detail. In one embodiment, the metadata includes information about the at least one transfer function and/or the at least one tone mapping curve.
[00457] SINGLE DEVICE PROCESSING
[00458] In one embodiment, the device is further able to process and/or transform the rendered image data. In one embodiment, the device includes the encoder and the decoder of the present invention in a single unit. In one embodiment, the device is operable to store processed image data that is sent from the encoder to the decoder before the processed image data is decoded. Because the encoder and the decoder are located in the same device, data is transmitted between the encoder and the decoder over a wired connection. The wired connection does not require internet connectivity, BLUETOOTH, or any other type of wireless connection. Advantageously, storing data in intermediate formats creates backup data that is operable to be used in case of corrupted or lost image data. Alternatively, the device is operable to bypass encoding and/or decoding steps because the same device is operable for both image acquisition and image display. For example, the device does not encode the image data as an HDMI input and then decode the HDMI input with an HDMI receiver circuit because HDMI connection is not necessary for displaying the image data. In an alternative embodiment, the device is operable to encode the image data for display on an additional display device separate from the device in addition to displaying the image data on the display screen. Advantageously, in one embodiment, a bit depth of the image data is kept the same in the device throughout each step from acquisition to display.
[00459] In one embodiment, the device is operable to process and/or transform the image data internally, e.g., with an embedded ARM (advanced RISC (reduced instraction set computing) machine) processor. Alternatively, the device is operable for remote image processing. For example, the device is in network communication with a platform wherein the device is operable to send image data to the platform and receive image data from the platform. The platform is operable to process the image data. In one embodiment, the platform is hosted on a server, e.g., a cloud-based server, a server hosted on a distributed edge network. Alternatively, the device is operable for wired communication with an external processor (e.g., a computer, a tablet) for image processing. In one embodiment, the device further includes a user interface, wherein the user interface is operable to accept user input to
edit the image data, e.g., a brightness, a saturation, a contrast. In one embodiment, the device is operable to edit the image data for a specific feature, e.g., skin tone correction.
[00460] In one embodiment, the device is operable to subsample the image data for display. Advantageously, storing and processing the image data in a three-coordinate system such as Yxy allows the chromaticity coordinates to be subsampled for display without affecting perception. As non-limiting examples, 4:2:2, 4:2:0, and 4:1:1 subsampling are compatible with the present invention. Alternatively, the image data is fully sampled. In one embodiment, the device is operable to decompress compressed image data.
[00461] In one embodiment, processing the image data for display includes applying color matching functions (CMFs). CMFs describe the chromatic response of the human eye using three functions of wavelength While CIE 1931 CMFs are commonly used,
modifications to CIE 1931 CMFs including, but not limited to, Judd in 1951, Vos in 1978, Stiles and Burch in 1959, Stockman and Sharpe (Sharpe, L.T., Stockman, A., Jagla, W., Jagle, H. 2011. A luminous efficiency function, V*D65(X), for daylight adaptation: A correction. Color Research and Application, 36, 42-46), the CIE 10-degree CMFs in 1964, CIE S 014 published in 2006, CIE 170-1:2006 published in 2006, the CIE 2-degree XYZ CMFs published in 2012, and/or CIE 170-2:2015 published in 2015 are also compatible with the present invention. Each of these pubheations, which describe modifications to the CIE 1931 CMF based on a colorimetric observer, is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety'. Modifications to the CIE 1931 CMFs address deviations from the linear mapping between XYZ and long medium short (LMS) color space, which represents human cone cell response to long, medium, and short wavelengths of visible fight. These deviations from the original mapping are especially present in die blue color region. See also, e.g., CIE Proceedings (1964) Vienna Session, 1963, Vol. B, pp. 209-220 (Committee Report E-l .4.1), Bureau Central de la CIE, Paris; Speranskaya, N. I. (1959). Determination of spectrum color co-ordinates for twenty-seven normal observers. Optics and Spectroscopy, 7, 424-428; Stiles, W. S., & Burch, J. M. (1959) NPL colour-matching investigation: Final report. Optica Acta, 6, 1-26; Wyszecki, G., & Stiles, W. S. (1982). Color Science: concepts and methods, quantitative data and formulae. (2nd ed.). New York: Wiley; CIE. (1932). Commission Internationale de 1’Eclairage Proceedings, 1931. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press; Stockman, A., Sharpe, L. T., & Fach, C. C. (1999). The spectral sensitivity of the human short-wavelength cones. Vision Research, 39, 2901-2927; Stockman, A., & Sharpe, L. T. (2000). Spectral sensitivities of the middle- and long-wavelength sensitive cones derived from measurements in observers of known genotype. Vision Research, 40, 1711-1737;
Sharpe, L. T., Stockman, A., Jagla, W. & Jagle, H.(2005). A luminous efficiency function, V*(l), for daylight adaptation. Journal of Vision, 5, 948-968; CIE (2006). Fundamental chromaticity diagram with physiological axes. Parts 1 and 2. Technical Report 170-1. Vienna: Central Bureau of the Commission Internationale de 1' Eclairage; Judd, D. B. (1951). Report of U.S. Secretariat Committee on Colorimetry and Artificial Daylight, Proceedings of the Twelfth Session of the CIE, Stockholm (pp. 11) Paris: Bureau Central de la CIE; and Vos, J. J. (1978). Colorimetric and photometric properties of a 2-deg fundamental observer. Color Research and Application, 3, 125-128, each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
[00462] SINGLE DEVICE DISPLAY
[00463] In one embodiment, the device further includes a display. The display is preferably operable to display image data using greater than three primaries. In one embodiment, the display is operable to display colors outside of an ITU-R BT.2020 color gamut. In one embodiment, the display is operable to display at least 80% of a total area covered by the CIE-1931 color space. In one embodiment, the display is as described in U.S. Patent No. 11,030,934, filed October 1, 2020 and issued June 8, 2021, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. In one embodiment, the display is a screen, e.g., a liquid crystal display (LCD) screen, a light-emitting diode (LED) screen, an LED-backlit screen, an organic LED (OLED) screen, an active matrix OLED (AMOLED) screen, a quantum dot (QD) display, an LCD display using QD backlight, a perovskite display, and/or a laser display (e.g., using discrete modulation, grating modulation). In an alternative embodiment, the display includes at least one projector. The device is operable to display the image data after it has been acquired, rendered, and/or processed by the device. Additionally or alternatively, the device is operable to receive image data for display from an external source. In another embodiment, the display includes a plurality of display devices (e.g., screens, projectors).
[00464] In one embodiment, the device is operable to modify display parameters of the image data, including, but not limited to, a gamut, a frame rate, a sampling rate, an aspect ratio, a data format, metadata, and/or SDP parameters. In one embodiment, the display of the device is interchangeable. In one embodiment, the device is also operable to project the image data onto a second display wherein the second display is separate from the device. For example, the device is operable to cast the image data onto a second display wherein the second display mirrors the display of the device (e.g., via a wireless or wired connection). Alternatively, the second display extends the first display. The device is further operable to
optimize the image data for display on the second display, e.g., by applying atone curve, changing a resolution, changing a color space of the image data.
[00465] AUGMENTED REALITY/VIRTUAL REALITY
[00466] In one embodiment, the system includes at least one headset (e.g., a headset, two headsets, etc.) configured for virtual reality, augmented reality, and/or mixed reality environments (“AR/VR”). The headset preferably includes a display, an eyewear component, at least one power supply component, at least one image capturing device, and/or control electronics. In one embodiment, the headset is a pair of goggles. Alternatively, the headset is a pair of glasses. In one embodiment, the headset includes at least one strap and/or temples. In one embodiment, the power supply component includes at least one battery, at least one supercapacitor, or other similar power supply components. In another embodiment, the battery includes at least one rechargeable battery'. In yet another embodiment, the at least one rechargeable battery includes a lithium ion battery.
[00467] The headset is configured to receive and display an image of a virtual scene, movie, and/or environment. The headset is further operable to receive audio data and communicate the audio data to a wearer via a speaker, headphones, and other similar audio playback devices. In one embodiment, the headphones are noise-cancelling headphones. The noise-cancelling headphones are configured to block out external noise such that the wearer is completely immersed in the AR/VR environment.
[00468] Examples of headsets and/or AR/VR systems include, but are not limited to, those described in U.S. Patent Nos. 8,217,856; 8,743,145; 9,094,677; 9,223,136; 9,635,450; 9,671,614; 9,733,480; 9,734,402; 9,766,462; 9,846,483; 9,858,703; 9,897,812; 9,989,998; 10,025,060; 10,037,084; 10,055,645; 10,055,887; 10,061,352; 10,061,391; 10,102,674; 10,124,251; 10,133,305; 10,185,390; 10,209,769; 10,244,226; 10,254,547; 10,261,579; 10,318,007; 10,419,731; 10,429,647; 10,540,003; 10,656,423; 10,656,822; 10,769,438; 10,825,255; 10,838,206; 10,890,941; 10,911,734; 10,922,886; 10,928,613; 10,951,880;
11,106,276; 11,145,096; and 11,217,021, each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
[00469] In one embodiment, the at least one strap is configured to wrap around a wearer’s head and attach to the eyewear component via at least one attachment mechanism. The at least one attachment mechanism includes a hook and loop fastener, a latch, a button, a buckle, a snap, a tie, a clip, and other similar attachment mechanisms. The at least one strap is adjustable to a wearer’s head. Advantageously, this allows the headset to be used for wearers of different head sizes. For example, and not limitation, the at least one strap includes a
tightening mechanism. In one embodiment, the tightening mechanism is configured to rotate in one direction and increase the tension in the head strap and rotate in the opposite direction to loosen the tension in the head strap. In yet another embodiment, the at least one strap includes at least two straps. In one embodiment, the at least two straps do not overlap and are in a parallel position around a wearer’s head. Alternatively, the at least two straps are configured to intersect in the center of the back of a wearer’s head to provide a tighter fit. [00470] Advantageously, the headset is configured to provide minimal pressure to a wearer’s face. In one embodiment, the headset includes a nose component. In one embodiment, a wearer’s nose is operable to rest inside the nose component. In one embodiment, the nose component is adjustable. In one embodiment, the nose component is configured to move left, right, up, and/or down. In one embodiment, the nose component is operable to expand. Alternatively, the headset is designed to rest on the ridge of the wearer’s nose. In yet another embodiment, the headset covers a wearer’s entire face.
[00471] In one embodiment, the at least one image capturing device is a motion sensor camera. In one embodiment, the motion sensor camera is configured to capture a wearer’s body movement. Additionally or alternatively, the at least one image capturing device includes a LIDAR camera. The at least one image capturing device is further operable to determine a wearer’s positioning and provide at least one recommendation to correct a wearer’s positioning based on the display.
[00472] In one embodiment, the display includes Active Matrix Organic Light Emitting Diode (AMOLED) technology'. In one embodiment, the display includes a diamond PenTile subpixel matrix. In one embodiment, the display has a display panel size of between 12.7 cm (5 inches) and 22.9 cm (9 inches) (e.g., 17.8 cm (7 inches)). In one embodiment, the display has a screen resolution of 2160 x 1200 and a per eye resolution of 1080 x 1200. In one embodiment, the total pixels per eye is 1,296,000 pixels. In one embodiment, the display has a refresh rate of 90Hz.
[00473] In one embodiment, the system includes a 6 degrees of freedom constellation camera. In one embodiment, the system includes an optical 360-degree infrared (IR) LED tracking system. In one embodiment, the system includes a field of view of 110 degrees. In an alternative embodiment, the system includes a near infrared CMOS sensor. See, e.g., Shafer DM, Carbonara CP, Korpi MF. Factors Affecting Enjoyment of Virtual Reality Games: A Comparison Involving Consumer-Grade Virtual Reality Technology. Games Health J. 2019 Feb;8(l): 15-23. doi: 10.1089/g4h.2017.0190. Epub 2018 Sep 8. PMID: 30199273, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
[00474] The control electronics preferably include at least one processor. By way of example, and not limitation, the processor includes a general-purpose microprocessor (e.g., a central processing unit (CPU)), a graphics processing unit (GPU), a microcontroller, a Digital Signal Processor (DSP), an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), a Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA), a Programmable Logic Device (PLD), a controller, a state machine, gated or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, or any other suitable entity or combinations thereof that is operable to perform calculations, process instructions for execution, and/or other manipulations of information. In one embodiment, one or more of the at least one processor is operable to run predefined programs stored in at least one memory' of the control electronics.
[00475] The control electronics preferably includes at least one antenna, which allows the control electronics to receive and process input data (e.g., AR/VR settings) from at least one remote device (e.g., smartphone, tablet, laptop computer, desktop computer, gaming system). In a preferred embodiment, the at least one remote device is in wireless network communication with the control electronics. The wireless communication is, by way of example and not limitation, radiofrequency, BLUETOOTH®, ZIGBEE®, WI-FI®, wireless local area networking, near field communication (NFC), infrared optical link, or other similar commercially utilized standards. Alternatively, the at least one remote device is in wired communication with the control electronics through USB or equivalent.
[00476] In one embodiment, the at least one processor is a microcontroller. The microcontroller includes a transceiver, BLUETOOTH module, WI-FI module, a microprocessor, an ultra-low-power co-processor, read-only memory (ROM), random-access memory (RAM) (e.g., static random-access memory (SRAM)), flash memory, a power management unit, and/or a digital-to-analog converter.
[00477] In yet another embodiment, the AR/VR system is operable to receive wearer voice input data. The AR/VR system includes a microphone that is operable to receive and record a wearer’s voice. The headset is further operable to change the display based on the wearer’s words. For example, and not limitation, the AR/VR system is configured to receive the words “start virtual reality game” from a wearer, and activate the virtual reality game.
[00478] The headset is operable to communicate, preferably wirelessly, with at least one remote device including, but not limited to, a mobile phone (e.g., smartphone), a tablet, a gaming system, at least one other headset, and/or a computer (e.g., laptop computer). The mobile phone is operable to be any mobile phone that (1) is capable of running mobile applications and (2) is capable of communicating with the headset. The mobile phone
includes, for example, an ANDROID™ phone, an APPLE® IPHONE®, or a SAMSUNG® GALAXY® phone. Likewise, the tablet is operable to be any tablet that (1) is capable of running mobile applications and (2) is capable of communicating with the headset. The tablet includes, for example, the 3G or 4G version of the APPLE® IPAD® or the 5G version of the Samsung Galaxy Tab S6.
[00479] Further in the AR/VR system, the remote device is in communication with a cellular network and/or a network. The network is operable to be any network for providing wired or wireless connection to the Internet, such as a local area network (LAN) or a wide area network (WAN).
[00480] In one embodiment, an AR/VR application (e.g., AR/VR mobile application) is installed and running at the remote device. The AR/VR system application is implemented according to the type (i.e., the operating system) of remote device on which it is running. The AR/VR system application is designed to receive wearer information from the headset. In one embodiment, the AR/VR application is operable to provide graphical, audible, and/or tactile feedback to the wearer. In one embodiment, the AR/VR system is configured to develop a personalized profile based on a wearer’s prior AR/VR environments and response.
[00481] In one embodiment, the AR/VR system is further operable to display super saturated colors, which are described in U.S. Application No. 17/748,655, filed May 19, 2022, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
[00482] The AR/VR system is operable to utilize a plurality of learning techniques including, but not limited to, machine learning (ML), artificial intelligence (Al), deep learning (DL), neural networks (NNs), artificial neural networks (ANNs), support vector machines (SVMs), Maikov decision process (MDP), and/or natural language processing (NLP). The AR/VR system is operable to use any of the aforementioned learning techniques alone or in combination.
[00483] Further, the AR/VR system is operable to utilize predictive analytics techniques including, but not limited to, machine learning (ML), artificial intelligence (Al), neural networks (NNs) (e.g., long short term memory (LSTM) neural networks), deep learning, historical data, and/or data mining to make future predictions and/or models. The AR/VR system is preferably operable to recommend and/or perform actions based on historical data, external data sources, ML, Al, NNs, and/or other learning techniques. The AR/VR system is operable to utilize predictive modeling and/or optimization algorithms including, but not limited to, heuristic algorithms, particle swarm optimization, genetic algorithms, technical
analysis descriptors, combinatorial algorithms, quantum optimization algorithms, iterative methods, deep learning techniques, and/or feature selection techniques.
[00484] MEDICAL IMAGING AND DIAGNOSTICS
[00485] In one embodiment, the present invention is incorporated into medical imaging and/or diagnostics. Medical imaging and/or diagnostics has started moving away from grayscale, and the use of color in the field is increasing. For example, the medical imaging and/or the diagnostics include, but are not limited to, telemedicine, digital microscopy, whole-slide imaging (WSI), histopathology, endoscopy, laparoscopy, retinal imaging, ophthalmology, dermatology, digital dermoscopy, echocardiography, radiology (e.g., magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) (e.g., 3D MRI), computed tomography (CT) scanning, positron emission tomography (PET) scanning, color-flow imaging, ultrasound (e.g., 2D flow imagery)), surgery (e.g., robotic surgery), veterinary applications, wound care management, cellular spectroscopy, digital pathology, short-wave infrared fluorescence tri-band imaging (SWIFTI), hyperspectral imaging (HSI), and/or dentistry (e.g., aesthetic dentistry, implants, dentures). In one embodiment, the robotic surgery includes at least one robotic surgery component including, but not limited to, a surgeon console, a patient cart, and/or a vision cart. In one embodiment, the at least one robotic surgery component is a DA VINCI SYSTEMS robotic surgery component. See, e.g., (1) Mingels C, Sachpekidis C, Bohn KP, Hunermund JN, Schepers R, Fedi V, Prenosil G, Rominger A, Afshar-Oromieh A, Alberts I. The influence of colour scale in lesion detection and patient-based sensitivity in [68Ga]Ga- PSMA-PET/CT. Nucl Med Commun. 2021 May l;42(5):495-502. doi: 10.1097/MNM.0000000000001364. PMID: 33481506, (2) Papadacci C, Finel V, Villemain O, Goudot G, Provost J, Messas E, Tanter M, Pemot M. 4D simultaneous tissue and blood flow Doppler imaging: revisiting cardiac Doppler index with single heart beat 4D ultrafast echocardiography. Phys Med Biol. 2019 Apr 10;64(8):085013. doi: 10.1088/1361 - 6560/abl 107. PMID: 30889552, (3) McKeown, L. A. (May 13, 2021). Color-coded radiation monitoring: Coming to a cath lab near you. TCTMD.com. Retrieved October 27, 2022, from httos./A^vw tctmd.com/news/color-coded-radi^ion-monitoring-coming-cath-jab-near-you. (4) Wild, T., Prinz, M., Fortner, N. et al. Digital measurement and analysis of wounds based on colour segmentation. Em Surg 40, 5-10 (2008). https://doi.org/10.1007/sl0353-008-0378- 0, (5) Sisson, Christye & Famand, Susan & Fairchild, Mark & Fischer, Bill. (2014). Analysis of Color Consistency in Retinal Fundus Photography: Application of Color Management and Development of an Eye Model Standard. Analytical Cellular Pathology. 2014. 1-2. 10.1155/2014/398462, (6) Spatial Team (August 19, 2020). Applications of 3D printing in
the medical field. Retrieved October 27, 2022, from httos7/bloK.spatial.com/die-future-of-3d- prin tin g-in-the-medical -field, and (7) Petrie, S. (November 17, 2021). Hyperspectral imaging captures spatial and spectral data of the human landscape. Laser Focus World. Retrieved October 27, 2022, from https://www .laserfocnsworld.com/detectors- imatong/artrcle/14212197/hypersDectral-imaging-caotures-spatial-and-speclral-daia-of-tbe- human -landscape, each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
[00486] In one embodiment, the present invention provides true color. Alternatively or additionally, the present invention provides false color (e.g., pseudo color, density slicing, choropleth). In one embodiment, the system is operable to use a greater bit depth (e.g., larger than 8 bits) coupled with additional color primaries to provide pseudo color from a single band of data or single filter source. Advantageously, the use of greater bit depth and additional color primaries enables tire system to provide pseudo color in an RGB false color application. See, e.g., Zabala-Travers S, Choi M, Cheng WC, Badano A. Effect of color visualization and display hardware on the visual assessment of pseudocolor medical images. Med Phys. 2015;42(6):2942-2954. doi: 10.1118/1.4921125 and Plaxco, J. The Difference Between Tme Color, False Color and Pseudo Color. Mars Art Gallery. Retrieved October 27, 2022, from http://www.marsartgallery.com/color.html, each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
[00487] In one embodiment, the system incorporates at least one imager (e.g., camera), at least one spectrometer, at least one scanner, at least one medical device, at least one lighting source, at least one sensor, at least one lens, at least one processor, at least one memory', at least one computing device, at least one database, at least one learning algorithm (e.g., deep neural network) for image processing and comparison, and/or at least one viewing device. [00488] In one embodiment, the at least one lighting source is a white light which is effective in detecting lesions. In another embodiment, the at least one lighting source is a variable frequency lighting source including, but not limited to, visible light, infrared light, and/or ultraviolet light. Advantageously, visible light, infrared, and/or ultraviolet light are effective in detecting bacterial infections, lipid plaque, and precancerous and subtle inflammatory conditions. In one embodiment, the system is preferably operable to use a narrowband fighting source (e.g., 300-3400Hz) in endoscopic diagnostic tests to provide a sharper and/or better contrast image. In another embodiment, the system is preferably operable to use an infrared lighting source to provide a transcutaneous illumination of tissue. See, e.g., Hermanowski, J. Light Source Helps Endoscopes Get Smaller and Smaller. Photonics. Retrieved October 27, 2022, from
902. which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
[00489] In one embodiment, the system further includes at least one contrast dye and/or at least one contrast agent. In one embodiment, the at least one contrast dye and/or at least one contrast agent is operable to increase the contrast of structures or fluids within the body in medical imaging. In one embodiment, the at least one contrast dye and/or at least one contrast agent is radioactive. In one embodiment, the at least one contrast dye and/or at least one contrast agent includes, but is not limited to, iodine, barium (e.g., barium sulfate), gadolinium, and/or microbubbles (e.g., saline). In one embodiment, the at least one contrast dye and/or at least one contrast agent is a fluorescence dye (e.g., indocyanine green, methylene blue). In another embodiment, the at least one contrast dye and/or at least one contrast agent includes at least one magnetic microstructure. See, e.g., U.S. Patent Nos. 10,188,755; 9,084,820; and 10,215,825, each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
[00490] In one embodiment, the system includes at least one imager for acquiring image data. The at least one imager preferably includes at least one lens and at least one image sensor (e.g., a camera, a video camera, a camcorder, a slow-motion camera, and/or a high- speed camera). The at least one lens directs light towards the at least one image sensor. The at least one lens includes, but is not limited to, at least one convex lens and/or at least one concave lens. In one embodiment, the at least one image sensor is a wide gamut image sensor, e.g., a wide gamut camera. In one embodiment, the at least one image sensor is a single-pixel image sensor. In one embodiment, the at least one image sensor does not include a detector array. In one embodiment, the at least one image sensor is a plurality of image sensors.
[00491] In one embodiment, one or more of the at least one imager is incorporated into the at least one medical device (e.g., endoscope). In one embodiment, one or more of the at least one imager is interchangeable such that the at least one medical device is compatible with a plurality of imagers. Advantageously, this modular design enables the at least one imager to be upgraded or swapped out depending on varying image acquisition needs and/or technological developments. In one embodiment, the at least one imager includes an array sensor such that the at least one imager is operable to provide multi-spectral capture and/or operate as a light field sensor.
[00492] In one embodiment, the at least one imager includes a plurality of lenses for a plurality of image sensors. In one embodiment, the plurality of lenses creates different focal
lengths for each of the plurality of image sensors. In one embodiment, the at least one imager is operable to change the focal lengths, e.g., by zooming. Alternatively, the system is operable to interpolate signals from the plurality of image sensors with different focal lengths to create hybrid sensor data. The system is operable to combine sensor data from each of the plurality of image sensors into a single set of image data. In one embodiment, the system includes a stabilizer, e.g., a gyroscope system. The at least one imager is preferably located on the stabilizer and the stabilizer moves the at least one imager to counteract movements that would result in blurry images. In one embodiment, the plurality of lenses is made from meta-materials such that the meta-materials enable a negative index of refraction. Advantageously, this optimizes focal length while minimizing physical length.
[00493] In one embodiment, the at least one imager includes at least one optical filter. In one embodiment, the at least one optical filter is overlaid atop of the at least one image sensor. In one embodiment, the at least one filter is an absorptive filter. Alternatively, the at least one filter is an interference filter or a dichroic filter. In one embodiment, the at least one filter has at least one cut-off wavelength and passes or blocks light based on the at least one cut-off wavelength (e.g., a long-pass filter, a short-pass filter, a bandpass filter, a multibandpass filter, a notch filter). In an alternative embodiment, the at least one filter modifies the intensity of all wavelengths equally, e.g., a neutral density filter. In one embodiment, the at least one filter is a filter array, e.g., a Bayer filter. Bayer filter arrays compatible with the present invention include, but are not limited to, RGB, CYGM, RGBE (red, green, blue, emerald), and/or CMY. The Bayer filter is operable to be modified. As a non-limiting example, the Bayer filter includes a magenta filter. Alternatively, the size of the elements in the Bayer filter are differentially adjusted to increase sensitivity of the at least one image sensor. In yet another alternative embodiment, one or more of the at least one filter is operable to be rotated, which advantageously enables the system to use different filters for different exposures. In one embodiment, the at least one filter includes a plurality of filter layers. In one embodiment, the at least one filter includes a plurality of filters. In one embodiment, the plurality of filters are arranged in a radial pattern. In one embodiment, the plurality of filters form a spinning filter wheel.
[00494] In one embodiment, an acquisition color gamut is identical to a display color gamut. In one embodiment, both the acquisition color gamut and the display color gamut are expanded color gamuts and/or include at least four primaries, e.g., 6P-B, 6P-C. Alternatively, the display color gamut (e.g., RGBCMY) has a larger volume than the acquisition color gamut (e.g., RGB). In yet another alternative embodiment, the display color gamut (e.g.,
RGB) has a smaller volume than the acquisition color gamut (e.g., RGBCMY, RGBCEY (i.e., two greens - green (G) and emerald (E))). The system is preferably operable to convert image data from the acquisition color gamut to the display color gamut.
[00495] In one embodiment, the system is operable to acquire raw image data as a raw image file. A raw image file is considered unprocessed and thus cannot be edited or printed. Raw image files include image data as well as metadata and a header. The metadata includes, but is not limited to, patient health information (PHI) (e.g., patient name, medical record number, date of birth), image anatomic source and/or tissue type, image acquisition parameters (e.g., image dimensions, voxel size, repetition time, voxel datatype), image sensor parameters, imager parameters, timecodes, imager ISO, aperture measurements (e.g., f-stop, aperture size), exposure data, color space parameters, lens data (e.g., focal length and lens type), filter data, file format, compression data, frame rate data, flash data, light source, location data, and/or flame data.
[00496] In one embodiment, the system is compatible with Digital Imaging and Communication in Medicine (DICOM) standards for metadata. DICOM metadata varies based on different imaging modalities (e.g., CT scans and ultrasounds) because there is specific metadata related to each modality. DICOM metadata defines information object definitions (IODS), which are object-oriented metadata organized into modules. Further, DICOM standardizes the structure of data values (e.g., date, time, patient names) and provides pre-defined lists of attributes (e.g., sex, body part). Additional information about DICOM is found in ISO 12052:2017 Health informatics — Digital imaging and communication in medicine (DICOM) including workflow and data management (8/2017), which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. See also, e.g., Caffery, Liam J et al, ‘Transforming Dermatologic Imaging for the Digital Era: Metadata and Standards,” Journal of Digital Imaging vol. 31,4 (2018): 568-577, doi:10.1007/sl0278-017-0045-8, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
[00497] Raw image formats include, but are not limited to, Digital Negative Raw (DNG), ISO 12234-2 (TIFF/EP), Nikon NEF, Canon Raw v2 (CR2), CR3, Sony S-Log, ARRI Log, Panasonic V-Log, and/or Redcode Raw (R3D) files. In one embodiment, the system is operable to store the raw image file before processing. The system is then operable to render the raw image data into rendered image data, wherein the rendered image data is operable to be viewed and/or edited. Rendering includes, but is not limited to, decoding, demosaicing (e.g., removing the effects of a Bayer filter), pixel removal (e.g., of defective pixels), interpolation (e.g., to replace removed pixels), white balancing, noise reduction, color
translation, tone reproduction, optical correction, contrast manipulation, resizing, splitting, and/or compression. Alternatively, the system does not compress the raw image data. In one embodiment, the system is operable to render the image data as a pipeline process, wherein each step is performed in succession. The order of the steps is operable to be changed. Alternatively, the system is operable to render the image data in parallel steps. In yet another alternative embodiment, the system is operable to render the image data by solving a single optimization problem. The system is operable to save image prior data and/or image variation data and use the image prior data and/or the image variation data in rendering, processing, and/or displaying the image data.
[00498] In one embodiment, rendering includes converting the raw image data into a color space, e.g., CIE 1931, ITU-R BT.2020. In a preferred embodiment, the system is operable to render the image data in a three-coordinate format wherein a first coordinate and a second coordinate are both colorimetric (chroma) and wherein a third coordinate is a luminance or a luma value. As a non-limiting example, the three-coordinate format is Yxy, wherein x and y are orthogonal colorimetric coordinates and wherein Y is a luminance coordinate. The system is also operable to apply a transformation (e.g., a gamma compression) to the luminance coordinate to create a luma coordinate (e.g., ¥'). Relative luminance values are also compatible. Alternative three-coordinate formats include, but are not limited to, L*a*b*, ICtCp, YCbCr, YUV, Yu’v’, YPbPr, and/or YIQ. Alternatively, the system is operable to render the image data as XYZ data. In one embodiment, the system includes a user interface for accepting user input. In one embodiment, the user input determines how the raw image data is rendered. In one embodiment, the system is operable to apply an opto-electronic transfer function (OETF) and an electro-optical transfer function (EOTF) to the image data. Alternatively, the system is operable to apply at least one non-linear function (e.g., an OOTF) to the image data. In one embodiment, the system includes at least one look-up table (LUT). The LUT is operable to be implemented in hardware (e.g., in an FPGA) and/or in software. [00499] In one embodiment, the system is operable to remap colors to include a just noticeable difference for display on a viewing device. For example, a first color and a second color are not perceptually different to a viewer, so the second color is remapped to a modified second color, which advantageously allows the viewer to perceive the differences between the first color and the modified second color. Further, the system retains the original information, which allows the system to perform a plurality of learning techniques and/or a plurality of predictive analytics techniques using unmodified data. The system is also
operable to retain information regarding the remapping. In one embodiment, the retained information is stored in the metadata.
[00500] In one embodiment, the at least one imager acquires data as Yxy data, XYZ data, RGB data, and/or multi-primary data (e.g., RGBC, RGBCY, RGBCMY, RGBEYC). Additionally or alternatively, the at least one imager is operable to acquire data including, but not limited to, hyperspectral data, ultraviolet (UV) data, and/or infrared (IR) data. See, e.g., Lu, Guolan, and Baowei Fei. “Medical hyperspectral imaging: a review.” Journal of Biomedical Optics vol. 19,1 (2014): 10901. doi:10.1117/l.JB0.19.1.010901, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
[00501] In one embodiment, the present invention is used to process hyperspectral data, UV data, and/or IR data that is outside of the visible spectrum. In one embodiment, the system extends colorimetric visible data with data that is outside of the visible spectrum. For example, the system creates two different three-coordinate format elements for each data point acquired from the at least one imager such that one of the elements is related to Yxy (e.g., Y’xy) and the other is related to WUI (e.g., W’UI), wherein W (or W’) is a function similar to Y (or Y’) but encompasses more of the UV and IR wavelengths, wherein U is the UV channel, and I is the IR channel, and W (or W’) is proportional to the intensity of U and I. The system is operable to calculate a projection using the WUI values such that the projection plane is wui. The system is operable to assess the relevance of a spectral captured channel and its propensity to change rapidly. The system is operable to assign captured elements to a specific primary. Alternatively, the system is operable to assign captured elements to a mathematical combination of captured elements, for example, UV*Red and IR*Cyan. Although the system is described with respect to non-linear forms including Y’xy and W’UI, the system is not limited to these forms. In one embodiment, a non-linear function is applied to xy and/or UI. In one embodiment, xy and/or UI are scaled.
[00502] In one embodiment, the present invention further includes at least one spectrometer. The at least one spectrometer includes, but is not limited to, a filtered camera, a whiskbroom scanner, a pushbroom scanner, an integral field spectrograph, a wedge imaging spectrometer, a Fourier transform imaging spectrometer, a computed tomography imaging spectrometer (CTIS), an image replicating imaging spectrometer (IRIS), a coded aperture snapshot spectral imager (CASSI), an image mapping spectrometer (IMS), and/or a spectrophotometer. For example, the spectrophotometer is used to acquire color data to perform shade matching for a dental implant.
[00503] In a preferred embodiment, the present invention incorporates a luminance (e.g., Y) and two independent colorimetric coordinates (e.g., x and y, u' and v'). Advantageously, this allows for separate processing of luminance and the two independent colorimetric coordinates. In one embodiment, a non-linear function, an algorithm, and/or a LUT is operable to be placed only on the luminance. In another embodiment, the non-linear function, the algorithm, and/or the LUT is operable to be placed on the luminance and the two independent colorimetric coordinates. In one embodiment, the system is operable to include at least two luminance levels (e.g., standard and increased luminance). Advantageously, increasing the luminance temporarily may improve visualization of images while minimizing impact to the longevity of the display. In addition, the system is operable to leverage Yxy and/or Yu V to plot the two independent colorimetric coordinates x and y outside the boundaries of the CIE-1931 color space. Advantageously, this enables tire system to render Ultraviolet Visible Near Infrared Spectrophotometry (UV-Vis-NIR) raw data into rendered image data. See, e.g., U.S. Patent No. 9,685,109 and Tom Kimpe and Albert Xthona, "Quantification of detection probability of microcalcifications at increased display luminance levels," Breast Imaging, Springer Berlin Heidelberg, 2012, 490-497, and Ultraviolet Visible Near Infrared Spectrophotometry (UV-Vis-NIR). Covalent Metrology. Retrieved October 27, 2022. from https://covajentmetTology.com/techniaues/ukraviolet-visible-near-infrared- snectrophotometrv-uv-vis-nir/. each of which is incorporated herein by reference.
[00504] As previously described, the system further includes at least one viewing device. In one embodiment, the at least one viewing device is a multi-primary display (e.g., RGBC, RGBCY, RGBCMY). Advantageously, adding a cyan primary allows for greater range of colors and allows for better visualization of green-cyan pseudocolor, which is a current challenge in medical imagery. See, e.g., Zabala-Travers, Silvina et al. “Effect of color visualization and display hardware on the visual assessment of pseudocolor medical images. Medical Physics vol. 42,6 (2015): 2942-54. doi: 10.1118/1.4921125, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. Additionally, a multi-primary display is operable to provide additional colors that are not available on an RGB device. For example, and not limitation, an RGB 12-bit display is operable to display (212)3 = 68.7 trillion colors, while a 12-bit display having four primaries (e.g., RGBC) is operable to display (212)4 = 281.5 trillion colors.
[00505] In one embodiment, the at least one viewing device is operable to display colors outside of an ITU-R BT.2020 color gamut. In one embodiment, the at least one viewing device is operable to display at least 80% of a total area covered by the CIE-1931 color space.
In one embodiment, the at least one viewing device is as described in U.S. Patent No. 11,030,934, filed October 1, 2020 and issued June 8, 2021, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. In one embodiment, the at least one viewing device is a screen, e.g., a liquid crystal display (LCD) screen, a fight-emitting diode (LED) screen, an LED-backlit screen, an organic LED (OLED) screen, an active matrix OLED (AMOLED) screen, a quantum dot (QD) display, a perovskite display, a stereoscopic display (e.g., head-mounted and/or autostereoscopic), a virtual reality (VR) display, and/or an augmented reality display. In an alternative embodiment, the at least one viewing device includes at least one projector. The at least one viewing device is operable to display the image data after it has been acquired, rendered, and/or processed by the system. In another embodiment, the at least one viewing device includes a plurality of display devices (e.g., screens, projectors).
[00506] In one embodiment, the at least one viewing device is operable to modify display parameters of the image data, including, but not limited to, a gamut, a flame rate, a sampling rate, an aspect ratio, a data format, metadata, atone curve (e.g., perceptual quantizer (PQ), hybrid log-gamma (HLG), and gamma), and/or SDP parameters.
[00507] In one embodiment, the system further includes additional health information including, but not limited to, vital signs, test results (e.g., blood test results, genetic test results), previous images or scans, and/or health history.
[00508] In one embodiment, the system incorporates a plurality of learning techniques in the imaging and/or the diagnostics. In a preferred embodiment, the plurality of learning technique utilizes a training set to train the system (e.g., during a learning period). The plurality of learning techniques includes, but is not limited to, machine learning (ML), artificial intelligence (Al), deep learning (DL), neural networks (NNs), artificial neural networks (ANNs), support vector machines (SVMs), Markov decision process (MDP), decision trees, linear regression, logistic regression, naive Bayes, ^-nearest neighbor, random forest, Adaptive Boosting (i.e., AdaBoost), and/or natural language processing (NLP). In one embodiment, the plurality of learning techniques is operable to extract features from an image including, but not limited to, at least one intensity, at least one edge, at least one texture, at least one segment, at least one color, at least one luminance, at least one color/tone gradient, at least one histogram/heat diagram, and/or at least one wavelength from an image. In one embodiment, the ANNs include, but are not limited to, a multilayer perceptron (MLP). Alternatively or additionally, the ANNs include a single-layer perceptron (SLP). In one embodiment, the learning system includes a feed-forward network trained by a backpropagation algorithm. In one embodiment, the plurality of learning techniques includes
supervised learning techniques. See, e.g., Mahmood F, Bendayan S, Ghazawi FM, Litvinov IV. Editorial: The Emerging Role of Artificial Intelligence in Dermatology. Front Med (Lausanne). 2021 Nov 17;8:751649. doi: 10.3389/fined.2021.751649. PMID: 34869445; PMCID: PMC8635630 and Lavars, N. (February 19, 2021). Al uses "Ugly duckling" technique to spot melanoma with high accuracy. New Atlas. Retrieved October 27, 2022, from https://newatlas.com/medical/ai-ugly-duckling-melanoma-skin-cancer/, each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
[00509] Alternatively or additionally, the plurality of learning techniques includes unsupervised learning techniques. Unsupervised learning techniques include, but are not limited to, K-means, mean shift, affinity propagation, hierarchical clustering, density-based spatial clustering of applications with noise (DBSCAN), Gaussian mixture modeling, Maikov random fields, iterative self-organizing data (ISODATA), and fuzzy C-means systems. In one embodiment, the plurality of learning techniques includes reinforcement learning techniques (e.g., Maja, Teaching-Box) The system is operable to use any of the aforementioned learning techniques alone or in combination.
[00510] Further, the system is operable to utilize predictive analytics techniques including, but not limited to, machine learning (ML), artificial intelligence (Al), neural networks (NNs) (e.g., long short term memory' (LSTM) neural networks), deep learning, historical data, and/or data mining to make future predictions and/or models. The system is preferably operable to recommend and/or perform actions based on historical data, external data sources, ML, Al, NNs, and/or other learning techniques. The system is operable to utilize predictive modeling and/or optimization algorithms including, but not limited to, heuristic algorithms, particle swarm optimization, genetic algorithms, technical analysis descriptors, combinatorial algorithms, quantum optimization algorithms, iterative methods, deep learning techniques, and/or feature selection techniques. In one embodiment, the predictive modeling and/or optimization algorithms include extraction of features from an image including, but not limited to, at least one intensity, at least one edge, at least one texture, at least one segment, at least one color, at least one luminance, and/or at least one wavelength from an image. See, e.g., Erickson, Bradley J et al. “Machine Learning for Medical Imaging.” Radiographics: a review publication of the Radiological Society of North America, Inc vol. 37,2 (2017): 505- 515. doi: 10.1148/rg.2017160130, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
[00511] In one embodiment, the system is used in digital dermoscopy and/or imaging, viewing, and/or diagnosing skin conditions. The viewing device is preferably operable to display images of tissue, live tissue manipulation (e.g., in real time or near-real time), and/or
images of various tissue types within or on the body with increased color accuracy. In particular, the ability to identify and detect tissue color variations and changes is important for diagnostic imaging related to the skin and other organs (e.g., brain, lungs, etc.). A person’s skin tone may vary slightly due to a number of factors, but the two main influences are health and emotion. The human visual system has been optimized to detect small changes in skin reflectivity due to blood flow and oxygenation. The M (green) and L (red) cones are operable to detect these changes. There is a long-standing, unmet need for an extended gamut providing more accurate flesh tones. In a preferred embodiment, the viewing device is a multi-primary (e.g., RGBCMY) viewing device. In a preferred embodiment, the viewing device includes a cyan primary. In another preferred embodiment, the viewing device includes a yellow primary. In one embodiment, the viewing device has a red primary with a longer wavelength than 615 nm. Flesh tones often appear yellowish or reddish after color correction. Additionally, skin often appears shiny after color correction. Advantageously, increasing a cyan component and/or a magenta component improves the color accuracy of the flesh tones and reduces the shiny appearance of skin.
[00512] In one embodiment, the present invention is used to ensure color fidelity of the imaging and/or the diagnostics. In one embodiment, the system includes at least one chip chart with a plurality of colors and/or at least one reference to calibrate the system . For example, a digital pathology scanner often incorporates at least one sensor, at least one light source, at least one lens, and at least one processor. In one embodiment, the digital pathology scanner is calibrated using at least one reference slide with a plurality of known colors. In one embodiment, tire at least one reference slide mimics at least one stained tissue sample and/or at least one fluorescent marker. An example of a reference slide is disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 10,241,310, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. In a preferred embodiment, the digital pathology scanner is operable to scan the at least one reference slide and/or at least one sample as Yxy data and/or XYZ data. Alternatively, the digital pathology scanner is calibrated using at least one color patch. In one embodiment, spectral transmittance of each of the at least one color patch is measured (e.g., using a spectroradiometer). Advantageously, scanning as Yxy data and/or XYZ data provides a larger gamut than RGB data. Color fidelity in scanning is very important, both for individual diagnostics and in conducting research studies across multiple sites. Additional information regarding colorimetry is included in ISO CIE 11664-6:2014 and ISO CIE 15076-1:2010, each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
[00513] In one embodiment, the present invention is used to ensure standardization of images captured for telemedicine regardless of the light source used in the image. In one embodiment, the system includes at least one tele-med-chart with a plurality of colors and/or at least one reference to normalize and equalize various light sources and calibrate the at least one imager. The system is operable to digitally evaluate an image of the tele-med-chart that was captured by the at least one imager to characterize the overall light field within the image. The system is operable to use data from the captured image of the tele-med-chart along with data of the at least one imager to digitally standardize a captured image for the purpose of telemedicine. Advantageously, this eliminates any ambiguity of what light source was used when assessing an image for telemedicine purposes. In one embodiment, the tele- med-chart includes at least one UV fluorescent dye that emits in the visible spectrum. In another embodiment, tire tele-med-chart is transparent such that different transparent dyes are selected to attenuate different wavelengths. Advantageously, a transparent tele-med-chart is operable to have a clear segment with no dye such that the clear segment is used as a reference.
[00514] In one embodiment, the at least one viewing device has a built-in calibrator to calibrate the individual primary channels of the at least one viewing device over time. The system is operable to calibrate die channels of the viewing device as the relative intensities of the individual primary channels drift over time. For example, the system is operable to adjust the relative individual primary channel intensity ratios to a desired standard point. Advantageously, this improves the stability of the primaries of the viewing device overtime. [00515] FIG. 81 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of the invention illustrating a computer system, generally described as 800, having a network 810, a plurality of computing devices 820, 830, 840, a server 850, and a database 870.
[00516] The server 850 is constructed, configured, and coupled to enable communication over a network 810 with a plurality of computing devices 820, 830, 840. The server 850 includes a processing unit 851 with an operating system 852. The operating system 852 enables the server 850 to communicate through network 810 with the remote, distributed user devices. Database 870 may house an operating system 872, memory 874, and programs 876. [00517] In one embodiment of the invention, the system 800 includes a network 810 for distributed communication via a wireless communication antenna 812 and processing by at least one mobile communication computing device 830. Alternatively, wireless and wired communication and connectivity between devices and components described herein include wireless network communication such as WI-FI, WORLDWIDE INTEROPERABILITY
FOR MICROWAVE ACCESS (WIMAX), Radio Frequency (RF) communication including RF identification (RFID), NEAR FIELD COMMUNICATION (NFC), BLUETOOTH including BLUETOOTH LOW ENERGY (BLE), ZIGBEE, Infrared (IR) communication, cellular communication, satellite communication. Universal Serial Bus (USB), Ethernet communications, communication via fiber-optic cables, coaxial cables, twisted pair cables, and/or any other type of wireless or wired communication. In another embodiment of the invention, the system 800 is a virtualized computing system capable of executing any or all aspects of software and/or application components presented herein on the computing devices 820, 830, 840. In certain aspects, the computer system 800 may be implemented using hardware or a combination of software and hardware, either in a dedicated computing device, or integrated into another entity, or distributed across multiple entities or computing devices. [00518] By way of example, and not limitation, the computing devices 820, 830, 840 are intended to represent various forms of electronic devices including at least a processor and a memory, such as a server, blade server, mainframe, mobile phone, personal digital assistant (PDA), smartphone, desktop computer, notebook computer, tablet computer, workstation, laptop, and other similar computing devices. The components shown here, their connections and relationships, and their functions, are meant to be exemplary only, and are not meant to limit implementations of the invention described and/or claimed in the present application. [00519] In one embodiment, the computing device 820 includes components such as a processor 860, a system memory 862 having a random access memory (RAM) 864 and a read-only memory (ROM) 866, and a system bus 868 that couples the memory 862 to the processor 860. In another embodiment, the computing device 830 may additionally include components such as a storage device 890 for storing the operating system 892 and one or more application programs 894, a network interface unit 896, and/or an input/output controller 898. Each of the components may be coupled to each other through at least one bus 868. The input/output controller 898 may receive and process input from, or provide output to, a number of other devices 899, including, but not limited to, alphanumeric input devices, mice, electronic styluses, display units, touch screens, gaming controllers, joy sticks, touch pads, signal generation devices (e.g., speakers), augmented reality/virtual reality (AR/VR) devices (e.g., AR/VR headsets), or printers.By way of example, and not limitation, the processor 860 may be a general-purpose microprocessor (e.g., a central processing unit (CPU)), a graphics processing unit (GPU), a microcontroller, a Digital Signal Processor (DSP), an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), a Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA), a Programmable Logic Device (PLD), a controller, a state machine, gated or
transistor logic, discrete hardware components, or any other suitable entity or combinations thereof that can perform calculations, process instractions for execution, and/or other manipulations of information.
[00520] In another implementation, shown as 840 in FIG. 81 multiple processors 860 and/or multiple buses 868 may be used, as appropriate, along with multiple memories 862 of multiple types (e.g., a combination of a DSP and a microprocessor, a plurality of microprocessors, one or more microprocessors in conjunction with a DSP core).
[00521] Also, multiple computing devices may be connected, with each device providing portions of the necessary- operations (e.g., a server bank, a group of blade servers, or a multiprocessor system). Alternatively, some steps or methods may be performed by circuitry- that is specific to a given function.
[00522] According to various embodiments, the computer system 800 may operate in a networked environment using logical connections to local and/or remote computing devices 820, 830, 840 through a network 810. A computing device 830 may connect to a network 810 through a network interface unit 896 connected to a bus 868. Computing devices may communicate communication media through wired networks, direct-wired connections or wirelessly, such as acoustic, RF, or infrared, through an antenna 897 in communication with the network antenna 812 and the network interface unit 896, which may include digital signal processing circuitry when necessary. The network interface unit 896 may provide for communications under various modes or protocols.
[00523] In one or more exemplary aspects, the instructions may be implemented in hardware, software, firmware, or any combinations thereof. A computer readable medium may provide volatile or non-volatile storage for one or more sets of instructions, such as operating systems, data structures, program modules, applications, or other data embodying any one or more of the methodologies or functions described herein. The computer readable medium may include the memory 862, tire processor 860, and/or the storage media 890 and may be a single medium or multiple media (e.g., a centralized or distributed computer system) that store the one or more sets of instructions 900. Non-transitory computer readable media includes all computer readable media, with the sole exception being a transitory, propagating signal per se. The instructions 900 may further be transmitted or received over the network 810 via the network interface unit 896 as communication media, which may include a modulated data signal such as a carrier wave or other transport mechanism and includes any deliver media. The term “modulated data signal” means a signal that has one or more of its characteristics changed or set in a manner as to encode information in the signal.
[00524] Storage devices 890 and memoty 862 include, but are not limited to, volatile and non-volatile media such as cache, RAM, ROM, EPROM, EEPROM, FLASH memory, or other solid state memory technology, discs (e.g., digital versatile discs (DVD), HD-DVD, BLU-RAY, compact disc (CD), or CD-ROM) or other optical storage; magnetic cassettes, magnetic tape, magnetic disk storage, floppy disks, or other magnetic storage devices; or any other medium that can be used to store the computer readable instructions and which can be accessed by the computer system 800.
[00525] In one embodiment, the computer system 800 is within a cloud-based network. In one embodiment, the server 850 is a designated physical server for distributed computing devices 820, 830, and 840. In one embodiment, the server 850 is a cloud-based server platform. In one embodiment, the cloud-based server platform hosts serverless functions for distributed computing devices 820, 830, and 840.
[00526] In another embodiment, the computer system 800 is within an edge computing network. The server 850 is an edge server, and the database 870 is an edge database. The edge server 850 and the edge database 870 are part of an edge computing platform. In one embodiment, the edge server 850 and the edge database 870 are designated to distributed computing devices 820, 830, and 840. In one embodiment, the edge server 850 and the edge database 870 are not designated for computing devices 820, 830, and 840. The distributed computing devices 820, 830, and 840 are connected to an edge server in the edge computing network based on proximity, availability, latency, bandwidth, and/or other factors.
[00527] It is also contemplated that the computer system 800 may not include all of the components shown in FIG. 81 may include other components that are not explicitly shown in FIG. 81 or may utilize an architecture completely different than that shown in FIG. 81. The various illustrative logical blocks, modules, elements, circuits, and algorithms described in connection with the embodiments discussed herein may be implemented as electronic hardware, computer software, or combinations of both. To clearly illustrate the interchangeability of hardware and software, various illustrative components, blocks, modules, circuits, and steps have been described above generally in terms of their functionality. Whether such functionality is implemented as hardware or software depends upon the particular application and design constraints imposed on the overall system. Skilled artisans may implement the described functionality in varying ways for each particular application (e.g., arranged in a different order or positioned in a different way), but such implementation decisions should not be interpreted as causing a departure from the scope of the present invention.
[00528] The above-mentioned examples are provided to serve the purpose of clarifying the aspects of the invention, and it will be apparent to one skilled in the art that they do not serve to limit the scope of the invention. By nature, this invention is highly adjustable, customizable and adaptable. The above-mentioned examples are just some of the many configurations that the mentioned components can take on. All modifications and improvements have been deleted herein for the sake of conciseness and readability but are properly within the scope of the present invention.
Claims
1. A system for displaying a primary color system, comprising: a set of image data including a set of primary color signals, wherein the set of primary' color signals corresponds to a set of values in an International Commission on Illumination (CIE) Yxy color space, wherein the set of values in the CIE Yxy color space includes a luminance (Y) and two colorimetric coordinates (x,y), wherein the set of image data includes medical image data; an image data converter, wherein the image data converter includes a digital interface, and wherein the digital interface is operable to encode and decode the set of values in the CIE Yxy color space; and at least one viewing device; wherein processed Yxy data is transported between the encode and the decode; and wherein the image data converter is operable to convert the set of image data for display- on the at least one viewing device.
2. The system of claim 1, wherein the image data converter is operable to convert the set of values in the CIE Yxy color space to a plurality of color gamuts.
3. The system of claim 1 , wherein the image data converter includes a look-up table .
4. The system of claim 1, wherein the set of image data includes colors outside of an International Telecommunication Union Recommendation (ITU-R) BT.2020 color gamut.
5. The system of claim 1, wherein the image data converter is operable to folly sample the processed Yxy- data on a first channel and subsample the processed Yxy data on a second channel and a third channel.
6. The system of claim 1, wherein the processed Yxy data on a first channel, a second channel, and a third channel are folly sampled.
7. The system of claim 1, wherein the encode includes scaling of the two colorimetric coordinates (x,y), thereby creating a first scaled colorimetric coordinate and a second scaled colorimetric coordinate and/or the decode includes rescaling of data related to the first scaled colorimetric coordinate and data related to the second scaled colorimetric coordinate.
8. The system of claim 1, wherein the encode includes converting the set of primary color signals to XYZ data and then converting the XYZ data to create the set of values in the CIE Yxy color space and/or the decode includes converting the processed Yxy data to XYZ data and then converting the XYZ data to a format operable to display on the at least one viewing device.
9. The system of claim 1, further including at least one non-linear function, wherein the at least one non-linear function includes a data range reduction function with a value between about 0.25 and about 0.9 and/or an inverse data range reduction function with a value between about 1.1 and about 4.
10. The system of claim 1, further including at least one imager, wherein one or more of the at least one imager is operable to provide the medical image data.
11. The system of claim 1, wherein the system is compatible with Digital Imaging Communication in Medicine standards for metadata.
12. The system of claim 1, further including at least one processor coupled to at least one memory and at least one learning algorithm for image processing and comparison.
13. The system of claim 1, wherein the set of image data further includes hyperspectral data, ultraviolet (UV) data, and/or infrared (IR) data.
14. The system of claim 13, wherein the image data converter is operable to create two different three-coordinate format elements, wherein the first three-coordinate format element is Yxy and the second three-coordinate format element includes a first coordinate related to the UV data, a second coordinate related to the IR data, and a third coordinate proportional to an intensity of the UV data and the IR data.
15. The system of claim 1, further including at least one chip chart or at least one tele-med- chart with a plurality of colors and/or at least one reference to calibrate the system .
16. A system for displaying a primary color system, comprising: a set of image data including a set of primary color signals, wherein the set of primary color signals corresponds to a set of values in an International Commission on Illumination (CIE) Yxy color space, wherein the set of values in the CIE Yxy color space includes a luminance (Y) and two colorimetric coordinates (x,y), wherein the set of image data includes medical image data; at least one imager, wherein one or more of the at least one imager is operable to provide the medical image data; and an image data converter, wherein the image data converter includes a digital interface, and wherein the digital interface is operable to encode and decode the set of values in the CIE Yxy color space; wherein processed Yxy data is transported between the encode and the decode; wherein the one or more of the at least one imager is incorporated into at least one medical device; and
wherein the image data converter is operable to convert the set of image data for display on at least one viewing device.
17. A system for displaying a primary color system, comprising: a set of image data including a set of primary color signals, wherein the set of primary' color signals corresponds to a set of values in an International Commission on Illumination (CIE) Yxy color space, wherein the set of values in the CIE Yxy color space includes a luminance (Y) and two colorimetric coordinates (x,y), wherein the set of image data includes medical image data; at least one imager, wherein one or more of the at least one imager is operable to provide the medical image data; an image data converter, wherein the image data converter includes a digital interface, and wherein the digital interface is operable to encode and decode the set of values in the CIE Yxy color space; and at least one viewing device; wherein the image data converter and the at least one viewing device are in communication; wherein processed Yxy data is transported between the encode and the decode; and wherein the image data converter is operable to convert the set of image data for display on the at least one viewing device.
18. The system of claim 17, wherein the at least one viewing device includes at least four primaries.
19. The system of claim 17, wherein the at least one viewing device is operable to display colors outside of an International Telecommunication Union Recommendation (ITU-R) BT.2020 color gamut.
20. The system of claim 17, wherein the at least one viewing device includes a headset configured for virtual reality, augmented reality, and/or mixed reality- environments.
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US17/976,347 US11587491B1 (en) | 2018-10-25 | 2022-10-28 | System and method for a multi-primary wide gamut color system |
US17/976,347 | 2022-10-28 |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2024091878A1 true WO2024091878A1 (en) | 2024-05-02 |
Family
ID=90831868
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/US2023/077539 WO2024091878A1 (en) | 2022-10-28 | 2023-10-23 | System and method for a multi-primary wide gamut color system |
Country Status (1)
Country | Link |
---|---|
WO (1) | WO2024091878A1 (en) |
Citations (6)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20110028790A1 (en) * | 2004-09-24 | 2011-02-03 | Vivid Medical, Inc. | Disposable endoscopic access device and portable display |
US11069279B2 (en) * | 2018-10-25 | 2021-07-20 | Baylor University | System and method for a multi-primary wide gamut color system |
US20210334967A1 (en) * | 2014-05-12 | 2021-10-28 | Healthy.Io Ltd. | Systems and methods for urianlysis using a personal communications device |
US20210381893A1 (en) * | 2018-08-01 | 2021-12-09 | Qcell Pc | Hybrid spectral imaging devices, systems and methods |
US20220160228A1 (en) * | 2019-03-20 | 2022-05-26 | Carl Zeiss Meditec Ag | A patient tuned ophthalmic imaging system with single exposure multi-type imaging, improved focusing, and improved angiography image sequence display |
US20230073331A1 (en) * | 2018-10-25 | 2023-03-09 | Baylor University | System and method for a multi-primary wide gamut color system |
-
2023
- 2023-10-23 WO PCT/US2023/077539 patent/WO2024091878A1/en unknown
Patent Citations (6)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20110028790A1 (en) * | 2004-09-24 | 2011-02-03 | Vivid Medical, Inc. | Disposable endoscopic access device and portable display |
US20210334967A1 (en) * | 2014-05-12 | 2021-10-28 | Healthy.Io Ltd. | Systems and methods for urianlysis using a personal communications device |
US20210381893A1 (en) * | 2018-08-01 | 2021-12-09 | Qcell Pc | Hybrid spectral imaging devices, systems and methods |
US11069279B2 (en) * | 2018-10-25 | 2021-07-20 | Baylor University | System and method for a multi-primary wide gamut color system |
US20230073331A1 (en) * | 2018-10-25 | 2023-03-09 | Baylor University | System and method for a multi-primary wide gamut color system |
US20220160228A1 (en) * | 2019-03-20 | 2022-05-26 | Carl Zeiss Meditec Ag | A patient tuned ophthalmic imaging system with single exposure multi-type imaging, improved focusing, and improved angiography image sequence display |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US11158232B2 (en) | System and method for a six-primary wide gamut color system | |
US11587491B1 (en) | System and method for a multi-primary wide gamut color system | |
US11410593B2 (en) | System and method for a multi-primary wide gamut color system | |
US11869408B2 (en) | System and method for a multi-primary wide gamut color system | |
US12136376B2 (en) | System and method for a multi-primary wide gamut color system | |
US11475819B2 (en) | System and method for a multi-primary wide gamut color system | |
JP2022505623A (en) | 6 Primary color system and method for wide color gamut system | |
US11501419B1 (en) | System and method for displaying super saturated color | |
US11984055B2 (en) | System and method for a multi-primary wide gamut color system | |
US11341890B2 (en) | System and method for a multi-primary wide gamut color system | |
US20240054624A1 (en) | System and method for displaying super saturated color | |
KR20170124554A (en) | Adaptive color grade interpolation method and device | |
WO2024091878A1 (en) | System and method for a multi-primary wide gamut color system | |
US12148343B2 (en) | System and method for a multi-primary wide gamut color system | |
US20220343822A1 (en) | System and method for a multi-primary wide gamut color system | |
US20240339063A1 (en) | System and method for a multi-primary wide gamut color system | |
CA3197643A1 (en) | System and method for a multi-primary wide gamut color system |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 23883602 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |